Moderator’s Guide
for Elluminate Live! version 10
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Contents
Using this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Who should read this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii
How to use this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii
Conventions used in this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiv
Operating System Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiv
Menu Pathnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiv
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiv
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi
Chapter 1: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Minimum Client System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Joining an Elluminate Live! Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Setting Your Connection Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Prompting for the Connection Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Setting Your Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Navigating Within the Preferences List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Restoring Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Moving and Resizing the Preferences Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Setting Your Proxy Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Setting Notification Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Audible Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Configuring Your Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Launching an Offline Elluminate Live! Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 2: The Elluminate Live! Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
The Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Toolbar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Session Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doc. Revision 1.0
17
17
20
22
22
23
24
25
30
31
Page i
Using Mnemonic and Accelerator Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accelerator Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking, Unlocking, and Re-sizing the Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Mini-Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collapsing and Expanding the Mini-Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving the Mini-Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring the Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Controller with Raised Hands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing the Elluminate Live! Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Confirmation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
33
38
39
41
42
43
43
44
45
45
45
46
46
Chapter 3: The Participants Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Setting Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning Permissions to a Participant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Permissions from a Participant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventing New Participants from Entering the Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Granting Participants the Moderator Privilege . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knowing When Someone has Joined or Left a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand Raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Raise and Lower Your Hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand Raising Indicators and Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stepping Away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rejoining the Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Emotion Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Lights and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Halo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Away Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Setup Wizard Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reordering the Participants List Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting the Participants List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page ii
51
51
53
53
53
54
55
56
56
56
57
58
58
59
59
59
59
60
60
61
62
63
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Polling Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hiding/Showing Polling Responses from/to Participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Polling the Participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking the Polling Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing a Summary of the Polling Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Publishing the Polling Results to the Whiteboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing the Participants List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Participants List to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whiteboard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Request Desktop Control Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Participant Management Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breakout Room Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Showing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View a User’s Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Your User Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending eMail via a User’s Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
67
67
68
68
69
70
70
71
71
71
71
72
72
72
72
72
72
73
77
Chapter 4: In-Session Invitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Sending an In-Session Invitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Copying the Session Link to Another Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Setting the Email Text Encoding Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Chapter 5: Video Broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Enabling, Previewing, and Transmitting Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling Video Camera Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening, Expanding and Resizing the Video Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Previewing and Transmitting Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Video in the Mini-Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Note on Image Quality Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Frame Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Lights and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Video Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Video with Multiple Simultaneous Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling the Main View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Follow me Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording and Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doc. Revision 1.0
84
84
85
86
87
88
88
88
89
90
91
94
94
95
95
Page iii
Stopping, Closing and Disabling Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Stopping Video Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Closing the Video Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Disabling Video Camera Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Sending a Video Image to the Whiteboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Setting Video Permission for Participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Selecting and Configuring your Video Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Setting Video Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Setting Device Disconnection Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Setting the Frame Rate Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Changing the Video Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Chapter 6: The Chat Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Sending Chat Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send to This Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send to All Rooms, Moderators or a Single Participant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send to a Selected Group of Session Attendees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send Message as Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding External Links to your Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Emoticons to your Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Halo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Chat Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling Chat Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show Date/Time Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering Chat Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Text Size in the Conversation Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Text Size in the Message Text Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Chat Messages from the Mini-Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Chat Permission for Participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Chat Messages to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
106
106
107
107
108
109
109
110
110
110
111
111
112
113
113
114
115
Chapter 7: The Audio Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Basic Audio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Audio Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Simultaneous Talkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Audio Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating and Releasing Your Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Your Microphone and Speaker Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Another Talker’s Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Controller with Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Lights and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Audio Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page iv
118
118
121
122
122
122
124
125
126
126
127
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting an Audio Input Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting an Audio Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting Your Microphone to Let Listeners Catch Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting a Talker’s Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Audio Permission for Participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Audio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microphone Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speaker Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
128
129
131
132
133
133
134
138
Chapter 8: Telephone Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
The Key Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Elluminate Live! Moderator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Teleconference Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Teleconference Chairperson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Connection Information to a Telephone Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Session to the Telephone Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reconnecting the Session to the Teleconference when Disconnected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnecting the Session from the Telephone Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting the Teleconference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Announcing the Session to the Teleconference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joining a Teleconference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving a Teleconference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Communications Mode of Another Session Attendee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microphone and Speakers (Audio) to Telephone (Telephony) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone (Telephony) to Microphone and Speakers (Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending the Telephony Users to Breakout Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Telephony Permission for Participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting the Participants List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
144
144
144
145
148
150
151
152
152
153
153
153
154
154
155
155
155
156
157
157
158
Chapter 9: The Whiteboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Whiteboard Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Lights and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Whiteboard Permissions for Participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whiteboard Tools Permission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whiteboard Viewing Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show Participant Screen Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doc. Revision 1.0
160
161
161
161
162
162
162
164
Page v
Entering Content into the Whiteboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Tools Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a Presentation or Whiteboard File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manipulating Objects and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Explore Objects Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping and Ungrouping Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resizing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Objects in the Whiteboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dragging/Dropping and Copying/Pasting Text and Images to/from Other Applications . .
Moving Objects to the Background or Foreground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving Objects to the Front/Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aligning and Distributing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Whiteboard Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling the Whiteboard Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting Whiteboard Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Explore Screens Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating Between Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating New Blank Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Whiteboard Screen Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying Screens to Breakout Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cutting/Copying/Pasting/Deleting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting All Screen Peers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emptying Screen Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dragging/Dropping Screens to Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Screen Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Whiteboard Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Whiteboard Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locating an OpenOffice.org Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing Your Clip Art Collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Organizing Your Clip Art Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Clip Art Collection to the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Clip Art Collection from the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating New Clip Art Collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing, Deleting, and Merging Clip Art Collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page vi
165
165
166
168
172
177
185
185
187
189
191
191
192
194
195
196
197
197
198
199
201
202
203
203
203
205
208
210
211
212
213
216
217
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
223
224
224
226
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 10: Session Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Chapter 11: Application Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Setting the Application Sharing Permission for Participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hosting an Application Sharing Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Step for Sharing a Single Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sharing Your Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sharing One or More Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Showing Application Sharing Session in Presentation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Sharing Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Host’s Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Viewer’s Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pausing Application Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resuming Application Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show Preview Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preview in Mini-Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send Snapshot to Whiteboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send Snapshot with Delay to Whiteboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop the Application Sharing Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control of Your Shared Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Give Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Take Away Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Request Control of Someone Else's Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Control Back to the Desktop Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Request Control of Shared Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send Simulated Keystrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminate Remote Desktop Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sharing a Region of Your Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Application Sharing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hosting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permit Remote Control of Your Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtered Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simulated Keystrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use OpenGL Option (Mac only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Lights and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activity Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hosting Application Sharing Sessions on Windows Vista and Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Account Control and Application Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requesting Elevated Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allowing the Remote Control of your Application or Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doc. Revision 1.0
231
232
232
232
233
235
236
236
238
240
240
241
242
242
243
244
244
244
246
246
248
248
249
249
251
253
254
258
259
262
264
267
267
267
268
269
270
271
274
275
Page vii
Chapter 12: Presentation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Presentation Mode as Seen by the Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Presentation Mode Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Content in Presentation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Whiteboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Application Sharing Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opting Out and Returning to Presentation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opting Out of Presentation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Returning to Presentation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exiting Presentation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
278
279
281
281
282
284
284
285
285
Chapter 13: Web Tour & Web Push . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Web Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting a Web Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Web Tour Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing the Web Tour Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling Popups in the Browser (Windows only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Web Push . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
288
288
289
290
290
292
Chapter 14: Breakout Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Creating Private Breakout Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Public Breakout Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distributing Participants and Moderators into Public Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Others to Breakout Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
By Dragging and Dropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allowing Participants to Move Themselves to Breakout Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Yourself to a Breakout Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
By Dragging and Dropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Returning Yourself to the Main Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Returning Participants to the Main Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
By Dragging and Dropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Everyone at Once to the Main Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying Screens to the Main Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying All Screens of Selected Breakout Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying All Screens of All Breakout Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying Selected Screens of Breakout Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying A Single Breakout Room Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renaming a Breakout Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing a Breakout Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page viii
293
294
295
296
296
297
298
298
298
299
299
301
301
301
303
303
303
304
304
305
305
305
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 15: The Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Starting the Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Timer Settings Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hiding and Showing the Timer Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Show/Hide Timer Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hiding the Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Showing the Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pausing and Resuming the Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with the Timer within the Mini-Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Showing and Hiding the Timer from within the Mini-Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pausing and Resuming the Timer from within the Mini-Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Time from within the Mini-Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the Timer from within the Mini-Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bringing the Timer into Focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving the Timer Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
309
309
309
311
311
311
312
312
312
313
314
314
314
315
316
316
316
Chapter 16: File Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
The File Transfer Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a File by URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prompting Recipients to Save a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Giving Upload File Transfer Permission to Participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing and Reopening the File Transfer Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
317
318
319
320
320
321
321
322
Chapter 17: Multimedia Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
The Multimedia Library Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a Multimedia File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a Multimedia URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing a Multimedia File or URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Multimedia Files or URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the Currently Playing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing and Reopening the Multimedia Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doc. Revision 1.0
323
325
325
326
326
326
327
Page ix
Chapter 18: Interactive Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Recording Your Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Recording Reminder Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting a Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping and Pausing a Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resuming a Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually Adding an Index Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing a Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing a Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Names Hidden in Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating Within a Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knowing Where You Are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Playback Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Previous and Next Index Entry Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Prior and Upcoming Index Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Recording Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
330
330
331
332
332
332
333
333
334
335
336
337
337
337
338
Chapter 19: The Notes Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Opening and Closing the Notes Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting Notes Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Text Size in the Notes Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Presenter Notes Imported with a Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Notes Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Notes Documents List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching Notes Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting and Importing Notes Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Notes Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Compound Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes in Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Notes in a Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Notes in a Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page x
344
345
345
346
347
348
349
349
350
352
352
352
353
353
353
353
354
355
359
359
361
361
361
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 20: The Quiz Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Creating a Quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administering Quizzes to Participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing and Saving Quiz Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Quizzes to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Previously Saved Files into the Quiz Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a Quiz from the Quiz Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing and Reopening the Quiz Manager Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
363
365
367
368
369
370
371
371
Chapter 21: The Graphing Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Opening and Closing Graphing Calculator Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Private and Shared Calculators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching between the Private and Shared Graphing Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Shared Graphing Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Calculator Permission for Participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphing Functions Using the Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Mathematical Operators and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Function History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Evaluating Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting and Displaying Points on the Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Calculator Display Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Display Region and Grid Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zooming In and Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving the Graph in the Display Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doc. Revision 1.0
373
374
374
374
375
376
376
378
378
379
380
380
381
381
Page xi
Page xii
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Using this Guide
Who should read this guide
This guide is written for those who facilitate Elluminate Live! sessions – Moderators.
As an Elluminate Live! Moderator you need not be a computer expert, however, we do assume you
possess some basic computer literacy (i.e., working knowledge of your operating system, ability to
navigate between and within applications, understanding of basic text and graphics editing, etc.).
Users who make use of the accessibility features in Elluminate Live! should
refer to the Accessibility Guide for Moderators.
How to use this guide
Read the first three chapters of this guide prior to attending an Elluminate Live! session.
1. Read Conventions used in this guide in this chapter to familiarize yourself with the various
presentation, formatting and typographical conventions used in this guide.
2. Follow the instructions in Chapter 1, “Getting Started” to ensure you have the proper
hardware and software to run Elluminate Live! and to set up your Elluminate Live!
environment.
3. Read Chapter 2, “The Elluminate Live! Room” to familiarize yourself with the Elluminate
Live! user interface.
Refer to the remaining chapters in any order to become familiar with the available tools and
features of Elluminate Live!
For a discussion of the accessibility features in Elluminate Live!, including
Closed-Captioning, see the Accessibility Guide for Moderators.
Doc. Revision 1.0
Page xiii
Conventions used in this guide
Conventions used in this guide
Operating System Differences
This guide is written for Elluminate Live! users on all supported operating systems: Windows,
Mac OS X, Linux and Solaris.
Keystrokes and Mouse Clicks
The same keystrokes and mouse clicks are used on Windows, Linux and Solaris platforms. Those
used on Mac OS X are different. This guide gives instructions for users of all supported operating
systems. The Windows/Linux/Solaris keystrokes or mouse clicks are given first, followed by those
for Mac OS X (in parentheses):
Mouse Click Example
Select the object and then right-click (^Click on Mac) anywhere on the Whiteboard to
display the context menu.
Keystroke Example
Select the object(s) in the Whiteboard or in the Explore Objects window and then press
Ctrl+X ( ໜ X on Mac) to cut the object(s).
Screen Captures
Most screen captures shown in this guide were taken in a Windows environment. If you are
running Elluminate Live! on a Mac OS X, Solaris or Linux platform, the appearance of windows,
dialog boxes, etc. will differ slightly from those shown in this guide.
Menu Pathnames
This guide uses a shortcut to describe selections from menus and submenus. For example, rather
than saying, “From the File menu, select Save. Then from the Save menu select Chat
Conversation”, the following convention (separating submenu elements with >) is used:
Select File > Save > Chat Conversation…
Variables
There are a few menus in Elluminate Live! that are populated with data specific to the session.
Because we do not know in advance what those words or names will be, in this guide they are
represented by variables enclosed in angle brackets. For example, the variable <Attendee Name>
is used in the discussion of Chat to represent the names of Participants and Moderators (attendees)
listed in the Show and Send To option menus.
Page xiv
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Notes
Six types of notes are used in this guide to highlight information:
Notes of this format are used to highlight important information or to
present asides relevant to the topic at hand.
This is a tip. Tips provide helpful information on how to most effectively
use a particular function in Elluminate Live!
This is a caution. Cautions alert you to potentially confusing terminology or
difficulties that may occur when using Elluminate Live!.
This is a warning. Warnings alert you to potentially serious problems.
Notes of this format are used to highlight Solaris and Linux-specific
information.
Notes of this format are used to highlight Mac-specific information.
Terminology
The following terms are used in this guide when referencing Elluminate Live! users:

Moderator – Moderators have access to all Elluminate Live! features, including the ability
to grant Moderator status to Participants. The person conducting a session, such as a
teacher, is a Moderator.

Participant – Participants have restricted access to Elluminate Live! features. Students are
typically Participants, although Moderators can grant Participants Moderator status.

Attendee – Anyone attending the session (both Moderators and Participants).

Invitee – Anyone invited to the session (both Moderators and Participants).
Doc. Revision 1.0
Page xv
Getting Help
Typographical Conventions
Convention
Description
1. Number
Used to indicate a step in a task.
 Checkmark
Used for listing the different options available to you
to complete a task or function. Pick one only.
Bold
Used to give emphasis to a word.
Italics
Used to represent options or parameters. Also used in
cross references to sections in this guide or other
guides.
Underline
Used for links, such as links to websites.
Monospace
Used to indicate pathnames, filenames and folders.
<brackets>
Used to indicate variables.
Getting Help
Help is available from the following web pages:

Elluminate technical support at Elluminate’s Support Portal:
http://support.elluminate.com/

Training materials:
http://www.elluminate.com/training/
Page xvi
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 1: Getting Started
This chapter covers what you should do prior to moderating a session:

Ensure your computer meets the minimum system requirements recommended for running
an Elluminate Live! session on your computer.

Join an Elluminate Live! session. You may join a session either through an email link sent
to you by your organization or via a link on a web page. The method by which you join a
session will vary depending on your organization.

Launch into a private Elluminate Live! session where you can familiarize yourself with the
Whiteboard tools or create or review presentations and/or quizzes prior to joining your
scheduled session.

Once you have successfully launched into an Elluminate Live! session, set your
preferences and connection speed, run the Audio Setup Wizard and configure your proxy
settings.
Minimum Client System Requirements
Before you can get started in an Elluminate Live! session, you should ensure that your computer is
able to support the needs of the collaboration environment.
For all users, we strongly recommend that you use a headset (or at least
headphones or an echo cancelling microphone) rather than speakers when using
simultaneous talkers. This will eliminate potential echoing and feedback and
improve your audio experience.
Your computer should meet or exceed the following minimum requirements:
Windows

Windows XP (32 bit), Windows Vista (32 or 64 bit) or Windows 7 (32 or 64 bit)

Pentium III 1 GHz processor

256 MB RAM
Mac OS X

Mac OS X 10.5 (32 or 64 bit) or Mac OS X 10.6 (32 or 64 bit)

G4, G5 or Intel processor

256 MB RAM
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 1
Joining an Elluminate Live! Session
UltraSPARC Solaris

Solaris 10 (SPARC only) (64 bit)

UltraSPARC IIc 500 MHz processor

256 MB RAM
Linux

openSUSE 11 (64 bit) or Ubuntu 9.10 (64 bit)

Pentium III 1 GHz processor

256 MB RAM
In addition to the above requirements, all clients require the following:

Java version 1.5 or higher
For a 32 bit OS use a 32 bit JVM and for a 64 bit OS use a 64 bit JVM.

20 MB free disk space

28.8 KBps Internet connection

Windows, Linux or Solaris: soundcard with speakers and microphone or headset (or
telephone for Telephony users)

Macs: internal, USB, or external iSight microphone (or telephone for Telephony users)
Joining an Elluminate Live! Session
How you join an Elluminate Live! session varies depending on the organization hosting the
Elluminate Live! session. Follow the instructions provided by the organization hosting your
Elluminate Live! session.
Your System Administrator should provide you with the following information:

How to access your Elluminate Live! sessions.

Your username and password (if applicable).

How to access your recordings.

How and where to obtain the links to install the required software.

Who to contact for help and where to access the user guides and other resource material.
Page 2
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Setting Your Connection Speed
The first time you join a session, the Select connection speed dialog box appears prompting you to
select the connection speed that you will be using. After you exit the session, the connection speed
is automatically saved with the preferences.
Another way to set your connection speed is through the Preferences dialog. You may do this
outside of a session or anytime within a session.
Configure your connection speed in the Preferences dialog.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Connection under Session. The
Connection preferences panel appears.
3. From the list of Connection Speed options, select the modem or line speed that your
computer is using to connect to the Elluminate Live! Server. In most cases, this means
your Internet connection speed.
Setting the incorrect connection speed (either higher or lower) may result in
poor performance.
Select
If your connection is …
28.8K Dialup
28.8K modem
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 3
Setting Your Connection Speed
Select
If your connection is …
33.6K Dialup
33.6K modem
56K Dialup
56K modem
ISDN
High-speed dedicated telephone connection
Wireless
Wireless connection
Cable/DSL
High-speed cable connection or Digital Subscriber Line
LAN
Local Area Network
4. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you change your Connection Speed, Elluminate Live! will remember this setting each time
you join another session on the same computer.
You can restore your Session Connection Speed to the default. For details
on restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on page 8.
Prompting for the Connection Speed
Because your connection speed settings are saved for the next time you log in, you may find the
appearance of the Select connection speed dialog box to be unnecessary. We have provided an
option where you can decide whether you would like this dialog box to appear, never appear, or
appear only when the location changes (that is, your IP Address changes).
Configure your connection speed prompt in the Preferences dialog.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
Page 4
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Connection under Session. The
Connection preferences panel appears.
3. From the list of Prompt for speed options, select your desired option.
4. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you change your connection speed prompt, Elluminate Live! will remember this setting each
time you join another session on the same computer.
You can restore your Session connection speed prompt to the default. For
details on restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on page 8.
Setting Your Preferences
Although it is not necessary, you may want to set some of your application preferences before you
begin your session. You can do so through the Preferences dialog. Preferences are not tied to
individual sessions (they are used globally for all your sessions) and can be set even when you are
not connected to a live session. They are saved in a preferences file in the standard location for
your specific operating system.
You can open the Preferences dialog in two ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 5
Setting Your Preferences
The Preferences dialog is organized into two main areas: the Preferences list on the left and the
Preferences panels on the right. The Preferences list contains a list of modules and their associated
panels organized into a tree structure (in alphabetical order). The panel that is selected in the
Preferences list will be displayed in the Preferences panels area.
Page 6
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
If you select a module (rather than one of the panels beneath it), the topmost
panel associated with that module will be displayed in the Preferences panels area.
Navigating Within the Preferences List
You can move between modules and panels in the Preferences list using the arrow keys or by
simply clicking on a desired module or panel.
You also can collapse and expand the list of panels beneath a module by clicking on the disclosure
buttons.
Setting Preferences
Instructions for setting preferences are dispersed throughout this guide:

For instructions on setting preferences for Application Sharing, Audio, Video,
Whiteboard, In-Session Invitations and Session Plans, refer to the chapters dedicated to
those modules.

For instructions on setting preferences for General > Hot Keys, refer to Configuring Hot
Keys on page 39.

For instructions on setting preferences for Profile > My Profile, refer to Editing Your User
Profile on page 73.

For instructions on setting preferences for General > Proxy Settings and for Session/
Connection, refer to the applicable subsections in this chapter.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 7
Setting Your Proxy Configuration
Restoring Default Settings
If you are unsure about the preferences you set and want to start
over, you can revert back to the default (factory) settings. The
restoration can be done at an application level, module level or
panel level by selecting an option from the Restore Defaults
menu.

To restore defaults for the entire Elluminate Live!
application, select Restore All Modules.

To restore defaults for all panels within a specific module, select the module in the
Preferences list and then select Restore Module <Module Name> from the Restore
Defaults menu.

To restore defaults for a single panel only, select the panel in the Preferences list and then
select Restore Panel <Panel Name> from the Restore Defaults menu.
Moving and Resizing the Preferences Dialog
You can move the Preferences dialog by dragging its title bar. You also can resize it. If the
Preferences panel is too large to fit in the right side of the Preferences dialog, scroll bars will
appear so you can move within the panel.
The next time you open the Preferences dialog, it will be located in the same place and be of the
same size as when you last opened it. The panel you last worked in will be displayed.
Setting Your Proxy Configuration
If you are connecting through an Internet firewall, which is set up to block both outbound and
inbound connections and web browsing that is done through an HTTP or HTTPS proxy server,
you may have to change the Proxy Settings preference in Elluminate Live!
Generally speaking, the default Proxy Settings1 are sufficient. However, sometimes Java (the
software used to launch Elluminate Live!) is unable to automatically detect the proxy settings and
will be unable to connect to the proxy server. In this case, you may be able to start Elluminate
Live! but not be able to join a session.
1. Method: Proxy Settings From Launcher
Page 8
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
If you see a Connection failed error message (similar to the one below) it is a good indication that
you have encountered a proxy configuration error.
If this happens, you may have to change your Proxy Settings to enable Elluminate Live! to
communicate with your proxy server.
Ask your System Administrator to provide you with the necessary proxy
server information.
Configure your Proxy Settings in the Preferences dialog.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Proxy Settings under General. The Proxy
Settings preferences panel appears.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 9
Setting Your Proxy Configuration
3. Select the desired Method option from the Method drop-down list. The choices are the
following:

Proxy Settings From Launcher (Direct, Http, Https, etc.1) – Specifies that Elluminate
Live! is to use the connection settings from Java Web Start.2 If manual proxy settings
are not provided to Java Web Start, it will attempt to detect these settings on its own
and then pass the results to Elluminate Live! This is the default proxy setting and
should be changed only if you are unable to establish a reliable connection.

Direct Connection – Specifies that no proxy server is to be used. Elluminate Live! will
connect directly to the appropriate server.

Use SOCKS V4/V5 Proxy Server – Specifies that a version 4 SOCKS proxy server is
to be used.

HTTPS Proxy Server – Specifies that a secure HTTPS proxy server is to be used.

HTTP Proxy Server – Specifies that an HTTP proxy server is to be used.

HTTP Proxy Server (Half-Duplex) – Specifies that an HTTP proxy server is to be used
in reduced bandwidth half duplex mode. Use this option only if you have an HTTP
proxy server and you are unable to establish a reliable connection with the previous
setting.

HTTP Direct – Specifies that Elluminate Live! is to connect directly to the server with
the HTTP protocol. While this is similar to a direct connection, the use of the HTTP
protocol may reduce performance and should be used only if a normal direct
connection is not possible.

HTTP Direct (Half-Duplex) – Specifies that Elluminate Live! is to connect directly to
the server with the HTTP protocol in a reduced bandwidth half duplex mode. Use this
option only if you require an HTTP direct connection and are unable to establish a
reliable connection with the previous setting.
4. Enter your proxy server IP address in the Server field and enter your proxy serverport
number in the Port field. (You may have to ask your System Administrator to provide you
with this information.)
5. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you change the Proxy Settings, Elluminate Live! will remember these settings each time you
join another session on the same computer.
For more information on proxy configuration, visit the Knowledge Base located at
http://support.elluminate.com.
1. The parentheses will contain whichever type of proxy setting is detected from the launcher.
2. Part of the Java Runtime Environment.
Page 10
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
You can restore your Proxy Settings to the default. For details on restoring
default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on page 8.
Setting Notification Preferences
Audible Notifications
Audible notifications are system messages sent by Elluminate Live! to notify users when certain
important events occur within the session. These notifications are presented as sounds.
In the Preference dialog, you can listen to what each notification sounds like as well as enable or
disable the notifications. There are two built-in sets of notifications: Basic and All.
Basic notifications correspond to what was available in Elluminate Live!
9.7. This is the set that is enabled by default. Other audible notifications are new
in Elluminate Live! 10.0 and improve universal access. Some of the new audible
notifications are also helpful to Moderators as they provide additional awareness
of important events that occur in a session (e.g., someone joining the session).
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 11
Setting Notification Preferences
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Audible Notifications under General. The
Audible Notifications preferences panel appears.
3. To hear the sound used for a notification, click on its Preview (speaker) icon.
4. Enable and disable the notifications for the various events in the following ways.
 To create a custom set of notifications, click on the Enabled checkbox associated with
the desired individual events.
 Click on the Basic button to select the Hand Raised Alarm, Recording in Progress,
Start Recording, Stop Recording and Timer Alarm events. This is the default.
 Click on the All button to select all events.
5. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
Page 12
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
When you change the Audible Notifications, Elluminate Live! will remember these settings each
time you join another session on this computer.
You can restore your Audible Notifications to the default. For details on
restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on page 8.
Configuring Your Audio
Prior to moderating a session you should ensure that your Audio is configured correctly. You can
do so using the Audio Setup Wizard. See Using the Audio Setup Wizard on page 118.
Launching an Offline Elluminate Live! Session
To familiarize yourself with the Whiteboard tools or to configure your Audio, you can use an
offline Elluminate Live! session. An offline Elluminate Live! session can be accessed at any time.
You also can create or review presentations and/or quizzes.
The Participants, Chat, Audio, and Application Sharing windows do not
function in an offline Elluminate Live! session.
To load a Whiteboard presentation into an offline Elluminate Live! session,
you must be in your Private Work Area.
Anytime that you are in a session, click the
Online button in the lower left corner of the
Status Bar. You will now be in an offline Elluminate Live! session. All text messages and
Whiteboard screens that were visible in the session remain so you can review, print or save them.
If you are not already connected to a session,
1. Launch into an Elluminate Live! session.
2. If you are presented with a login dialog, click on Cancel to remain offline and
unconnected to the session.
3. As soon as you connect to the session, click the
Online button in the lower left corner
of the Status Bar. (If your server configuration is such that you receive a dialog box
prompting you to login, click Cancel in the Select User Name dialog box.) The private
session is now available for you to use.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 13
Launching an Offline Elluminate Live! Session
Page 14
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 2: The Elluminate Live! Room
The Elluminate Live! window consists of seven main areas:

The Menu bar at the top contains the File, Session, View, Tools, Windows and Help
menus.

The Main toolbar contains buttons for some of the more common commands that you
may use during your session. You can use the toolbar buttons or select the options from the
pull-down menus found on the Menu bar.

The Participants panel provides a list of all Participants and Moderators in the session
and their current activities. Activities range from speaking (Audio), sending Chat
messages, entering text for Closed-Captioning and using the Whiteboard drawing tools,
Graphing Calculator, Application Sharing, Video webcam and File Loading feature.
In the Participants List you also can view polling responses and the activity indicators for
each session attendee. Below the Participants List are buttons you can use to raise and
lower your hand, react through emoticons, enter polling responses and step away from the
session.

The Chat panel is where you can send and receive text messages. You can direct your
messages to one Participant, selected Participants, Moderators, everyone in this room or
everyone in all rooms. Messages can be filtered, time-stamped, printed and saved to track
session communication.

The Audio panel lets you participate in conversations during the session. Your computer
must have a sound card, microphone and speakers (or a headset) to use microphone/
speaker (VoIP) mode or a telephone to use telephone (telephony) mode.

The Whiteboard panel is the main presentation window. Moderators use this region to
load presentations. Everyone can use the tools on the Whiteboard to draw or write. All the
objects and images on the Whiteboard are dynamic and can be modified. Everyone can
print the Whiteboard screens or save them to a file to review later.

The Status bar contains session status indicators, buttons for recording sessions and using
Telephony, and text indicating how long the session has been open, what application you
are sharing, etc. Depending on what window layout you are in, the text message may be a
scrolling message to the right of the buttons. The indicators are dynamic in nature and may
change to buttons depending on how the session is currently configured.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 15
This chapter describes the different parts of the Elluminate Live! main window (the menus,
toolbar, minicontroller and status bar), using mnemonics and accelerator keys to choose
commands, managing your windows and exiting the session. The Participants, Chat and Audio
panels and the Whiteboard are described in detail in their respective chapters.
Page 16
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
The Toolbar
The Elluminate Live! toolbar contains buttons for some of the more common commands that you
can use during your session.
Using the Toolbar Buttons
You can use the toolbar buttons or select the options from the pull-down menus found on the menu
bar. The following tables describe what each button does.
Button
Description
Saves the Chat conversation, Participants List, Quiz, Session Plan or selected
Whiteboard screens to a file.
Menu equivalent: File > Save
Prints the Session Plan, selected Whiteboard screens or Participants List.
Menu equivalent: File > Print
Displays the current window layout. Use the pull-down menu to choose a new
layout.
Menu equivalent: View > Layouts
Shows or hides the polling responses from the session attendees. By default,
polling responses are hidden. When this button is selected (dark gray) the
polling responses will be visible to everyone.
Menu equivalent: Tools > Polling > Make Responses visible
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 17
The Toolbar
Button
Description
Locks the polling responses, preventing session attendees from changing their
response.
Menu equivalent: Tools > Polling > Lock Responses
Publishes polling results to the Whiteboard.
Menu equivalent: Tools > Polling > Publish Statistics to Whiteboard
Opens the Presentation Mode dialog that lets you display the Whiteboard or an
Application Sharing session in Presentation Mode.
Menu equivalent: View > Present Content…
Opens the Application Sharing dialog, which allows users to share
application(s).
Menu equivalent: Tools > Application Sharing > Host Applications...
Opens the Multimedia Library dialog, where you can load, play, stop playing,
and delete a multimedia URL or multimedia file. When you are playing a
multimedia file, this file will be displayed in the Multimedia window on all the
Moderators’ and Participants’ machines.
Menu equivalent: Window > Multimedia Library
Opens the Quiz Manager, which allows you to open existing quizzes, create
new quizzes and administer quizzes.
Menu equivalent: Window > Quiz Manager
Opens the File Transfer window. The File Transfer window appears, which
allows you to Open a File or URL, view the list of shared files, save, and delete
the shared files.
Menu equivalent: Window > File Transfer
Enables video camera support. The show Video window button is added to
each Participant’s and Moderator’s toolbar. The Video permission column is
added to the Participants table with hosting Video permission assigned to the
Moderator.
Menu equivalent: Tools > Video > Enable Video Camera Support
Page 18
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Button
Description
Opens the Video window. This button appears only when the Video has been
enabled.
Menu equivalent: Window > Video
Hides the Video window, closes the Video window and stops transmitting and/
or receiving video. This button appears only when the Video window is open.
Menu equivalent: Window > Video
Opens the Web Tour or Web Push window. The Enter URL dialog box appears
where you can enter a URL and push the session attendees to this web site.
If you are running Windows or Mac OS, the Internet URL you entered will
open in our Web Tour window.
Menu equivalent: Tools > Web Tour > Start a Web Tour…
If you are running Linux or Solaris, the Internet URL will
open in your default web browser window. This is called a Web Push.
Menu equivalent: Tools > Web Tour > Go to URL…
Opens the Timer dialog so you can set timer options and start the Timer.
Menu equivalent: Tools > Timer > Start Timer
Toggles between hiding and showing the Timer. Does not affect the time and
hides/shows it only from/to the current user.
Stops the Timer. Stops it for all users.
Menu equivalent: Tools > Timer > Stop Timer
Opens the Notes window so you can take personal notes.
Menu equivalent: Window > Notes
Opens the Invite New Participants dialog in which you can invite people into
the session by sending them an email.
Menu equivalent: Session > Invite New Participants…
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 19
Status Bar
Button
Description
Opens your web browser and takes you to the Elluminate website.
Status Bar
The status bar is found at the bottom of the window. Located here are session status indicators,
buttons, and text indicating how long the session has been open, what application you are sharing,
etc. Depending on what window layout you are in, the text message may be a scrolling message to
the right of the buttons. The indicators are dynamic in nature and may change to buttons depending
on how the room is currently configured.
Indicator or
Button
Description
Indicates that you are connected to a session. Click on the button, to leave the
session. This command changes to a Connect button when you are disconnected
from a session.
Menu equivalent: Session > Leave Session
Indicates that you are disconnected from a session. Click on the button, to join
the Elluminate Live! session. The button changes to a Disconnect button when
you are already connected to the session.
Menu equivalent: Session > Join Session
When this indicator is green it indicates that you are connected to the
Elluminate Live! session. If the color is yellow, this indicates that you have an
unstable connection and if the indicator turns red, then you have been
disconnected from the Elluminate Live! session.
This indicates whether or not the communication with the Elluminate Live!
server is encrypted. When an open lock appears, the communication is not
encrypted.
When this indicator appears in red, it indicates that your session is being
recorded. If the session is not being recorded or the recording has been paused,
the indicator will appear dim (grey in color).
Page 20
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Indicator or
Button
Description
If the session is not being recorded, this indicator is a red button, which you can
click on to start (or resume) recording the session. If the session is currently
being recorded, this button is deactivated (grey in color).
Menu equivalent: Tools > Recorder and then select the Record option
If the session is being recorded, this indicator turns into a blue button. You can
click on this button to pause recording the session. When the recording is
paused, this button becomes deactivated (grey in color).
Menu equivalent: Tools > Recorder and then de-select the Record option
Note: the following status icons and buttons will be present only if you are a Telephony
customer and the session creator has enabled Telephony for your particular session.
This status icon indicates that the teleconference is not connected.
Click on this button to configure teleconference connection information.
Menu equivalent: Tools > Telephony > Configure Telephone Conference.
When teleconference connection information has been configured, click on this
button to connect to the teleconference.
Menu equivalent: Tools> Telephony > Connect Session to Telephone
Conference
This status icon indicates that the session is in the process of connecting to the
teleconference.
This status icon indicates that the teleconference is connected.
When teleconference is connected, click on this button to disconnect from the
teleconference.
Menu equivalent: Tools> Telephony > Disconnect Session from Telephone
Conference
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 21
The Menus
The Menus
Virtually every computer program includes a set of options, which you can find, and access via
menus. Like other programs, the Elluminate Live! main window offers a series of pull-down
menus that are found on the menu bar.
To choose an option,
1. Click on the menu name on the menu bar. The menu will open.
2. Drag the mouse down the menu to the option you desire. The option will be highlighted.
3. Click on the option to select it. The command will be executed.
This guide uses a shortcut to describe selections from menus and submenus. For example, rather
than saying, “From the File menu, select Save. Then from the Save menu select Chat
Conversation”, the following convention (separating submenu elements with >) is used:
Select File > Save > Chat Conversation…
File Menu
The File menu contains file-related commands for the Whiteboard, Multimedia files, files to be
transferred, Quizzes, Chat conversations and Session Plans, as well as the Exit command for
closing Elluminate Live!
Option
Description
New
Creates a new Quiz, Whiteboard screen group or Whiteboard screen.
Open
Loads multimedia or a file for file transfer from either a file or URL. Also loads
a Quiz, Session Plan or Whiteboard file.
Save
Saves a Chat conversation, Participants List, Quiz, Session Plan or Whiteboard
to a file.
Page Setup…
Opens the Page Setup dialog box for configuring the page and printer for
printing Whiteboard screens or Session Plans.
Print
Opens the Select Screens dialog box that enables you to select the Whiteboard
screens you wish to print or the Print dialog to print the Participants List or
currently open Session Plan.
Page 22
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Option
Description
Exit
Closes the Elluminate Live! application on Windows, Linux and Solaris only.
On a Mac, the exit function is performed by selecting
Elluminate Live! > Quit Elluminate Live!
Session Menu
The Session menu contains options for connecting, leaving, joining, and stepping away from a
session; raising or lowering your hand; showing emotion; and inviting new Participants to the
session.
Option
Description
Join Session…
Enables you to join the session and updates the Participants List
indicating that you have joined the session.
Leave Session
Enables you to exit the session and updates the Participants List
indicating that you have left the session.
Raise Hand
Enables you to raise your hand to ask get the speaker’s attention and ask
a question.
To raise your hand, select the Raise Hand option. In the Participants
List, a number appears next to your name indicating your place in line
to ask a question.
To lower your hand, de-select the Raise Hand option. In the Participants
List, the number next to your name will be removed.
Show Emotion
Provides you with a list of emotion options that you send to everyone in
the session, indicating Laughter, Applause, Confusion and Disapproval.
Selecting one of these options will result in the appropriate icon
flashing for approximately 3 seconds in the Participants List next to
your name.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 23
The Menus
Option
Description
Away
When you select this option, the Participants panel shows you as
“Away”. You are still connected to the session, but the Away message
indicates that you are temporarily unavailable.
De-select this option to inform the others that you are back and
available to participate in the session. The Participants panel will
remove the “Away” text from your name.
Invite New
Participants
Opens the Invite New Participants dialog, which enables you (the
Moderator) to invite people, via email, to attend the current session.
View Menu
The View menu contains options for switching to the Mini-Controller, changing the window
layout, locking the windows so they cannot be moved and displaying content in Presentation
Mode.
Option
Description
Switch to Mini-Controller
The Mini-Controller toolbar gives you the ability to manage the
Elluminate Live! main window with a minimum on-screen
presence.
Layouts
Displays a list of the different layouts that you can choose from to
display the various windows in the Elluminate Live! room.
The Docked Layout views are only available on the Windows
platform.
Layout Locked
When the Layout Locked option is selected, the windows are
locked in their current layout and cannot be moved, resized, or
minimized.
When the Layout Locked option is not selected, you will be able to
change the window layout and each individual window can be
moved, resized, or minimized.
Show Presentation
Page 24
While Presentation Mode is active, this toggles between viewing
content in Presentation Mode and in the normal window layout
(i.e., it lets you opt in and out of Presentation Mode view).
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Option
Description
Present Content
Opens the Presentation Mode dialog that lets you display content
(such as the Whiteboard or an Application Sharing session) to all
Participants in Presentation Mode (i.e., using the full window).
Stop Presentation
Stops showing content in Presentation Mode.
Tools Menu
The Tools menu provides access to the various features available in Elluminate Live!
Option
Description
Preferences
Provides a central location for setting Elluminate Live! preferences
for Application Sharing, Audio, General (Hot Keys and Proxy
Settings), In-Session Invite, Profile, Recorder, Session Connection,
Session Plan, Video and Whiteboard.
There is no Preferences menu item under the
Tools menu on the Mac. The Preferences menu item
can be found under the Elluminate Live! menu.
Application Sharing
Displays a list of options that you can perform when hosting an
Application Sharing session. Not all the menu items are enabled
until you start Host Applications.
Options include those to share your application or desktop (Host
Applications…, Share Entire Desktop, Share Application, Pause
Application Sharing), to give and take away control of shared
applications (Give Control of Shared Applications, Take Away
Control of Shared Applications, Release Control of Shared
Applications), to request control of someone else’s desktop or
shared application (Request Desktop Control, Request Control of
Shared Applications), and various other options (Scale to Fit, Send
Key, Send Snapshot to Whiteboard, Send Snapshot to Whiteboard
with Delay and Show Preview Window).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 25
The Menus
Option
Description
Audio
Displays a list of options for managing Audio.
The Audio Setup Wizard option opens the Audio Setup Wizard
dialog so you can test, verify, and configure your speaker and
microphone volume settings
The Adjust Microphone Level option allows you to adjust the level
of your microphone either Up or Down.
The Adjust Speaker Level option allows you to adjust the level of
your speakers either Up or Down.
The Select Input Device option lets you select your audio input
device (all platforms) and the Select Output Device option lets you
select your audio output device (all platforms except Mac OS X).
The Use Telephone for Audio option switches you from using the
microphone and speakers for audio (VoIP) to using a teleconference
for audio. This option is available only to ASP customers for whom
telephony is enabled.
The Maximum Simultaneous Talkers option lets you allow up to six
simultaneous talkers in a session.
Breakout Rooms
Provides options for managing Breakout Rooms: Allow
Participants to Move Themselves to Breakout Rooms, Create
Breakout Room, Distribute Participants, Return Everyone to Main
Room, Send Self to Breakout Room and Send to Breakout Room.
Chat
Displays three options for entering Chat messages and managing
their appearance:
The Enter Message option immediately moves your cursor to the
Message Text Field in the Chat panel where you can start typing in
your message.
The Conversation Area and Message Text Field options allow you
to change the size of the text displayed in the Chat Panel and
Message Text Field of the Chat Panel, respectively. These options
are Make Text Bigger, Make Text Smaller, Default Size, and Text
Size. The default text size is 12 point.
Page 26
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Option
Description
Closed-Captioning
Displays the option Show Status in Participants List.
When this option is selected, the Closed-Captioning status/
permission column appears in the Participants List. From here, you
can view and/or grant Closed-Captioning permission to other
Participants and Moderators.
Graphing Calculator
Displays the option, Follow Moderator, which when selected
controls the Graphing Calculator in the session attendee’s session.
Interaction
The Interaction sub-menu contains one option for interacting within
the session: Raise Hand upon Entering.
When this option is selected, a hand will automatically be raised for
anyone who joins the session.
Moderator
The options Give Moderator Privilege, Take Away Moderator
Privilege, Remove Participant, and Allow New Participants to
Enter Session appear in the Moderator sub-menu.
These options allow you to control who comes into your session and
what permissions they will have. It also gives you the ability to
remove a session attendee from the session.
Polling
The Polling sub-menu contains the following options: options that
allow you to select what type of poll you wish to conduct (None,
Yes/No Options, A..C Multiple Choices, etc.), Make Responses
Visible, Lock Responses, Publish Statistics to Whiteboard, Show
Statistics and polling response options (e.g. Yes and No or A, B
and C).
The polling responses listed in the sub-menu will vary depending on
the type of poll being conducted.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 27
The Menus
Option
Description
Profile
The options listed in the Profile sub-menu vary depending on
whether a Moderator or Participant is highlighted or not in the
Participants List.
If another Moderator or Participant is highlighted in the Participants
List, then the options in the Profile sub-menu will be based on that
person’s configuration. If the person has a user profile, the View
Profile option is available so you can view their profile. If the
person has entered home and work email addresses in their profile,
then you will have the options Send E-Mail @ Work and Send EMail @ Home.
The option Show Profiles enables you to control who can see
profiles: No One, Moderators or All.
Recorder
Displays three options:
The Record option allows you to start recording the session.
Erase Recording option erases the content recorded in the room to
date.
Add Index Entry option allows you to manually create an index
entry in the recording.
Session Plan
Provides options for navigating within a session plan (Go to
Previous Item and Go to Next Item), starting timers (Start Timers
Automatically), changing the appearance of session plans (Show
Action Icons and Labels) and controlling who can view session
plans (Show to Moderators Only and Show to All Participants).
Telephony
Provides options for managing the Elluminate Live! integration with
telephone conferencing: Configure Telephone Conference, Connect
Session to Teleconference, Announce Session to Teleconference,
Increase Volume to Teleconference and Decrease Volume to
Teleconference.
The Telephony sub-menu is available only to ASP
customers for whom telephony is enabled.
Page 28
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Option
Description
Timer
Provides the options Start Timer (to open the Timer dialog so you
can set timer options and start or stop the Timer) and Stop Timer.
Video
Displays the options Enable Video Camera Support, which enables
the Video feature, and Maximum Simultaneous Cameras, which lets
you specify how many people can transmit video simultaneously.
Web Tour
Displays options for presenting web tours:
Start Web Tour displays the Enter URL dialog box where you can
enter a URL and send the session attendees to this URL. The URL
will be launched in the Elluminate Live! Web Tour window. Stop
Web Tour will close the Elluminate Live! Web Tour window.
To start a Web Push, select Go To URL… and enter the URL in the
dialog box.
Only the Web Push option is available on
Linux and Solaris.
Whiteboard
Displays a number of options that can be performed on the
Whiteboard.
Options include object-related options (Object Alignment…,
Restore Offscreen Objects, Object Properties, Explore Objects,
Select All Objects From Participant), screen-related options
(Current Screen Properties, Explore Screens, Copy Screens to
Breakout Rooms, Copy Breakout Rooms to Main Room) and other
options (Clip Art Collections, Protect Whiteboard, Show
Thumbnails, Scale to Window and Show Screen Count.).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 29
The Menus
Window Menu
The Window menu contains options to open the Closed-Captioning, File Transfer, Graphing
Calculator, Notes, Quiz Manager, Multimedia Library, Session Plan and Video windows.
To close a window, do one of the following:
 click on the window’s Close button,
 press Ctrl+W ( ໜ W on Mac) or
 press Alt+F4 (Windows, Linux and Solaris only).
Option
Description
ClosedCaptioning
Selecting the Closed-Captioning option opens the view-only ClosedCaptioning window. To close the Closed-Captioning window, you may also
press Ctrl+F8 ( ໜ F8 on Mac).
File Transfer
Selecting the File Transfer option opens the File Transfer window.
Graphing
Calculator
Selecting the Graphing Calculator option launches the Graphing Calculator
window.
Multimedia
Library
Selecting the Multimedia Library option launches the Multimedia Library
window.
Notes
Selecting the Notes option opens the Notes window, in which you can take
personal notes about the session.
To close the Notes window, you may also press Ctrl+E ( ໜ E on Mac).
Quiz Manager
Selecting the Quiz Manager option opens the Quiz Manager window.
Session Plan
Selecting the Session Plan option launches the Session Plan Library window.
Video
The Video option appears in the list when you have enabled video camera
support.
Selecting the Video option opens the Video window.
Page 30
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Help Menu
The final menu, the Help menu, offers access to the Elluminate Live! Technical Support web page
as well as to diagnostics tools that the Support personnel may ask you to use to help troubleshoot
an issue and general information about the Elluminate Live! software.
Option
Description
Moderator Help
Opens the http://www.elluminate.com/training
page in your primary browser. From here you can access this
guide, the Accessibility Guide, quick reference guides and training
recordings.
Participant Help
Opens the http://www.elluminate.com/training
page in your primary browser. From here you can access this
guide, the Accessibility Guide, quick reference guides and training
recordings.
Web Support and Tools…
Opens the http://www.elluminate.com/support page in your
primary browser. From here you can get help with your setup and
access the Support Portal,where you can read Knowledge Base
articles, find contact information or submit a help Ticket.
Keyboard Shortcuts
Opens a list of keyboard shortcuts (accelerator keys) that can be
used in Elluminate Live!
Diagnostics…
Opens the Diagnostic dialog box. This is used primarily for
troubleshooting purposes. You may be asked by Elluminate
Technical Support to add diagnostic flags and run your program to
try and troubleshoot a problem you may have.
About Elluminate Live!
On Windows, Linux and Solaris, opens a window displaying the
version number of Elluminate Live! (under the About tab) and
version information of the various components (under the
Information tab).
On a Mac, the About Elluminate Live! item is
located under the Elluminate Live! menu.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 31
Using Mnemonic and Accelerator Keys
Using Mnemonic and Accelerator Keys
Instead of using your mouse to select a menu option, you can use your keyboard. Using mnemonic
or accelerator keys saves time because you do not have to complete multiple steps (e.g., clicking
on a menu and then clicking on an option), nor do you have to take your hand off the keyboard to
issue the command.
Mnemonic and accelerator keys are enabled only when you have input
focus on the Elluminate Live! window.
Mnemonic and accelerator keys are not configurable.
Mnemonics
A mnemonic is an underlined letter or number that appears in a menu title or menu option that,
when pressed in conjunction with the Alt key, activates a command or navigates to an element in
the user interface.
Keyboard mnemonics are not supported on the Mac.
On Windows, depending upon your configuration, you may have to toggle
the Alt key before the options in the menus will display the underlined character
or number.
To choose an option without using the mouse, follow these steps:
1. Press the Alt key, note which letter or number (mnemonic) is underlined in the desired
menu name and enter it on your keyboard. The menu options for that main menu will
appear. For example, if you press Alt+F, the File menu will appear.
2. Again, note the mnemonic for the desired option in the menu and enter it, with or without
the Alt key.
If you choose an option that has aႧ after it, such as “File > Open Ⴇ ”, another menu is
displayed. Repeat step 2 to choose the desired option from this sub-menu.
Page 32
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Accelerator Keys
You can quickly accomplish tasks you perform frequently by using accelerator keys (also referred
to as shortcut keys), which are one or more keys you press in combination within Elluminate Live!
to perform a function. For example, instead of clicking the
Raise Hand button in the
Participants window or selecting Raise Hand from the Session menu, you can press Ctrl+R ( ໜ R
on Mac OS X to raise your hand.
The Accelerator Keys were defined with an extended (full) keyboard layout
in mind. If your keyboard does not have a key used in an Accelerator Key, you
will need to use the menu item or toolbar button to perform the desired function.
Accelerator keys are listed next to their respective commands in the menu structure, as depicted
below:
The following table lists the accelerator keys present in Elluminate Live! to quickly perform a
number of common functions. Keys are grouped into sections based on the Elluminate Live!
component being used.
To access the list of Accelerator Keys while in a session, select Keyboard
Shortcuts from the Help menu.
Function
Windows, etc. keys
Mac keys
Application, Window and File Functions
Quit Elluminate Live!
Alt+F4
ໜQ
Hide Elluminate Live!
N/A
ໜH
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 33
Using Mnemonic and Accelerator Keys
Function
Windows, etc. keys
Mac keys
Hide other applications
N/A
໩ໜ H
Close window (main Elluminate Live!
window, Video, Notes, File Transfer,
Activity, Closed-Captioning, Session Plan,
Quiz, Multimedia, Calculator)
Alt+F4 or Ctrl+W
ໜW
Cycle keyboard focus between the four main F6
Elluminate Live! modules in the main
window: Participants panel, Whiteboard,
Chat panel and Audio panel.
F6
Move keyboard focus between open
windows (Video, Notes, File Transfer,
Activity, Closed-Captioning, Session Plan,
Quiz, Multimedia, Calculator).
Alt+F6
ໜ`
Enable tabbing in toolbars of secondary
windows (Closed Captioning, Notes,
Activity Window, File Transfer, Session
Plan, Quiz, Multimedia)
Alt+F8
໩ F8
Open Preferences dialog box
Ctrl+Comma
ໜ,
Create new Quiz, Whiteboard screen or
Whiteboard screen group
Ctrl+N
ໜN
Open Multimedia file, Quiz, Session Plan,
file for transfer or Whiteboard presentation
Ctrl+O
ໜO
Save Participants List, Chat conversation,
Quiz, Session Plan or Whiteboard
Ctrl+S
ໜS
Print Participants List, Session Plan or
Whiteboard
Ctrl+P
ໜP
Page 34
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Function
Windows, etc. keys
Mac keys
Activity Window Functions
Open Activity Window
Ctrl+/
ໜ/
Close Activity Window
Alt+F4 or Ctrl+W
ໜW
Adjust microphone level down
Ctrl+Shift+Down
ාໜ ↓
Adjust microphone level up
Ctrl+Shift+Up
ාໜ ↑
Adjust speaker level down
Ctrl+Down
ໜ↓
Adjust speaker level up
Ctrl+Up
ໜ↑
Select all objects in Whiteboard
Ctrl+A
ໜA
Open Explore Screens window
Ctrl+Shift+S
ාໜ S
Open Explore Objects window
Ctrl+Shift+T
ාໜ T
Copy selected object(s) or text in
Whiteboard
Ctrl+C
ໜC
Cut selected object(s) or text in Whiteboard
Ctrl+X
ໜX
Paste copied or cut object(s) or text in
Whiteboard
Ctrl+V
ໜV
Group selected objects
Ctrl+G
ໜG
Group selected objects and send to
background
Ctrl+B
ໜB
Audio Functions
Whiteboard Functions
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 35
Using Mnemonic and Accelerator Keys
Function
Windows, etc. keys
Mac keys
Ungroup selected objects
Ctrl+U
ໜU
Delete selected object(s) or text in
Whiteboard
Delete or Backspace
Delete or Backspace
Go to next screen
Alt + Page Down
໩ Page Down
Go to previous screen
Alt + Page Up
໩ Page Up
Move to first screen at this topic level
Home
Home
Move to last screen at this topic level
End
End
Ctrl+M
ໜM
Raise or lower your hand
Ctrl+R
ໜR
Show laughter
Ctrl+Alt+1
໩ໜ 1
Show applause
Ctrl+Alt+2
໩ໜ 2
Show confusion
Ctrl+Alt+3
໩ໜ 3
Show disapproval
Ctrl+Alt+4
໩ໜ 4
Show that you have stepped away or come
back
Ctrl+Shift+A
ාໜ A
Ctrl+Alt+P
໩ໜ P
Chat Functions
Move cursor to the Message Text Field of
the Chat window
Participant List Functions
Presentation Mode Functions
Open Presentation Mode dialog
Page 36
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Function
Windows, etc. keys
Mac keys
Opt out of or back into Presentation Mode
Ctrl+Shift+P
ාໜ P
Stop Presentation Mode
Ctrl+Alt+Shift+P
໩ාໜ P
Open Video window
Ctrl+Shift+V
ාໜ V
Close Video window
Alt+F4 or Ctrl+W
ໜW
Open Notes window
Ctrl+E
ໜE
Close Notes window
Alt+F4 or Ctrl+W
ໜW
Go to the next item
Ctrl+]
ໜ]
Go to the previous item
Ctrl+[
ໜ[
Close Session Plan window
Alt+F4 or Ctrl+W
ໜW
Start or stop recording
Ctrl+Shift+R
ාໜ R
Add recording index entry
Ctrl+Shift+I
ාໜ I
Open Closed-Captioning window
Ctrl+F8
ໜ F8
Close Closed-Captioning window
Alt+F4 or Ctrl+W
ໜW
Video Functions
Notes Functions
Session Plans Functions
Recording Functions
Closed-Captioning Functions
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 37
Using Hot Keys
Function
Windows, etc. keys
Mac keys
Polling Functions
Yes - polling response
Ctrl+1
ໜ1
No - polling response
Ctrl+2
ໜ2
A - polling response
Ctrl+1
ໜ1
B - polling response
Ctrl+2
ໜ2
C - polling response
Ctrl+3
ໜ3
D - polling response
Ctrl+4
ໜ4
E - polling response
Ctrl+5
ໜ5
Slower pace
Ctrl+1
ໜ1
Faster pace
Ctrl+2
ໜ2
Using Hot Keys
Hot keys differ from accelerator keys in that you can modify the definition of these keys plus you
do not need to have input focus on the Elluminate Live! window to use them (they are available
system wide). By default, six hot keys have been defined for the commonly used features in
Elluminate Live!
You can use the default hot keys (listed below) or you can define your own under Tools >
Preferences > General > Hot Keys (for Windows, Linux and Solaris) or under Elluminate Live!
menu > Preferences > General > Hot Keys (for Mac).
Function
Windows, etc. Key
Mac Key
Press/release Talk button
Ctrl+F2
^ F2
Show/hide Mini-Controller
Ctrl+F9
^ F9
Page 38
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Function
Windows, etc. Key
Mac Key
Start/stop video transmission
Ctrl+F3
^ F3
Send Application Sharing snapshot to Whiteboard
Ctrl+Print Screen
^ F13
Take back control of Application Sharing
Ctrl+Space
^ Space
Terminate Application Sharing
Ctrl+End
^ End
Num Lock and Caps Lock must be turned off for Hot Keys to work
in an Elluminate Live! session running on Solaris or Linux.
If your function keys do not work on your Mac laptop or aluminum Apple
keyboard, hold down the ‘Fn’ key as part of the keystroke, or select the Use all
F1, F2, etc. keys as standard function keys option in the Keyboard pane of the
System Preferences.
The default Hot Key assignments were defined with an extended (full)
keyboard layout in mind. If your keyboard does not have a key used in a default
Hot Key definition, you will need to redefine the Hot Key.
Configuring Hot Keys
Exercise caution when changing the default definitions of hot keys. Ensure you do not change a
hot key definition to that of a hot key used by another application. You also should avoid key
combinations that conflict with standard keyboard shortcut operations.
On Windows, Linux and Solaris, the hot key is restricted to one character.
You may include one or more modifier keys (Shift, Control or the Alt on
Windows).
Mac OS X users must include at least one modifier key ( ා , ^, ໩ or ໜ ) in
the keystroke.
Configure your hot keys in the Preferences dialog.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 39
Using Hot Keys
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select General > Hot Keys. The Hot Keys
preferences panel appears.
If you see an under the Valid column, this indicates that the hot key is
not available. It is likely being used by another open application. Either redefine
the hot key to something valid or close the other application.
3. From the Hot key preferences dialog, select the hot key you wish to revise and click on
Modify… The Edit Hot Key dialog box appears.
Page 40
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
4. Assign the keystrokes. You may input the
keystrokes in one of two ways:
 Click on the down arrow to select a key
from the key option list, and then select the
desired modifier keys by clicking on their
check boxes. For example, the keystroke to
the right is Ctrl+F2.
 Select the text box and enter the keystrokes.
This will automatically select the modifier
keys you used in your keystrokes.
There are certain keys that cannot be entered as keystrokes (such as Tab,
which will cause your focus to move to the next field) and must be selected from
the menu.
5. Click on OK to save the hot key configuration and close the Edit Hot Key dialog, or
Cancel to close the Edit Hot Key dialog without saving your changes.
6. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you configure the Hot Keys, Elluminate Live! will remember these settings each time you
join another session.
You can restore your Hot Keys configuration to the default. For details on
restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on page 8.
Num Lock and Caps Lock must be turned off for Hot Keys to work
in an Elluminate Live! session running on Solaris or Linux.
Window Layouts
Within the View pull-down menu, you may define how the Elluminate Live! session will be
displayed on your screen. You may display the session in the Main window or Mini-Controller
layout.
In the Main window layout, you may further define how the Participants, Audio and Chat panels
and the Whiteboard will be displayed. Also, in this layout you have the option to lock or unlock
these windows. When the windows are locked, they cannot be moved or re-sized.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 41
Window Layouts
Main Window Layout
When you first join your session, your windows will be locked into the Default Layout. This
means that you will not be able to individually resize or reposition the four main windows. When
you resize the main window, all the individual windows will be resized proportionally to fit the
Main window frame.
Various window layouts are available for you to select from. Each provides a different
configuration of the four individual windows. The icon in front of the name shows how the
windows will be arranged in the main window.
The Tall layout is intended for use on tall monitors only and the Wide
layout is intended for use on wide monitors only.
To change the window layout, from the View menu, select Layouts, and then the appropriate
window layout option or alternatively click on the pull-down menu on the main toolbar (using the
button).
With both Minimal Window Layouts (Narrow and Flat) and Docked
Window Layouts (left and right) the Whiteboard is hidden. If you need the
Whiteboard, select the Default Window Layout again and the Whiteboard will
appear.
If you switch to a different layout while in Presentation Mode, you will
automatically be opted out of Presentation Mode. Use the
Return to
Presentation Mode button in the toolbar to opt back in to Presentation Mode –
provided you did not switch to a minimal or docked layout, which do not support
viewing in Presentation Mode.
Page 42
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
The Docked Minimal Window Layouts are available only on Windows.
Locking, Unlocking, and Re-sizing the Windows
The default setting when you initially join a session is for the windows to be locked. This means
the windows cannot be resized and will appear in their default configuration in the Main window.
To resize the windows or arrange the windows to your own preferred configuration, de-select the
Layout Locked option from the View menu.
When the windows layout is not locked:

To re-position or resize a window: Grab a window border and drag it. Hold your mouse
over any side or a corner and, when the cursor changes to a two-headed arrow, click and
drag the border of the window to contract or expand it. If the obscured window is partially
visible, you can also click on the window itself to bring it to the front of another window.

To minimize a window: Click the Minimize button on the title bar of a window to
collapse the window to a button on the interface.

To restore a minimized window: Click the Maximize button on the title bar of a window
to expand the window to the full region. Click the button again to restore it to its previous
size. Alternatively, if any of the windows during your session disappear from view, select
the name of the window from the Window menu. The window will be restored to its last
expanded position in front of any other windows.
Mac OS X users can minimize and maximize the main Elluminate Live!
window by selecting Minimize and Zoom (respectively) from the Window menu.
The Mini-Controller
The Mini-Controller view takes the form of a small toolbar, with the buttons displayed
horizontally. When you switch from the Main window to the Mini-Controller, the Main window is
minimized and the Mini-Controller appears in one of the four corners of your screen. (The default
is the bottom right corner.)
The buttons that are displayed in the Mini-Controller are based on the features that are enabled in
the Main window. The basic buttons will always appear in the Mini-Controller toolbar. Additional
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 43
The Mini-Controller
buttons will be grouped, based on the feature that is enabled and will be appended to the basic
buttons. (In the example below, Video and Application Sharing are enabled but the Timer is not.)
You can switch manually to the Mini-Controller view, in one of two ways:
 Use the hot key — the default hot key is Ctrl+F9 (^F9 on Mac). (Substitute your own hot
key here if you modified the default hot key definition.)
 Select View > Switch to Mini-Controller.
For details on using the Mini-Controller with Audio, Chat, Video and
Application Sharing, see the respective chapters on those features. For details on
using the Mini-Controller with Raised Hands, see Mini-Controller with Raised
Hands on page 45.
Collapsing and Expanding the Mini-Controller
Collapse: To collapse the Mini-Controller toolbar, click on the
Collapse button. Only the
Expand button will be displayed.
Expand: To expand (restore) the Mini-Controller toolbar, click on the
Expand button.
Hiding and Restoring the Mini-Controller
Hide: To hide the Mini-Controller, right- click (^Click on Mac)
on the Collapse or
the context menu.
Expand button and select Hide from
Restore: To restore the Mini-Controller, use the hot key – the
default hot key is Ctrl+F9 (^F9 on Mac). (Substitute your own hot key here if you modified the
default hot key definition.)
Page 44
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Moving the Mini-Controller
To move the Mini-Controller, right- click (^Click on Mac) on
the Collapse or Expand button and select the desired
option from the Place submenu.
Restoring the Main Window
To switch from the Mini-Controller view back to the Main window view, do one of the following:
 Click on the
Restore Main Window button in the
Mini-Controller.
 Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the
Collapse or
Expand button and select Restore from the context
menu.
Mini-Controller with Raised Hands
Whenever someone in the session raises their hand while you are in Mini-Controller view, the
Raised Hands indicator will alternately flash between the
icon and
icon and display the
total number of hands raised in the session.
No raised hands:
One raised hand:
and
To clear the Raised Hands indicator, click on the
button or
actual raised hands, just the flashing indicator and number.
button. This does not clear the
To actually clear all the raised hands, right-click (^Click on Mac) on the
or
button to open
the context menu and select Lower All. To clear the hand of an individual session attendee, select
Lower Hand from the submenu for that session attendee.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 45
Closing the Elluminate Live! Application
Closing the Elluminate Live! Application
To close the Elluminate Live! application, do one of the following:
 From the File menu choose Exit (Windows, Linux and Solaris) or from the Elluminate
Live! menu select Quit Elluminate Live! (Mac OS X).
 Enter ໜ Q on Mac.
 Enter ALT+F4 (Windows, Linux and Solaris only).
 Click the main window’s Close button.
When you leave a session, you may be directed to a web page defined by
the session creator. (Your default web browser will launch automatically.)
The Confirmation Dialog
By default, you will be prompted to confirm whether or not you want to leave the session. Click on
OK to leave the session or Cancel to stay in the session.
To turn this confirmation off for future sessions, select the option Don’t remind me again and click
on OK. You can turn the reminder back on for future session, using the Preferences dialog:
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
Page 46
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Session > Leaving. The Session Leaving
preferences panel appears.
3. Select the option Always ask before leaving a session.
4. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you change preferences, Elluminate Live! will remember the settings each time you launch
future sessions on the same computer.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 47
Closing the Elluminate Live! Application
Page 48
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 3: The Participants Panel
The Participants panel provides you with an overview of what is happening within the session.
It has the following components:
As a Moderator, you can use all the available Participant window features. Participants can use
only a subset of the features. In the table below, a checkmark indicates which functions can be
performed by Moderators and which can be performed by Participants.
Feature
Moderators
Participants
Remove a Participant from the session

Give or take away Moderator privileges

Grant or take away a Participant’s permission to use a
feature

Create and distribute Participants to various breakout
rooms or return them all to the Main room

Allow Participants to send themselves to Breakout Rooms

Send self to a Breakout Room


Sort the Participants List


Doc Revision 1.0
Page 49
Feature
Moderators
Participants
Reorder the columns in the Participants List


Save the Participants List


Print the Participants List


See who has joined the session and what permissions they
have


Select all the Whiteboard objects that were created by a
Participant


Request desktop control of a Participant’s desktop


See who is currently using a feature (activity lights)


See if any Participants are experiencing delays in
receiving the Whiteboard content, Audio, Application
Sharing or Video (status indicators)


Interact with others by entering and viewing polling
responses, using the emotion indicators and raising your
hand


View a user’s profile


When you join your Elluminate Live! session, you will see your name appear in the Participants
List in blue.1 All the Moderators in the session are displayed in alphabetical order at the top of the
list followed by all the Participants, who are also listed in alphabetical order.
This chapter describes how you can use the Participants panel to assign permissions; sort the
Participants List; view what is going on in the session; create, send, and distribute Participants and
Moderators to breakout rooms; interact with Moderators and Participants; and view a user’s
profile.
1. It will typically be in blue but may be in a different color, depending on your system’s look and
feel, particularly if you are using high contrast.
Page 50
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Setting Permissions
Depending on your session configuration, when Participants first join the session, they may only
be able to raise their hand and send the Moderator a private text message. You may have to grant
them permissions to use the other features.
For further, feature-specific, information on permissions, please refer to the
chapters dedicated to the specific features.
Assigning Permissions to a Participant
To give a Participant permissions, click the
permission column next to the Participant’s
name. That permission’s icon appears in the
column to indicate the Participant has been
given permission to use that feature. In the
example to the right, clicking in the Video
column next to Lucy’s name will give Lucy
Video permissions.
To simultaneously give all your Participants permissions to use a feature, click on the column
header for that permission.
In some cases, granting permission for a Participant to use a feature is a two-step process: first you
must get the permission column to appear in the Participants List and then grant the individual
Participants permission to use this feature.
The following table shows the permission icons and describes the permissions.
Permission
Icon
Description
A Participant has been granted permission to use the Audio feature – i.e., talk in
the session.
A Participant has been granted permission to send Chat messages to anyone in the
session.
If the permission is not granted, the Participant can still send Chat messages, but
only to Moderators.
A Participant has been granted permission to use the drawing tools on the
Whiteboard.
When this permission is granted, the Participant will see and be able to use the
drawing tools in the Whiteboard.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 51
Setting Permissions
Permission
Icon
Description
A Participant has been granted permission to host an Application Sharing session
or to control another user’s desktop.
A Participant has been granted permission to use the features in the Shared
Graphing Calculator (enter formulae, use the zoom feature, etc.).
This column is visible in the Participants List only when a Moderator has the
Graphing Calculator window open.
Menu command to open the Graphing Calculator:
Window > Graphing Calculator
A Participant has been granted permission to load files into the File Transfer
window.
This column is visible only when a Moderator has the File Transfer window open.
Menu command to open the File Transfer window:
Window > File Transfer
A Participant has been granted permission to transmit a video broadcast.
This column is visible only when a Moderator has enabled the video camera
support feature.
Menu command to enable video camera support:
Tools > Video > Enable Video Camera Support
A Participant has been granted permission to enter text into the ClosedCaptioning window. (Participants can always read text in the Closed-Captioning
window.)
This column is visible only when a Moderator has explicitly specified that it be
so.
Menu command to show the Closed-Captioning column:
Tools > Closed-Captioning > Show Status in Participants List
Page 52
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Removing Permissions from a Participant
You can withdraw Participant permissions at any time. To take away a permission, click on the
appropriate permission icon next to the Participant’s name. To remove everyone’s permission
simultaneously, click the column header for that permission.
Depending on your session configuration, when you disconnect from the session, all Participant
permissions may be removed to ensure that there is no unsupervised communication.
Preventing New Participants from Entering the Session
During your session, you are able to lock the session to prevent any new Participants from joining.
If any of the Participants that were in the session at the time you locked it are disconnected, they
will still be permitted to re-enter the session.
By default the session will remain open for Participants to join at any time. To lock the session:
1. From the Tools menu, select Moderator.
2. Then de-select Allow New Participants to Enter the Session. You may change your
selection at any time.
If you locked the session and then removed a Participant from the session,
the banished Participant will not be able to join the session with the same
username and password until the session is unlocked.
Granting Participants the Moderator Privilege
You may give Moderator privileges to one or more of the Participants at anytime during your
session while still maintaining your own Moderator status.
1. Click on a single Participant’s name or highlight multiple Participants in the Participants
List.
2. Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the selected Participants to open the context menu and
select Give Moderator Privilege. Alternatively, from the Tools menu select Moderator >
Give Moderator Privilege. The Give Moderator privilege dialog box appears.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 53
Setting Permissions
3. Click Yes to give the selected Participants the Moderator privilege.
The Participants receive a confirmation message indicating that they are now a Moderator.
The Participants List is updated for everyone in the class to show the change. All other windows,
including the Whiteboard screens, remain unchanged. Once you give a Participant Moderator
privileges, they will have the same access during the session that you have as the original
Moderator.
If any Moderator exits or is disconnected from the session, then the remaining Moderators can
continue. The Moderator who was disconnected can rejoin the session at any time. If all the
Moderators exit or are disconnected, then the session is left without a Moderator and depending on
your session configuration, all Participant permissions may be removed. To re-establish a
Moderator, the original Moderator must re-connect to the session.
Taking Away Moderator Privilege
At any time, you can take away Moderator privileges from a Participant you (or another
Moderator) promoted earlier.
1. Click on a single Participant’s name or highlight multiple Participants in the Participants
List.
2. Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the selected Participants to open the context menu and
select Whiteboard > Take Away Moderator Privilege. Alternatively, from the Tools menu
select Moderator > Take Away Moderator Privilege.
The Moderator now becomes a Participant and the Participants List is updated to reflect this
change.
When you remove the Moderator privilege from Participants, they will
retain all the permissions you had granted them before they became Moderators.
Removing Participants
To remove one or more Participants from the session, in the Participants List:
1. Click on a single Participant’s name or highlight multiple Participants in the Participants
List.
2. Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the selected Participants to open the context menu and
select Whiteboard > Remove Participant. Alternatively, from the Tools menus select
Moderator > Remove Participant.
Page 54
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
The Remove Participant dialog box appears.
3. Click Yes to remove the Participants from the Elluminate Live! session.
The Participant is disconnected from the session immediately.
Participants can save or print the Whiteboard after being disconnected (provided you have not
protected the Whiteboard content). If you have locked the room, then the Participant will not be
able to reconnect. If the room has been left open, then the Participant may reconnect.
Knowing When Someone has Joined or Left a Session
There are four possible ways to tell if someone new has joined or left a session:

The person’s name will appear in the Participants List when they join the session and will
be removed when they leave the session.

An Audible Notification may be played when someone joins or leaves a session.

A Visual Notification may be displayed when someone joins a session.

A message may be displayed in the Activity Window.
You can turn Audible and Visual Notifications off. For details, see Setting
Notification Preferences on page 11.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 55
Hand Raising
Hand Raising
Moderators and Participants can raise their hands at any time during the session. The Participants
List will indicate to the Moderator who has raised their hand and in what order.
Raise and Lower Your Hand
There are three ways to raise your hand:
 Participants panel
Click the
button.
 Session menu
Select Session > Raise Hand
 Accelerator Keys
Enter Ctrl+R ( ໜ R on Mac).
Likewise, there are three ways to lower your hand:
 Participants panel
Click the
button.
 Session menu
Select Session > Raise Hand. The Raise Hand option will be unselected.
 Accelerator Keys
Enter Ctrl+R ໜ R on Mac).
Hand Raising Indicators and Notification
Each time someone else raises their hand, you may be notified in the following ways:

A number will appear in the Hands Raised column indicating who raised his or her hand
and where they are in the queue.

The bottom part of the Participants panel will begin to flash. Click anywhere in the blue
region and the flashing signal will stop.

An Audible Notification may be played.
If you are in Mini-Controller view, you will know there are raised hands
when the icon alternately flashes between the
icon and
icon. The icon
will display the total number of hands raised in the session. For details, see MiniController with Raised Hands on page 45.
You may configure an Audible Notification to be played to you alone when you raise or lower
your own hand.
Page 56
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
You can turn Audible Notifications off. For details, see Setting Notification
Preferences on page 11.
The Participants panel shows the total number of hands raised. A number in the column next to
each Participant’s name indicates the order in which the Participant’s hand was raised. This lets
you know in which order to answer questions.
To lower your hand, click the
button in the Participants panel. To lower a Participant’s hand,
click the number in the column next to that Participant’s name. To lower all hands, click on the
column header . When a hand is lowered, the number is removed from the hand column and the
queue is reordered.
Automatically Raise Hand upon Entering a Session
As the Moderator you may wish to be notified when anyone enters the session. The Auto Raise
Hand feature is used for this purpose and works along the same principle as someone manually
raising their hand within the session. When anyone joins the session his or her hand will
automatically be raised.
You may turn this feature on by going to Tools > Interaction and then click on the option Raise
Hand upon Entering (check mark should appear indicating the feature is enabled). To turn the
feature off, de-select the option Raise Hand upon Entering.
Stepping Away
The Step Away feature allows you to indicate to the others in the session that you are temporarily
unavailable. You are still connected to the session and can see and hear everything that is going on.
There are three ways to show that you have stepped away:
 Click on the
button in the Participants panel.
 From the Session menu, select Away.
 Press Ctrl+Shift+A ( ාໜ A on Mac).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 57
Using the Emotion Indicators
In the Participants List, your name will be displayed in blue1 italics and the text “Away” will
appear in parentheses to indicate to everyone that you are away from your computer. (See Step
Away Indicator on page 11.)
Rejoining the Session
There are three ways to show that you have stepped back into the session:
 Click on the
button in the Participants panel.
 From the Session menu, de-select Away.
 Press Ctrl+Shift+A ( ාໜ A on Mac).
Using the Emotion Indicators
Session attendees can select emotion indicators to provide feedback. When an indicator is selected,
everyone in the room will see the icon flash next to the person’s name for a short duration. The
following emotion icons are available:
Icon
Emotion
Windows, Linux & Solaris Mac Accelerator Keys
Accelerator Keys
Laughter
Ctrl+Alt+1
໩ໜ 1
Applause
Ctrl+Alt+2
໩ໜ 2
Confusion
Ctrl+Alt+3
໩ໜ 3
Disapproval
Ctrl+Alt+4
໩ໜ 4
There are three ways to indicate one of the emotions:
 Participants panel
Click the appropriate button.
 Session menu
Select Session > Show Emotion and then select the appropriate emotion option.
 Accelerator Keys
Enter the appropriate accelerator key (listed in the table above) to display the appropriate
emotion icon.
1. It will typically be in blue but may be in a different color, depending on your system’s look and
feel, particularly if you are using high contrast.
Page 58
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Activity Lights and Indicators
Activity Halo
When a Participant or Moderator is using a feature, a yellow halo appears behind the permission
icon next to their name.
In the example at the right

Ethel is entering text in the Chat
panel;

Vivian is using the microphone
(Audio) and entering text in the
Closed-Captioning window;

Ricky has various permissions, but
is currently not using any features;

Lucy is hosting and controlling an
Application Sharing session; and

Charlie has the read-only Closed-Captioning window open.
Activity Indicators
In addition to the yellow halo, for Application Sharing, Closed Captioning and Audio there is
additional information about who is using the feature and in what capacity.
For details about the various activity indicators, refer to the chapters on
Application Sharing, Closed Captioning and Audio.
Status Indicators
Status indicators appear in the Audio, Whiteboard, Application Sharing and Video permission
columns in the Participants List when data is being sent and received. For Audio, Video and
Application Sharing, the indicators signify a delay in the sending and/or receipt of data. For the
Whiteboard, the indicators tell Moderators who is receiving content.
The status indicators are dynamic and are updated and visible to all Moderators throughout the
session. By keeping an eye on these indicators, you can adjust the pace of your session.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 59
Activity Lights and Indicators
In the Audio example to the right,

the Moderator Vivian is talking,

Lucy and Charlie are experiencing
delays in receiving the Audio signal,
with Charlie lagging further behind,
and

Ricky and Ethel are not having any
problems receiving Audio.
For details about the various status indicators, refer to the chapters on
Application Sharing, Audio, the Whiteboard and Video.
Step Away Indicator
When anyone in the session has stepped
away, their name will be displayed in blue1
italics and the text “Away” will appear in
parentheses after their name. In the example
to the right, Ethel has stepped away.
Audio Setup Wizard Indicator
When someone in the session is using the
Audio Setup Wizard, their name will be
displayed in blue2 italics and the text
“AudioSetup” will appear in parentheses
after their name. In the example to the right,
Charlie is using the Audio Setup Wizard.
1. It will typically be in blue but may be in a different color, depending on your system’s look and
feel, particularly if you are using high contrast.
2. It will typically be in blue but may be in a different color, depending on your system’s look and
feel, particularly if you are using high contrast.
Page 60
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Reordering the Participants List Columns
Columns in the Participants List can be reordered by dragging and dropping the column headers to
a new location. The following is the default column order:
To move a column, grab the icon in its column header and drag it to the desired location.
The new column order will remain persistent from one session to the next (until you specify
otherwise) .
To return the columns to the default order, select Restore Default Column Order from the Sort
option menu:
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 61
Sorting the Participants List
Sorting the Participants List
The Participant List can be sorted based on four options. These options are available in the Sort
option menu, which can be opened by clicking on the Sort button.
If your organization offers teleconferencing services with Elluminate Live!,
four additional sorting options are available. For details on sorting with the
Telephony options, refer to on page 157.
The sorting options you choose will sort the Participant List in all rooms
you enter (the main room and breakout rooms) for the duration of your current
login session. If you exit a session and re-enter it later, your sorting options will be
lost and the defaults restored.
The Sort option menu is divided into two sections: the top section contains the Column Sorting
options and the bottom section contains the Participant Sorting options.
Column Sorting Options are mutually exclusive – you must pick one only. You cannot choose to
pick neither or both:

Sort by Participant: sorts alphabetically by name in the Participant column (default)

Sort by Raised Hands: sorts numerically by number in the Raised Hands column1 – that is,
in the order in which Participants raised their hands
Participant Sorting Options are independent – you can pick both at once. You also can pick only
one or neither of these options:

Keep Me on Top: keeps you at the top of the list

Keep Moderators on Top: keeps all Moderators at the top of the list (default)
1. As Participants raise their hands, numbers are assigned to them in the Raised Hands column,
based on the order in which they raised their hands.
Page 62
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
The following table lists all the possible combinations of sorting options:
Participant Sorting Option
Column Sorting Option(s)
Sort by Participants
Keep Me on Top
Sort by Participants
Keep Moderators on Top
Sort by Participants
Keep Me on Top and Keep Moderators on Top
Sort by Participants
(none)
Sort by Raised Hand
Keep Me on Top
Sort by Raised Hand
Keep Moderators on Top
Sort by Raised Hand
Keep Me on Top and Keep Moderators on Top
Sort by Raised Hand
(none)
Sorting Rules
Rule 1:
The Participant Sorting options (Keep Me on Top and Keep Moderators on Top) always
take precedence over the Column Sorting options (Sort by Participant and Sort by
Raised Hands).
When Keep Moderators
on Top is selected,
Moderators will be
listed at the top and
sorted according to the
Participant sorting
option you selected (in
this example, Sort by
Raised Hands). The
Moderator Vivian
doesn’t have a raised
hand so is listed after Ricky and Ethel who do have raised hands.
The Moderators are followed by the Participants, who are also sorted according to the Participant
sorting option you selected (in this example, Sort by Raised Hands).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 63
Sorting the Participants List
Rule 2:
Keep Me on Top always takes precedence over Keep Moderators on Top.
However, when Keep
Moderators on Top and
Keep Me on Top are
selected, your name will
appear at the top
(whether you are a
Moderator or not),
followed by Moderators
sorted according to the
Participant sorting
option you selected (in this example, Sort by Raised Hands).
The Moderators are followed by the Participants, who are also sorted according to the Participant
sorting option you selected (in this example, Sort by Raised Hands).
Rule 3:
When Sort by Raised Hands is selected and all the raised hands are cleared, the list is
sorted alphabetically by Participant name, even though Sort by Participants is not
selected.
When Sort by Raised
Hand is selected and
neither of the Participant
sorting options is
selected (Keep me on
Top and Keep
Moderators on Top), the
Participants List will be
sorted based only on the
order in which hands
were raised in the
session.
When a Moderator
clears all the raised
hands, everyone in the
list will be sorted
alphabetically, even
though you have Sort by
Raised Hands selected.
Page 64
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Rule 4:
Sorting is dynamically updated following specific events: a hand is raised or lowered or
a Moderator or Participant joins or leaves the session.
When Keep Me on Top
is selected, you (in this
example, Vivian) are
listed at the top and
everyone else in the
session is listed below
you and sorted
according to the
Participant sorting
option you selected (in
this example, Sort by
Participants).
When Ethel leaves the
session and Linus joins the
session, the Participant
names are automatically
resorted alphabetically.
Although in this example
raised hands are
insignificant to the sort
order, note that Charlie’s
Raised Hand number
decreased by 1 since Ethel left.
Polling Feature
At any time during your class, you can poll the attendees using five different polls.
By default, the Yes/No poll is available with the corresponding response buttons displayed below
the Participants List. The types of polls available are Yes/No, Multiple-Choice (Responses A – C,
A – D, A – E) and Class Pace. You may change the type of poll at any time – the response buttons
will change.
Attendees respond to the polling questions by clicking on the available response buttons below the
Participants List or by using the shortcut keys.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 65
Polling Feature
The following table lists the types of poll and the respective buttons and shortcut keys.
Type of Poll
Yes/No
Multiple Choice with
three answer choices
Multiple Choice with
four answer choices
Multiple Choice with
five answer choices
Class Pace (Slow Down/
Speed Up)
Response
Buttons
Windows, Linux &
Solaris Shortcuts
Mac Shortcuts
Yes: Ctrl+1
Yes: ໜ 1
No: Ctrl+2
No: ໜ 2
A: Ctrl+1
A: ໜ 1
B: Ctrl+2
B: ໜ 2
C: Ctrl+3
C: ໜ 3
A: Ctrl+1
A: ໜ 1
B: Ctrl+2
B: ໜ 2
C: Ctrl+3
C: ໜ 3
D: Ctrl+4
D: ໜ 4
A: Ctrl+1
A: ໜ 1
B: Ctrl+2
B: ໜ 2
C: Ctrl+3
C: ໜ 3
D: Ctrl+4
D: ໜ 4
E: Ctrl+5
E: ໜ 5
Slow Down: Ctrl+1
Slow Down: ໜ 1
Speed Up: Ctrl+2
Speed Up: ໜ 2
By default, polling responses are visible to both Moderators and Participants in the polling column
of the Participants List; however, a Moderator can hide them. The header of the polling column
will change depending on the type of poll selected.
Page 66
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Hiding/Showing Polling Responses from/to Participants
 By default Participants can see the polling responses of others, you can turn them off in
one of two ways:
 Deselect Tools > Polling > Make Responses Visible. Select it again to turn the visibility of
polling responses back on.
 Click on the
button in the toolbar. Click again to turn the visibility of polling responses
back on. (The button toggles between hide and show states.)
Polling the Participants
To poll Participants, do the following:
1. Determine if you wish to show or hide the polling responses to/from the Participants and
set accordingly (see Hiding/Showing Polling Responses from/to Participants on page 67).
2. From the Tools menu, select Polling, and select the type of poll you wish to use. By
default, the Yes/No poll is available.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 67
Polling Feature
3. Ask your question and inform the Participants to choose one of the response buttons that
appear on their toolbar.
4. Optionally, if you hide the responses from the Participants, you may choose to show the
responses.
5. When you are done with the question, click the column header to clear all the answers.
At any time, you may ask the Participants another question using the same poll or a different type
of poll.
To de-activate the polling feature, from the Tools menu, select Polling, and then select None. The
polling column and response buttons will be removed.
Locking the Polling Results
At any time during the session, you can lock the polling responses so that no one can change their
answer.
To lock the polling responses, click the
button in the toolbar or alternatively select Tools >
Polling> and select Lock Responses. When the polling responses are locked, the polling response
buttons in the Participants’ session are deactivated.
To unlock the polling responses, click on the
now be activated in the Participants’ session.
button again. The polling response buttons should
Viewing a Summary of the Polling Statistics
At any time during a session, you can display a summary of the results. The Polling Statistics…
window is only available to a Moderator.
To open the Polling Statistics window and display the current polling summary statistics:
Select Tools > Polling and then select Show Statistics. The Polling Statistics window appears.
The summary results dynamically change as the Participants answer the poll.
Page 68
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
On Solaris, if you change the polling options while the Polling Statistics
window is open, the Polling Statistics window may close. To view the results, just
reopen the Polling Statistics window again.
To close the window, click Done.
Publishing the Polling Results to the Whiteboard
At any time that you are polling the Participants, you can publish a summary of the results to the
Whiteboard. The Polling summary statistics… window is only available to a Moderator.
There are three ways to publish the polling results:
 Toolbar button
Click on the
button in the toolbar.
 Tools menu
Select Tools > Polling and select Publish Statistics to Whiteboard.
 Polling Statistics window
Click the Publish to Whiteboard button
A snapshot of the polling statistics will be inserted in the current Whiteboard screen. The results
are added to the screen as a foreground image, which can be moved, resized or deleted.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 69
Printing the Participants List
Printing the Participants List
You can print the current Participants List to review at a later time. The
printed list will have the session name as its header. The names in the list
will be sorted as they are currently sorted in the session and will be appended
by the session attendees’ roles.
1. Open the Print dialog by doing one of the following:
 From the File menu, select Print > Participants List…
 Click on the
Print button in the Toolbar and select Participants List…
 Enter Ctrl+P (ໜP on Mac). The Print dialog appears. Select Participants List and click
on Print.
2. In the Print dialog, specify your preferences and click OK.
Saving the Participants List to a File
You can save the current Participants List to a text file to review at a later
time. The saved file will have the session name as its header. The names in
the list will be sorted as they are currently sorted in the session and will be
appended by the session attendees’ roles.
1. Open the Save Participants List dialog by doing one of the
following:
 From the File menu, select Save > Participants List…
 Click on the
Save button in the main Toolbar and select Participants List…
 Enter Ctrl+S (ໜS on Mac). The Save dialog appears. Select Participants List and click
on Save.
2. Enter a file name and select the location to which you want to save the file.
3. Click Save. The suffix .txt is added to the filename.
All Participants List files will be saved as text (.txt) files. There are no other
file types supported.
You can use Notepad, WordPad, Text Edit (OS X) or any word processing application to read the
text file.
Page 70
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Using the Context Menu
Right-click (^Click on Mac) on a person’s name in the Participants List to display a menu of
commands that may be performed for that person. The options are grouped according to the
feature being used.
The options displayed will depend on which person you select in the
Participants List: a Participant, a Moderator or yourself.
Audio Options
The Audio options Wait for All Listeners to Catch Up and Wait for Selected Listeners to Catch Up
are present in the context menu only if you have your Talk button pressed. Mute Speakers While
Talking and Switch to Telephone are always present in the menu. For details on these options, see
Chapter 7, “The Audio Panel” on page 117.
Whiteboard Options
The Whiteboard options Select All Objects From Participant and Show Participant Screen Names
are always present in the context menu and are described in Chapter 9, “The Whiteboard”. Copy
All Whiteboards to Main Room is present in the context menu only if a Breakout Room currently
exists. For details on this option, see Copying Screens to the Main Room on page 303.
Request Desktop Control Option
For details on this option, see Request Control of Someone Else's Desktop on page 246.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 71
User Profiles
Participant Management Options
The Participant management options Give Moderator Privilege, Take Away Moderator Privilege
and Remove Participant are described in Setting Permissions on page 51.
Breakout Room Options
The options Create Breakout Room, Distribute Participants, Send to Breakout Room, Close
Breakout Room and Rename Breakout Room are described in Chapter 14, “Breakout Rooms”.
User Profile Options
The User Profile options are described in User Profiles below.
User Profiles
The User Profile feature allows users to publish information about themselves and to view
information provided by others.
Showing Profiles
As the Moderator, you have control over whose user profiles will be displayed: no one’s,
Moderator’s only or everyone’s. From the Tools menu, select Profile > Show Profiles and then
select the appropriate option: No One, Moderators or All.
View a User’s Profile
A user’s profile appears as a pop-up in the Participants List.
To view a user’s profile, hover your mouse over a name in the Participants List. The content
displayed in the user’s profile will vary depending on how complete the user has filled in his or her
profile.
If a user does not have a profile, the pop-up will simply display the name that is already listed in
the Participants column of the Participants List.
Page 72
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
To hide the pop-up, move your cursor off the Participants List or click on the pop-up.
Editing Your User Profile
Create or edit your Profile in the Preferences dialog.
All fields in the My Profile preferences dialog are optional.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
 Select your name in the Participants List, right-click (^Click on Mac) and select Edit
Profile… from the context menu.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 73
User Profiles
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Profile > My Profile.1 The My Profile
preferences panel appears.
3. Enter your information in the desired fields under the Identity tab. To insert a photo, click
the Change button and browse to select your photo. To remove the photo, click on the
Clear button.
Only .gif and .jpg or .jpeg files can be used for your User Profile photo. If
your photo is larger than 96 x 96 pixels, it automatically will be scaled to fit the
available space.
1. Skip this step if you accessed the My Profile preferences dialog via the Participants List.
Page 74
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
4. Click on the Contact tab and enter information in the desired fields.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 75
User Profiles
5. Click on the Addresses tab and enter information in the desired fields.
6. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you edit your Profile information, Elluminate Live! will remember this information each
time you join another session from this computer.
You can restore your Profile settings to the default (all the fields will be
blank). For details on restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings
on page 8.
Importing a vCard file
1. Instead of creating a new user profile for an Elluminate Live! session from scratch, you
may import your existing vCard (*.vcf file).
2. Open the My Profile preferences dialog box. (See steps 1 and 2 under Editing Your User
Profile on page 73 for instructions.)
3. Click on the Import button. The Open dialog box will open.
Page 76
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
4. Navigate to the directory containing your vCard, select the *.vcf file you wish to import
and then click on Open.
5. Click on OK to save your new profile and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your new profile and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
Exporting a vCard file
You may export your Elluminate Live! profile as a *.vcf file and import it into other applications
(such as Outlook).
1. Open the My Profile preferences dialog box. (See steps 1 and 2 under Editing Your User
Profile on page 73 for instructions.)
2. Click on the Export button. The Save dialog box will open.
3. Navigate to the file location in which you want to save the *.vcf file and then click on
Save.
4. Click on OK to complete the export and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to complete
the export and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference dialog
without completing the export.
Sending eMail via a User’s Profile
Send EMail at Work
If the name highlighted in the Participants List (not your own) has a profile with a work address,
the option Send EMail at Work will appear in the Participants List context menu. Select this option
to open a mailto: link to send them mail at that address.
Send E-Mail at Home
If the name highlighted in the Participants List (not your own) has a profile with a home address,
the option Send EMail at Home will appear in the Participants List context menu. Select this
option to open a mailto: link to send them mail at that address.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 77
User Profiles
Page 78
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 4: In-Session Invitations
The In-Session Invitation feature of Elluminate Live! enables Moderators, from within a live
session, to invite people into the session by sending them email invitations. The invitations contain
a link to join the session and, optionally, a session password (both of which are generated by the
Session Scheduling Server1 when the session is created).
To use the In-Session Invitation feature, it must be enabled for your session
by the session creator.
Only Moderators can use the In-Session Invitation feature.
Sending an In-Session Invitation
To send an email invitation to guests, follow the steps below:
1. Open the Invite New Participants dialog by doing one of the following:
 From the Session menu, select Invite New Participants.
 In the Tool bar, click on the
In-Session Invite button.
1. Session Administration System or Elluminate Live! Manager.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 79
Sending an In-Session Invitation
2. (Optional) Edit the invitation text as desired.
You cannot edit the link or password.
3. Click on Compose Email button. A new message composition window for your default
email application will open. It will be populated with the information from the Invite New
Participants dialog.
4. Enter the email address of all those to whom you wish to sent the invitation and click on
Send. The invitation will be emailed to guests immediately.
Do not edit the link or password.
If the Compose Email button does not open your email application, you
may not have a mail application set as your default. If required, consult your
system administrator for help setting a default email application.
Page 80
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
If your default mail application opens but the text is copied into the new
message incorrectly, you have two courses of action:
1) Try changing your Email Encoding Invitation Option under Preferences. (For
details, see Setting the Email Text Encoding Format on page 81.)
2) Select Keep this dialog open in the Invite New Participants dialog, manually
open your email application and copy and paste the text from the Invite New
Participants dialog into a new message composition window in your email
application.
Copying the Session Link to Another Application
To copy the session link and password (if applicable) so you can paste them into another
application (such as an instant messaging application), follow the steps below:
1. Open the Invite New Participants dialog by doing one of the following:
 From the Session menu, select Invite New Participants.
 In the Tool bar, click on the
In-Session Invite button.
2. Copy the link by doing one of the following:
 Click on the Copy Link button.
 Select the link text and copy it using Ctrl+C ( ໜ C on Mac).
3. Open the other application and paste the link and password (if applicable) where desired.
Setting the Email Text Encoding Format
If you find some of the (non-ASCII) text from your In-Session Invitation message is garbled when
copied into your email application, try changing your Email Encoding Invitation Option under
Preferences.
Non-ASCII text includes characters such as non-English characters,
accents, umlauts and special characters such as dashes, ©, ™ or smart quotes.
The Email Encoding Invitation Option is not required for Linux and
Solaris so there is no Preferences dialog for In-Session Invite on these platforms.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 81
Sending an In-Session Invitation
To change the Email Encoding option in the Preferences dialog, do the following.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! (Apple) menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select In-Session Invite > Invitation Options.
The Invitation Options preferences panel appears.
3. Take note which option is currently selected and then select the other one. The two options
available to you are the following:
 Unicode (UTF-8): This is the Elluminate Live! default option for Mac, Linux and
Solaris.
 Platform Native: This is the default encoding used by your operating system: Cp1252
on Windows, MacRoman on Mac and UTF-8 on Linux and Solaris. It is the
Elluminate Live! default option for Windows.
The Email Encoding Invitation Option is not required for Linux and
Solaris because, for these operating systems, both options result in UTF-8.
Page 82
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 5: Video Broadcast
The Video feature of Elluminate Live! enables you to transmit and receive video broadcasts with
others in a session. This is video you send live via a video camera (e.g., web cam) – not to be
confused with a pre-recorded video (movie) that Moderators can play using the Multimedia
feature.
The Video feature displays up to six simultaneous camera transmissions.
For details, see Viewing Video with Multiple Simultaneous Cameras on page 91.
The Video window has the following components:
As a Moderator, you can use all the available Video features. Participants can use a subset of these
features – but only when they have been granted the Video permission. In the table below, a
checkmark indicates which functions can be performed by Moderators and which can be
performed by Participants.
Feature
Enable/disable video camera support
Doc Revision 1.0
Moderators
Participants

Page 83
Enabling, Previewing, and Transmitting Video
Feature
Moderators
Participants
Give or remove the Video permission to/from Participants

Enable and configure simultaneous cameras

Set the Follow Me option

Capture a Video image and send it to the Whiteboard


Set Video control options


Preview a video transmission


Transmit a video broadcast


Receive a video broadcast


Resize the Video pane


Solaris users cannot transmit video – only view others’ video
transmissions.
Sometimes, on a Linux or Solaris machine, the Video window may
get pushed behind the Elluminate Live! main window. If this happens, click on the
Hide Video Window button and then click the
button in the toolbar to re-open the Video window.
Show Video Window
Enabling, Previewing, and Transmitting Video
Enabling Video Camera Support
Before you can use Video in Elluminate Live!, video camera support must be enabled.1 If it is not
enabled when you start your session, or if during the session it was disabled (see Disabling Video
Camera Support on page 96), you will need to re-enable it.
1. It may be enabled by default, depending on the options set by the session creator in the Elluminate
Live! manager application
Page 84
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
To enable video camera support, do one of the following:
 Click on the
Enable Video button in the Toolbar.
 From the Tools menu, select Video > Enable Video Camera Support.
The Video column will appear in the Participants List.
Opening, Expanding and Resizing the Video Window
Opening
To open the Video window, do one of the following:
 Click on the
Show Video Window button in the Toolbar or the Mini-Controller.
 From the Window menu, select Video.
 Enter Ctrl+Shift+V ( ාໜ V on Mac).1
Resizing
The Video pane can be set to three different sizes: small
(160 x 120 pixels), medium (320 x 240 pixels) and large
(640 x 480 pixels). The default size is medium.
If the pane is at its small size, click the Enlarge Video
Pane Size button once to get the medium pane and
again to get the large pane. When the pane is at its medium size, there will be two buttons – one to
reduce it to the small size and one to enlarge it to the large size.
If the pane is set to small, the Reduce Video Pane Size button will be
inaccessible (grayed out) and, if the pane is set to large, the Enlarge Video Pane
Size button will be inaccessible.
1. This accelerator key will not work if you have the Multimedia library open and in focus.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 85
Enabling, Previewing, and Transmitting Video
Expanding the Video Control Panel
The Video Control panel can be expanded to reveal
further controls. To do so, click on the Show
Secondary Video Controls button.
When you are done with the extra controls, you can hide
them by clicking on the Hide Secondary Video
Controls button.
Previewing and Transmitting Video
Before you transmit a video to everyone in the session, you may
want to preview it first to check the quality of the image. If it is not
satisfactory, you may need to change the resolution of your image
(see Step 2 below) or change the settings of your video input
device (see Selecting and Configuring your Video Device on
page 98).
1. Click on the Preview button to start your camera and
display the images the camera is capturing in your Video
pane. No one but you will see these video images.
2. From the Maximum Quality option menu, select the
image quality you want to transmit. The options are
Coarse Grays, Coarse Color, Medium Grays, Medium
Color, Fine Grays and Fine Color. (For details, see A Note
on Image Quality Settings on page 88.)
Page 86
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
3. Do one of the following to start transmitting video to others in the session:
 Click on the Transmit button.
 Press the start/stop video transmission hot key Ctrl+F3 (^F3 on Mac). (Substitute your
own hot key here if you modified the default hot key definition.)
Viewing Video
To view the video being transmitted by others, your Video window must be open. (See Opening,
Expanding and Resizing the Video Window on page 85.) By default, your Video window will open
each time a video transmission begins. (If it doesn’t, select the option Open automatically when
video starts in the Preferences dialog. See Changing the Video Window Settings on page 102.)
The quality at which you receive video is determined by both the quality
setting of the transmitter of the video and your own quality setting. (For details,
see A Note on Image Quality Settings on page 88.)
If you are having difficulty with your camera (e.g., it freezes), try changing
the frame rate. For details, see Setting the Frame Rate Preferences on page 100.
When you are receiving video, the title bar in your Video window
displays the name of the person transmitting the video. If desired,
you can display a box showing the frame rate1 of the transmission in
the upper-left corner of the Video pane. To display the frame rate
box or change your frame rate, see Setting the Frame Rate
Preferences on page 100.
If the frame rate box changes from gray to amber or red, this means
your computer is too busy to display all the frames sent to it by the
server, with red indicating a more serious disruption than amber.
You can correct this situation by reducing the size of your video
window, reducing your frame rate (in the Preferences dialog) or
reducing your video quality (from the Maximum Quality option
menu in the Video Control panel) – or a combination of all three.
When a connection is established to a video source, that connection is
maintained until a different source is connected, the Video window is hidden, or
the session is terminated. While a connection exists to a video source, that source
is not available for use by other applications.
1. See subsection below for a discussion of frame rates.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 87
Viewing Video
Viewing Video in the Mini-Controller
If Video support is enabled in the Main window and you switch to the Mini-Controller layout, the
button will appear in the Mini-Controller toolbar.
To open the extended Video panel, click on the
button. From the extended Video panel, you
can do all the operations that you are able to do in the Video window – except for selecting a
different video device.
For more information on using the Mini-Controller, refer to The MiniController on page 43.
If you were transmitting video in the Main window and switched
to the Mini-Controller view, the extended Video panel will
appear above the Mini- Controller automatically.
If you switch to the Mini-Controller while
running Video with simultaneous cameras, you
will see both the main view pane and the
thumbnails. (For details on simultaneous
cameras, see Viewing Video with Multiple
Simultaneous Cameras on page 91.
To close the extended Video panel in the Mini-Controller, click on the
button. If video is being
transmitted when the extended panel is closed, transmission will be terminated.
A Note on Image Quality Settings
The image quality options are listed in order of lowest quality to highest quality. The lower the
quality, the less bandwidth is required to transmit the video. The default setting is Coarse Grays.
The quality viewers of a video transmission see will be the highest quality that does not exceed
either their own quality setting or the quality setting of the transmitter; the viewer can never
receive video at a higher quality than what is being transmitted. For example, if the viewer’s
quality setting is set to Fine Grays and the video is being transmitted in Coarse Color, the viewer
will see the video in Coarse Color – not in Fine Grays.
Understanding Frame Rates
The frame rate is the number of frames per second being transmitted or received. The default rate
is 10 frames per second. The higher the frame rate, the higher the bandwidth being used. To reduce
the load on your Internet connection, you can choose to receive video at a frame rate lower than
Page 88
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
what is being transmitted. However, you need to be careful not to put it too low or you may find
that the quality of the video is compromised (making it jerky or blurry).
Raising the frame rate will improve the quality of the video only up to a point. Ideally, the frame
rate should be set at the lowest possible value that will maintain good video transmission for the
type of video being transmitted. For video with little movement, such as when you are having a
conversation using your web cam (“talking heads”), a frame rate of 7 should be sufficient. Setting
the frame rate higher than 7 would not improve your video quality, but would only increase the
bandwidth load on your connection.
Generally speaking, the greater the movement in a video, the higher the frame rate required to
prevent jerkiness or blurriness of the image. (For example, a TV show would need a frame rate of
10 to 15 and a theatrical movie would need a frame rate of about 25 to 30.) The best frame rate is
the one that best matches the transmission.
If the video is being transmitted at a rate higher than your connection can receive it, the Elluminate
Live! server will start dropping frames in order to keep you up-to-date. For example, if your frame
rate is 7 frames per second and the transmitter is sending the video at 10 frames per second, the
server will send you only 7 out of every ten frames. This way you will not lag behind. The quality
of the image you receive may or may not be compromised.
To change your frame rate, see Setting the Frame Rate Preferences on page 100.
Activity Lights and Indicators
You can monitor the state of Video transmissions through various lights and indicators displayed
in the Video permission column of the Participants List.
Activity Indicator
A yellow halo around someone’s Video icon indicates that he or she is transmitting video:
Status Indicators
Status indicators appear on the Video icons of Video users in the Video permission column (in the
Participants List) if there are delays1 in the transmission or receipt of Video. The degree of delay is
indicted by color, where

amber represents the least delay,

amber-and-red represents a moderate delay, and

red represents the greatest delay.
A red indicator also will be present on the Video icon of viewers who are not receiving any video
at all because their Video windows are closed.
1. When there are delays, the server begins to drop frames. You will experienced delays as a drop in
video quality.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 89
Viewing Video
Video transmitters see status indicators for themselves and video viewers.
Video viewers see status indicators for video transmitters only – not for
themselves.1
In the example to the right,

the Moderator Vivian is transmitting
video,

Ricky has his Video window closed, and

Charlie and Lucy are experiencing delays
in receiving video, with Charlie lagging
the furthest behind.
Troubleshooting Video Delays
A pause in the video transmission may be due to network congestion, an overloaded server, or the
video quality being transmitted is set too high for the connection speed. To compensate, and keep
the viewer up-to-date, the server does not send the viewer all of the frames that the transmitter
sends to the server.
If users are frequently getting amber or amber-and-red indicators, as the transmitter of the video,
try reducing your image quality2 (from the Maximum Quality option menu in the Video Control
panel) or lowering your frame rate (in the Preferences dialog). You also can advise viewers to
improve their own frame rates by lowering their video image quality setting below that of yours
and reducing their Video pane size.
For a discussion of frame rates, see Understanding Frame Rates on
page 88. For details on setting your frame rate, see Setting the Frame Rate
Preferences on page 100.
1. There is one exception: if using multiple cameras, a person can be a viewer and transmitter at the
same time, so “viewers” may see status indicator for themselves – but only because they are also
“transmitters”.
2. provided you are not already using the lowest setting
Page 90
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Viewing Video with Multiple Simultaneous Cameras
By default, only one session attendee at a time can transmit video in an Elluminate Live! room.
Moderators, however, can override the default and configure Video to allow up to six cameras
simultaneously in each room.
When using multiple simultaneous cameras in conjunction with breakout
rooms, Elluminate will allow you to have 6 active cameras in each room.
However, since video is bandwidth intensive, using more than six total active
cameras in a session will affect the quality and speed of video in all breakout
rooms and the main room. It is recommended that you limit the number of active
cameras to 6 across all rooms in the session.
To configure the number of simultaneous cameras, do the following:
1. From the Tools menu, select Video > Maximum
Simultaneous Cameras. The Maximum Simultaneous
Cameras dialog will open.
2. Select the number of simultaneous cameras you would like to
permit in the room and click on OK. (The default is set in the
session scheduling server used to create the session.)
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 91
Viewing Video with Multiple Simultaneous Cameras
Probably the best way to explain how simultaneous cameras works is to illustrate with an example.
Below, the Moderator Vivian is transmitting video.Vivian’s transmission is displayed in the main
view pane of everyone in the room (including her own).
As additional people begin transmitting, a thumbnail will appear for each (up to five) at the bottom
of the video window.1
When someone is transmitting video while you are previewing your own
video, the received video will be displayed in a thumbnail and the video from your
camera will be displayed in your main view pane.
When a second person (Seymor) also starts transmitting, he will appear in the thumbnail of all
others, except that of Vivian. Vivian’s own video will move to her first thumbnail. This facilitates
two-person conversations, where each person automatically sees the other in their main view pane
and themselves in their first thumbnail.
1. It may happen differently if the Moderator is forcing transmitters into the main view with the Follow Me option. For details, see Follow me Option on page 94.
Page 92
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
If a third person (Sparky) starts transmitting while the first two are still transmitting, he will appear
in everyone’s second thumbnail, including his own.
All additional transmitters will appear in new thumbnails added after the last thumbnail – up to a
maximum of five thumbnails.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 93
Viewing Video with Multiple Simultaneous Cameras
Controlling the Main View
When multiple users are transmitting simultaneously, all session attendees can change their
display by moving the image displayed in a particular thumbnail to the main view pane. There are
two ways to do this:
 Click on the thumbnail.
 If the Video window has the keyboard focus, you can use the Page Up and Page Down
keys to rotate the transmitter in the first or last thumbnail into the main view pane. When
there are more than two transmitters, multiple key presses may be needed to get the image
of the desired transmitter into the main view pane.
The image that was originally in the main view pane will move to the thumbnail in which the
moved image previously resided – they essentially swap places.
When you move an image to the main view pane it may be a bit fuzzy for a
few seconds while the server changes the resolution of the image from low (which
is what is used for thumbnails) to a higher resolution (which is usually used in the
main view pane).
Follow me Option
When multiple simultaneous cameras are enabled, the Moderator can use the Follow Me option to
force everyone in the room to see the same thing in their main view panes as what the Moderator is
seeing in his or her main view pane.
Only one Moderator at a time may have the Follow me box checked.
However, any Moderator can check his Follow me box at any time. When a
second Moderator selects Follow me, the Follow me box of the original
controlling Moderator will be cleared and control will be transferred to the
second Moderator.
Follow me does not force a user to always see what the controlling Moderator sees, but rather to
change when the Moderator changes. If users don’t like a Moderator’s change, they are free to
move other video images into their main view panes (see Controlling the Main View on page 94).
However, the controlling Moderator can re-enforce the Follow-me option at any time by changing
his view (i.e., clicking on a thumbnail) or clicking in his own main view – everyone in the room
again will be forced to share that Moderator’s view.
Page 94
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Identifying Transmitters
When you are receiving video from one other user, the title bar
of the Video window will show the name of that user. When you
are receiving video from multiple other users, the title bar of the
Video window will say Multiple Cameras. To identify which
user is transmitting video to the main view pane or a thumbnail,
hover your mouse over the pane or thumbnail and a fly over will
display the transmitter’s name.
On some platforms, the Video window must
have keyboard focus in order for fly-overs to be
displayed. If you don’t see a fly-over, select your
Video window (so the title bar is highlighted) and try
again.
Recording and Playback
If a session with multiple simultaneous cameras is recorded, the video from all cameras is saved
and, when playing the recording, you can choose who to show in your main view pane. If
Moderators used Follow me during the recording, their transmitter (camera) changes will also
occur in the recording.
Stopping, Closing and Disabling Video
Stopping Video Transmission
To stop transmitting video, but keep the Video window open, do one of the following:
 Release the Transmit button by clicking on it. No images will be transmitted.
 Press the start/stop video transmission hot key Ctrl+F3 (^F3 on Mac). (Substitute your
own hot key here if you modified the default hot key definition.)
 Click on the Preview button. You will continue to see video images, but others in the
session will not.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 95
Stopping, Closing and Disabling Video
Closing the Video Window
To close the Video window (whether or not a video is currently playing1 or stopped) and keep
video camera support enabled, do one of the following:
 Click the
Hide Video Window button in the toolbar or the Mini-Controller.
 Click on the Close button in the Video window.
 Enter Ctrl+W ( ໜ W on Mac). 2
 Press Alt+F4 (Windows, Linux and Solaris only).2
 Press Escape.3
If another user caused your Video window to open because he/she started
transmitting video, when that user stops transmitting video, your video window
will remain open.4 You need to close it yourself, if desired.
Disabling Video Camera Support
If you want to eliminate distractions and focus everyone’s attention on the content being
presented, you may want to disable video camera support. Doing so will close the video windows
of all session attendees, preventing them from sending and receiving Video.
To disable video camera support (whether or not the Video window is open), do one of the
following:
 Click on the
Disable Video button in the toolbar.
 From the Tools menu, de-select Video > Enable Video Camera Support.
1. If it is currently playing, transmission will be terminated when the Video window is closed.
2. This keystroke will close the Video window only if it is in focus (in front of all other windows).
3. Pressing Escape will close the Video window only if it is in focus (in front of all other windows).
4. Unless you have selected the option Close automatically when video stops from Preferences >
Video > Window Settings.
Page 96
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Sending a Video Image to the Whiteboard
If you want to take a snapshot of an image
in your main Video pane, you can do so by
clicking on the Send Snapshot to
Whiteboard button.
The image you “snap” is placed in the
foreground of the current screen of the
Whiteboard. You can manipulate it like
you would any other Whiteboard image.
Note that the frame rate
box or preview watermark will
not be captured in the image.
For Participants to use this feature, they must have Whiteboard permissions.
If you want to take a snapshot of an image in a thumbnail (simultaneous
cameras), you must move the thumbnail image into the main view pane and then
take a snapshot. (For details on thumbnails, see Viewing Video with Multiple
Simultaneous Cameras on page 91.)
Setting Video Permission for Participants
When Video support is enabled, a Video column is added to the Participants List. This column
shows who is permitted to send video and who (if anyone) is currently sending video.
The session creator determines whether or not to grant all permissions to Participants, which
includes the permission to transmit video. However, if the permissions are granted, there may be
times when you want to turn the Video permission off – such as when you want to eliminate
distractions and focus Participants’ attention on the information you are presenting.
When you remove the Video permission, Participants will not be able to transmit video, but still
will be able to receive another user’s video transmission or preview their own.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 97
Selecting and Configuring your Video Device
The Video permission is controlled in the Participants List by clicking on the Camera icon.
Below, only the Moderator Vivian and the Participant Lucy are granted the Video permission.
For details on setting permissions, please refer to Setting Permissions on
page 51.
Selecting and Configuring your Video Device
If you only have one video input device
installed on your computer, that device
is automatically used by Elluminate
Live! to preview and transmit video.
However, if you have more than one
video input device on your computer,
you can select which device you want to
use with Elluminate Live! through the
Device dialog box.
1. If necessary, expand the Video
Control panel (see Expanding
the Video Control Panel on
page 86).
2. Click on the Device button in the Video Control panel to open the Device dialog box.
3. Select the desired device and click on OK.
4. To configure your device (override the device’s default settings such as brightness,
contrast or hue), click on the Advanced button in the Video Control panel. A dialog box
specific to your device will open.
The Advanced button is disabled for Mac OS X 10.5 users.
Page 98
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
5. Adjust your device settings and close the device-specific dialog.
Watch how the display in the main video pane changes as you adjust your
settings. Note: you are not transmitting video to others in the session.When you
are finished adjusting your settings, the video display will cease.
Setting Video Preferences
Setting Device Disconnection Preference
Getting video from a video device (e.g., web camera) is a two-step operation: first you need to
establish a connection to the device (which happens automatically when needed) and then you
need to open that connection to start the flow of video (by clicking on the Transmit or Preview
button). When you stop transmitting or previewing, the connection is closed and, when you click
on the Transmit or Preview button again, the connection is reopened. The actual disconnection of
the device doesn’t occur until you close the Video window.
Unfortunately, this process of connecting, opening, closing, reopening, etc. can cause an
occasional malfunction in some video devices – they have difficulty reopening the existing
connection. If you are having a problem with your video connection, select the Video preference
Disconnect device when it is not in use so the video device establishes a new connection for each
use, rather than reopen the old connection.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 99
Setting Video Preferences
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Video > Device Disconnection. The
Device Disconnection preferences panel appears.
3. Select the option Disconnect device when it is not in use.
4. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you configure Video Device Disconnection settings, Elluminate Live! will remember this
setting each time you join another session on the same computer.
You can restore your Video Device Disconnection settings to the default.
For details on restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on
page 8.
Setting the Frame Rate Preferences
You can limit the amount of bandwidth used by Video by adjusting the frame rate. (For a
discussion of frame rates, see Understanding Frame Rates on page 88.) The default frame rate is
set to 10 frames per second.
Increasing your frame rate increases the bandwidth used by Video and the
load placed on your Internet connection. Even if your camera supports a high
frame rate, your connection speed may prevent you from sending or receiving
video at a high frame rate.
Page 100
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Change your Video Frame Rate settings in the Preferences dialog.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Video > Frame Rate. The Frame Rate
preferences panel appears.
3. Adjust the Maximum Frame Rate slider to the desired value.
4. Select the option Display actual frame rate in Video window if you wish to show the frame
rate in the top left corner of the Video window.
5. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you configure Video Frame Rate settings, Elluminate Live! will remember these settings
each time you join another session on the same computer.
You can restore your Video Frame Rate settings to the default. For details
on restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on page 8.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 101
Setting Video Preferences
Changing the Video Window Settings
The Video window always can be manually opened and closed as needed. However, you can
specify that you want the Video window to automatically open when another user starts
transmitting video (Open automatically when video starts). You also can specify that you want an
automatically-opened Video window to close automatically when the user stops transmitting video
(Close automatically when video stops).
Setting the options to automatically open and close the Video window does
not prevent you from manually opening and closing the window at any time.
Close automatically when video stops will not close a Video window that
you opened manually.
While automatic closure takes effect when the Video window opened
automatically, for your convenience, this behavior gets overridden if you start
previewing or transmitting. Automatic closure is also ignored when you are
working in the Device or Advanced dialog.
Video cannot be sent to you if your Video window is closed. If you are concerned about bandwidth
usage (such as if you are running on a slow-speed connection), you may want to keep your Video
window closed. In that case, do not select the option Open automatically when video starts.
Change your Video Window settings in the Preferences dialog.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
Page 102
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Video > Window Settings. The Window
Settings preferences panel appears.
3. Select the desired options by clicking on the check boxes:

Open automatically when video starts – Will automatically open your Video window
when another user starts transmitting video. (This option is selected by default.)

Close automatically when video stops – Will automatically close your Video window
when another user stops transmitting video. (This applies only to a Video window that
was automatically opened.)
You cannot select Close automatically when video stops unless you first
select Open automatically when video starts.
4. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you configure Video Window settings, Elluminate Live! will remember these settings each
time you join another session on the same computer.
You can restore your Video Window settings to the default. For details on
restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on page 8.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 103
Setting Video Preferences
Page 104
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 6: The Chat Panel
The Chat panel enables Participants and Moderators to exchange text messages with each other in
a session. Participants can always send a Chat message to Moderators, even when you do not have
Chat permissions. (It will appear as a private message to all Moderators in the conversation area.)
The Chat panel has the following components:
As a Moderator, you can use all the available Chat features. Participants (who have been granted
the Chat permission) can use a subset of the features. In the table below, a checkmark indicates
which functions can be performed by Moderators and which can be performed by Participants.
Feature
Moderators
Participants
Send messages to all or selected Moderators and Participants in
the current room.


Filter displayed messages using the Show option menu.


Display a date/time stamp for all messages.


Send messages to users in all rooms (main room and breakout
rooms).

Send messages in the form of announcements.

Monitor private messages sent to other users. (This feature must
be enabled when the session is created.)

Grant or remove Participants’ Chat permission

Doc Revision 1.0
Page 105
Sending Chat Messages
Sending Chat Messages
Chat allows you to broadcast public messages to everyone
or send private messages to selected individuals. You can
send messages to specific people by selecting an option
from the Send To option menu.

All Rooms: send a public message to everyone in
all rooms – the main room and all breakout rooms.

This Room: send a public message to everyone in the current room. (This is the default.)

Moderators: send a private message to Moderators only.

Selected Participants: send a private message to a single individual or a group of
individuals selected in the Participant’s list (in the Participants panel).

<Attendee Name>: send a private message to an individual Participant or Moderator.
(The name of each session attendee is listed at the bottom of the Send To option menu.)
When Session is Supervised
The session creator can configure a session to be supervised, meaning that Moderators will be able
to see the activity of all Participants, including their private messages to each other and to
individual Moderators. As a Moderator you will see a Participant’s private text message displayed
in red in the conversation area.1 All session attendees will see that the session is supervised by the
presence of an
eyeball icon in the Chat panel.
Send to This Room
1. Place your cursor in the message text field by doing one of the following:
 Click anywhere in the message text field.
 Press Ctrl+M ( ໜ M on Mac).2
 From the Tools menu, select Chat > Enter Message.
2. Type your text in the message text field.
3. Click Send or press Enter to send your message. The message will appear (in black) in the
conversation area and, if session attendees have the Chat Message Received audible
notification turned on, they will hear a ding.
1. Unless the private message is intended for you, in which case the message will be in blue.
2. If you are Application Sharing a Microsoft Word document, this shortcut will not work for Chat
– it will perform a Word formatting function.
Page 106
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
You can turn audible notifications off. For details, see Setting Notification
Preferences on page 11.
Send to All Rooms, Moderators or a Single Participant
1. From the Send To option menu, select to whom you want to send the message. Individual
attendees are listed at the bottom of the menu in alphabetical order.
2. Place your cursor in the message text field by doing one of the following:
 Click anywhere in the message text field.
 Press Ctrl+M ( ໜ M on Mac).
 From the Tools menu, select Chat > Enter Message.
3. Type your text in the message text field.
4. Click Send or press Enter to send your message. The message will appear (in black) in the
conversation area and, if session attendees have the Chat Message Received audible
notification turned on, they will hear a ding.
You can turn audible notifications off. For details, see Setting Notification
Preferences on page 11.
Send to a Selected Group of Session Attendees
1. In the Participants List (in the
Participants panel), hold down Shift or
Control (ා or ໜ on Mac) and click on the
names of those to whom you wish to send
your message. The Participants’ names
are highlighted when selected.
2. From the Send To option menu, choose
Selected Participants.
3. Place your cursor in the message text field by doing one of the following:
 Click anywhere in the message text field.
 Press Ctrl+M ( ໜ M on Mac).
 From the Tools menu, select Chat > Enter Message.
4. Type your text in the message text field.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 107
Sending Chat Messages
5. Click Send or press Enter to send your message. The message will appear to only yourself
and those Participants whom you selected. Because this is a private message, it will appear
as blue in the conversation area.
Send Message as Announcement
Send a message as an Announcement when you want to ensure your message will be clearly
visible to all message recipients. As with other messages, you can send Announcements to
everyone (including in all breakout rooms) or a subset of session attendees.
1. Click on the
Announcement button.
2. From the Send to option menu, select to whom you want to send the message. Individual
attendees are listed at the bottom of the menu in alphabetical order. If you want to send to
Selected Participants, don’t forget to select them from the Participants List.
3. Place your cursor in the message text field by doing one of the following:
 Click anywhere in the message text field.
 Press Ctrl+M ( ໜ M on Mac).
 From the Tools menu, select Chat > Enter Message.
4. Type your text in the message text field.
5. Click Send or press Enter to send your message. The message will appear to the recipients
in both their conversation area (in black) and in a visual notification window.
You can turn visual notifications off. For details, see Setting Notification
Preferences on page 11.
After an Announcement is sent, the
Announcement button is
automatically deselected. So, unless you click on the button again, the next
message you send will be displayed in the conversation area only.
Page 108
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Adding External Links to your Message
You can include links in your Chat messages either by typing them in directly, copying and
pasting or dragging and dropping them from a browser or email message. Recipients of your
messages will be able to click on links to access an Internet site or send an email.
Link Type
Syntax
Example
HTTP web site
http://
http://www.elluminate.com
Secure HTTP web site
https://
https://addons.mozilla.org/
FTP site
ftp://
ftp://ftp.uar.net/pub/e-books/
Email message
mailto:
mailto:docs@elluminate.com
Adding Emoticons to your Message
You can add emoticons to your Chat message using text strings. The following table lists the
emoticons and their respective text strings.
Emotion
Enter the text strings
Laughter
:-) or
Confused
:S
Surprised
:-o or :-O or :-0 or :^)
Wink
;-) or ;)
Sad
:-( or :(
Angry
:@
Result
:) or :D
Emoticons are not displayed graphically in Announcement messages. They
will, however, appear in the announcement as displayed in the message text field.
Any more than 25 emoticons entered into a single chat message will be
ignored.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 109
Activity Halo
Activity Halo
You will know a session attendee is entering a
Chat message when a yellow halo appears behind
the Chat permission icon next to the session
attendee’s name. In the example to the right, Lucy
is entering Chat text.
Viewing Chat Messages
Messages in the conversation area are color coded to indicate the message type.
The messages in this example are shown from the
perspective of the Moderator Vivian.

Bold black header and black text indicates
the message is public – a message that was
sent to everyone in the room (or rooms).

Bold Blue header and blue text indicates the
message is a private message received by or
sent by you.

Blue header and red text indicates the message is a private message exchanged between
others.
For you to see the private messages of Participants, the option to supervise a
session must be selected by the session creator in the Elluminate Live! scheduling
server. Contact the session creator or administrator if you need this feature
enabled.

Bold black header and bold black text indicates the message is a public message sent by
you, or another Moderator, as an Announcement.

Bold blue header and bold black text indicates the message is a private message sent by
you, or another Moderator, as an Announcement
Scrolling Chat Messages
If the scroller thumb is at the bottom of the scrollbar (the last Chat message is visible), the
conversation area will scroll as new messages are received.
If you have scrolled back to review earlier messages, the conversation area will not scroll until you
manually scroll to see the last message.
Page 110
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Show Date/Time Stamp
To track when all the Chat messages were sent, click on the
Date/Time button in the Chat
panel. This will display a date and time stamp above each text message.
To hide the date and time stamps, click the
Date/Time button again.
Filtering Chat Messages
As the number of messages grows within a session, you may want to filter which messages you
see. You can do so by selecting an option from the Show option menu.

All: view all messages (public and
private) sent by everyone. (This is the
default.)

Public: view only public messages (sent
to All Rooms or This Room).

Private: view only private messages
(those you sent or received and those
exchanged between others).

All Selected: view only private Chat messages sent between the selected attendees.1 For
example, if you selected Lucy and Ethel’s names from the Participants List and selected
All Selected from the Show option menu, you would see only the private messages Lucy
and Ethel sent to each other.

Any Selected: view all messages (private and public) sent by the selected attendees. For
example, if you selected Lucy and Ethel’s names from the Participants List and selected
Any Selected from the Show option menu, you would see all messages Lucy and Ethel sent
– not just the ones they sent to each other.

<Attendee Name>: view all messages (private and public) sent by the selected individual
(to you or anyone else) and all the messages you sent to that individual. (The name of each
session attendee is listed at the bottom of the Show option menu.)
Attendee names will appear in the Show option menu only after they send
their first message.
After you make your selection, only the relevant messages will appear in the conversation area.
You may change your selection at any time.
Announcement messages are always displayed – no matter how you have
filtered your messages.
1. See the note on page 110 under Activity Halo.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 111
Viewing Chat Messages
New Message Indicator
When you are filtering messages (using the Show
option menu), you will not see new messages that
have been excluded by filtering. However, you
will be notified of new messages – the Show
option menu will be highlighted in red. To read
the new message, select All from the Show option menu and the message will be displayed.
Changing the Text Size in the Conversation Area
To change the font size of the text in the conversation area, do one of the
following to open the option menu.
 From the Tools menu, select Chat > Conversation Area.
 Right click (^Click on Mac) anywhere in the conversation area of the
Chat window.
Available text sizes are 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 28, 32
and 36 points. These are listed in the Text Size sub-menu.
Select one of the options from the menu:

Make Text Bigger – increase the text size to the next larger size. For example, if the text
was set to 12, selecting Make Text Bigger will increase the size to 13.

Make Text Smaller –decrease the text size to the next smaller size. For example, if the text
was set to 36, selecting Make Text Smaller will decrease the size to 32.

Default Size –set the text size back to the default setting of 12.1

Text Size – change the text size to that selected from the submenu.
1. This value may be different for non-English implementations of Elluminate Live!
Page 112
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Changing the Text Size in the Message Text Field
To change the font size of the text in the message text field, do one of the
following to open the option menu.
 From the Tools menu, select Chat > Message Text Field.
 Right click (^Click on Mac) anywhere in the message text field
of the Chat window.
Available text sizes are 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 28, 32 and 36 points. These are
listed in the Text Size sub-menu.
Select one of the options from the menu:

Make Text Bigger – increase the text size to the next larger size. For example, if the text
was set to 12, selecting Make Text Bigger will increase the size to 13.

Make Text Smaller –decrease the text size to the next smaller size. For example, if the text
was set to 36, selecting Make Text Smaller will decrease the size to 32.

Default Size –set the text size back to the default setting of 12. 1

Text Size – change the text size to that selected from the submenu.
Text size will not be retained if you copy and paste formatted text from a
Chat message to an external text editing application.
Viewing Chat Messages from the Mini-Controller
If you are using the Mini-Controller view (see The MiniController on page 43), Chat will notify you when there are
new messages: the background color of the button will change
to red
, the button will flash and the number next to the
button will increment by one for every unseen message.
1. This value may be different for non-English implementations of Elluminate Live!
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 113
Setting the Chat Permission for Participants
To view the messages, click on the
Chat icon in the
Mini-Controller. This will reset the color indicator and
number, stop the flashing, and display a scrolling,
filtered list of text messages (conversation area of Chat
panel) in an extended panel above the Mini-Controller.
You can leave it open or click on the Chat icon again to
close the panel.
You cannot enter Chat messages
while in Mini-Controller view. You need to
restore the main Elluminate Live! window to
access the Chat panel.
For more information on using the Mini-Controller, refer to The MiniController on page 43.
Setting the Chat Permission for Participants
By default, Participants are granted the permission to chat.1 However, there may be times when
you want to turn that permission off – such as when you want to eliminate distractions and focus
the Participants’ attention on the information you are presenting.
Participants can always send a message to you, even when they do not have
Chat permissions. It appears as a private message to all Moderators.
When you remove the Chat permission, the Participant’s Send To option menu is inaccessible and
set to Moderators – the Participant will not be able to send a Chat message to anyone other than
Moderators.
1. In the Elluminate Live! scheduling server, the session creator must have set the option to have
permissions “on”.
Page 114
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
The Chat permission is controlled in the Participants List by clicking on the
everyone except Charlie has been granted the Chat permission.
Chat icon. Below,
For further details on setting permissions, please refer to Setting
Permissions on page 51.
Saving Chat Messages to a File
You can save a Chat conversation to a text file to review at a later time. If you made the date/time
stamps visible, these will be saved to the text file as well.
1. Open the Save Chat Conversation dialog by doing one of the following:
 From the File menu, select Save > Chat Conversation…
 Click on the
Save button in the main Toolbar and select Chat Conversation…
 Enter Ctrl+S ( ໜ S on Mac). The Save dialog appears. Select Chat Conversation and
click on Save.
2. Enter a file name and select the location to which you want to save the file.
3. Click Save. All Chat files are saved as text (.txt) files. There are no other file types
supported.
You can use Notepad, WordPad or any word processing application to read the text file.
You cannot load the file back into the Elluminate Live! Chat panel.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 115
Saving Chat Messages to a File
Page 116
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 7: The Audio Panel
The Audio panel lets you participate in conversations during an Elluminate Live! session using a
microphone and speakers (or headset) via Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP).
Alternatively, if your organization offers teleconferencing services with
Elluminate Live!, you can use the Telephony (telephone conferencing integration)
feature for your in-session communications. The Audio panel will have elements
in additional to those shown below. For details, see Chapter 8, “Telephone
Conferencing”.
The Audio panel has the following components:
As a Moderator, you can use all the available Microphone/Speakers Mode Audio features.
Participants can use a subset of these features – but only when they have been granted the Audio
permission.1In the table below, a checkmark indicates which functions can be performed by
Moderators and which can be performed by Participants.
Feature
Moderators
Participants
Participate in a conversation (send and receive audio)


Adjust your own microphone and speaker levels


Mute your own microphone


Enable or disable your own talk feature


Adjust microphone level of others while they are talking

1. Participants can always receive audio and adjust their own microphones and speakers, regardless
of permission settings. They do require the Audio permission to send audio.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 117
Basic Audio Configuration
Feature
Moderators
Mute the speakers of another talker

Change the number of simultaneous talkers allowed

Give Participants the Audio permission

Participants
Generally speaking, it is recommended that you configure your Audio prior to joining a session.
There are a number of Audio settings that you can configure in Elluminate Live!
Basic Audio settings:

Set microphone and speaker levels (see Using Audio Setup Wizard)

Configure simultaneous talkers
Advanced Audio settings:

Select input and output sources

Set microphone level controls

Suppress transmission of silence

Mute speakers when talking

Set the microphone and speaker sample rate
To verify that your Audio is set up correctly, we recommend that you use the Audio Setup Wizard.
This wizard will allow you to select input and output devices and test your microphone and
speakers and adjust the levels if necessary. (For details, see Using the Audio Setup Wizard on
page 118.)
The remaining configuration items are advanced and, in most cases, you probably won’t need to
modify them (the default settings should be adequate). However, if you wish to modify them, you
can do so in the Preferences dialog. (For details, see Advanced Audio Configuration on page 133.)
Basic Audio Configuration
Using the Audio Setup Wizard
To test and configure your Audio, from the Tools menu select Audio > Audio Setup Wizard. A
series of panels will guide you through selecting Audio input and output devices and setting your
speaker and microphone volumes.
Page 118
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
It is recommended that you run the Audio Setup Wizard before your session
begins. (You can join your session early to run the wizard or join the
Configuration Room from Elluminate’s website at www.elluminate.com/support.)
You can run the Audio Setup Wizard again at any time during the session.
When anyone is using the Audio Setup Wizard during a session, the text
(AudioSetup) will be appended to their name in the Participants List.
On Windows, Linux or Solaris
1. Select your audio output device, following the instructions given in the dialog box. (For
further details on selecting an audio output device, see Selecting an Audio Output Device
on page 129.)
2. Play the recorded audio message provided and adjust your speaker (audio output device)
volume to a suitable level. (Follow the instructions given in the dialog box.)
3. Confirm whether or not your speaker was set to an appropriate level.

If you clicked on Yes, go to step 4.

If you clicked on No, you are prompted to try again or cancel. Click on Try Again to
go back to step 1.
4. Select an audio input device, following the instructions given in the dialog box. (For
further details on selecting an audio input device, see Selecting an Audio Input Device on
page 128.)
5. Select your microphone type to get the best results when testing your microphone.
-
Single Talker: Select this option if using a headset or a microphone just for yourself.
-
Multiple Talkers: Select this option if using a single microphone to pick up multiple
talkers. This is the default.
Whichever microphone you select here will become the selected
microphone under Audio Microphone Settings preferences.
6. Press Record and adjust your microphone recording level as you speak into the
microphone (audio input device). (Follow the instructions given in the dialog box.) Press
Stop when you are done.
7. Press Play to listen to the recording you just made and, based on the loudness and clarity
of the recording, determine if your microphone was set to an appropriate level.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 119
Basic Audio Configuration
8. Confirm whether or not your microphone was set to an appropriate level.

If you clicked on Yes, go to step 8.

If you clicked on No, you are prompted to try again or cancel. Click on Try Again to
go back to step 4.
9. Read the message in the dialog box and click on OK to complete Audio setup and exit the
Audio Setup Wizard.
On Mac OS X
1. Mac users cannot change their audio output devices directly in Elluminate Live! –
Elluminate Live! uses the system default device. To change your output device, click on
the speaker icon in the Select Audio Output Device dialog of the Audio Setup Wizard and
make your changes in the System Preferences Sound Output panel. (For further details on
selecting an audio output device, see Selecting an Audio Output Device on page 129.)
When done, click on OK to advance to the next panel of the wizard.
2. Play the recorded audio message provided and adjust your speaker (audio output device)
volume to a suitable level. (Follow the instructions given in the dialog box.)
3. Confirm whether or not your speaker was set to an appropriate level.

If you clicked on Yes, go to step 3.

If you clicked on No, you are prompted to try again or cancel. Click on Try Again to
go back to step 1.
4. Select an audio input device from the list or select the option Use System Default Device.
Follow the instructions given in the dialog box. (For further details on selecting an audio
input device, see Selecting an Audio Input Device on page 128.)
5. Select your microphone type to get the best results when testing your microphone.
-
Single Talker: Select this option if using a headset or a microphone just for yourself.
-
Multiple Talkers: Select this option if using a single microphone to pick up multiple
talkers. This is the default.
Whichever microphone you select here will become the selected
microphone under Audio Microphone Settings preferences.
6. Press Record and adjust your microphone recording level as you speak into the
microphone (audio input device). (Follow the instructions given in the dialog box.) Press
Stop when you are done.
7. Press Play to listen to the recording you just made and, based on the loudness and clarity
of the recording, determine if your microphone was set to an appropriate level.
Page 120
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
8. Confirm whether or not your microphone was set to an appropriate level.

If you clicked on Yes, go to step 8.

If you clicked on No, you are prompted to try again or cancel. Click on Try Again to
go back to step 3.
9. Read the message in the dialog box and click on OK to complete Audio setup and exit the
Audio Setup Wizard.
Configuring Simultaneous Talkers
As the Moderator, you can allow up to six (6) simultaneous talkers per session. The default
number of simultaneous talkers is set by the session creator when creating the session.
If you lower the number of simultaneous talkers during a session to a value
below the number of users currently talking, those users will continue to be able to
talk until they release the Talk button, or you remove their permission to talk by
removing their Audio permission in the Participants List.
To change the simultaneous talkers, do the following:
1. From the Tools menu, select Audio >
Maximum Simultaneous Talkers. The
Maximum Simultaneous Talkers dialog box
appears.
2. Move the slider to the appropriate number of
simultaneous talkers you want to allow.
3. Click on OK to save your change and close the
dialog, or Cancel to close the dialog box
without saving your change.
If you have simultaneous talkers in a
session, advise them to use either a headset
or an echo-cancelling microphone to prevent
an echo for everyone else who will be
listening.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 121
Using the Audio Panel
If the session is connected to a teleconference using the Telephony feature
in Elluminate Live!, the Teleconference participant (the one that shows up in the
Participant list) is not counted as one of the simultaneous talkers.
Using the Audio Panel
The following sections describe what you can do while in the session to adjust the microphone and
speaker levels. Although you can configure any of the settings while in the session, we do
recommend setting microphone and speaker levels prior to moderating your session.
Activating and Releasing Your Microphone
To talk, click on the
Talk button in the Audio panel or use the Audio hot key, which is
displayed on the Talk button (Ctrl+F2 in the example below). When you are done speaking, click
the
Talk button or use the Audio hot key again to release your microphone.
Notice that, when your Talk button is on, the Talk button icon
changes (the microphone is tipped up, “sound waves” are added
and the background color changes to yellow). You may also hear
an audible notification when you activate or release your
microphone.
You can turn audible notifications off. For details, see Setting Notification
Preferences on page 11.
If the Talk button is inaccessible (grayed out) it may be because the
Moderator has disabled your microphone or removed your Audio permission, the
maximum number of simultaneous talkers has been reached or you are using the
Telephony feature for audio communications.
Adjusting Your Microphone and Speaker Levels
The microphone level indicator (microphone icon) shows the volume levels when you are
speaking and the speaker level indicator (speaker icon) shows the volume levels when someone
else is speaking.
The microphone level slider should be positioned so that the microphone level indicator shows
green and yellow and almost edging into red when you are speaking your loudest.
Page 122
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
.
When all talkers have their microphones set properly, listeners won’t need
to keep adjusting their speakers to accommodate the changes in volume.
There are three ways to adjust your microphone level:
 Audio window: Move the microphone level slider in the Audio window to the right to
increase the volume and to the left to decrease the volume. If you see red in the indicator,
move the slider to the left, as your voice will sound distorted when you are speaking
 Tools menu: From the Tools menu, select Audio > Adjust Microphone Level and select
either Up to increase the volume or Down to decrease the volume.
 Accelerator Keys: Press Ctrl+Shift+Up Arrow ( ාໜ ↑ on Mac) to increase the volume or
Ctrl+Shift+Down Arrow ( ාໜ ↓ on Mac) to decrease the volume.
The speaker level slider should be positioned to a level that is comfortable to you.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 123
Using the Audio Panel
There are three ways to adjust your speaker level:
 Audio window: Move the speaker level slider in the Audio window right to increase the
volume and to the left to decrease the volume.
 Tools menu: From the Tools menu, select Audio > Adjust Speaker Level and select either
Up to increase the volume or Down to decrease the volume.
 Accelerator Keys: Ctrl+Up Arrow ( ໜ ↑ on Mac) to increase the speaker volume or
Ctrl+Down Arrow ( ໜ ↓ on Mac) to decrease the speaker volume.
Adjusting Another Talker’s Microphone
When There is a Single Talker
When Simultaneous Talkers is set to one, and
another person has the Talk button activated, that
person’s login name appears in the Audio panel
title bar and your own Talk button is deactivated
(grayed-out).
As a Moderator, you can adjust the talker’s
microphone.

To increase the volume, click on the
plus button. The talker’s voice will get louder.

To decrease the volume, click on the
minus button. The talker’s voice will get softer.
When you are adjusting talkers’ microphones, their microphone level
sliders will move. You should inform them of what you will be doing prior to
adjusting their microphones.
When there are Multiple Talkers
When you have set the Simultaneous Talkers to more than one, and there are two or more people
who have their Talk buttons activated, the Audio panel title bar will display Multiple Talkers and
plus and minus buttons will appear next to the Talk button.
Your own Talk button may or may not be
deactivated, depending on whether or not you have
reached the maximum number of simultaneous
talkers allowed.
To adjust the microphone of a specific talker, do
the following:
Page 124
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
1. Click on the plus button to
increase the microphone level or on
the minus button to decrease the
microphone level. A pop-up
window appears with a list of the
simultaneous talkers.
2. Click on the name of the person whose microphone you wish to adjust. The microphone
level will be adjusted up or down by 10%.
When you are adjusting talkers’ microphones, their microphone level
sliders will move. You should inform them of what you will be doing prior to
adjusting their microphones.
Mini-Controller with Audio
Click on the
Talk button to enable the microphone. The Talk button will change state:
(a yellow halo will surround the microphone icon).
If you have not clicked on the Talk button and someone else in the session is talking, the tool tip
over the Talk button will display who is talking.
The Talk button is disabled if you are using Telephony for your audio.
For more information on the Mini-Controller, refer to The Mini-Controller on page 43.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 125
Activity Lights and Indicators
Activity Lights and Indicators
You can monitor the state of Audio transmissions through various lights and indicators displayed
in the Audio permission column of the Participants List.
Activity Indicators
The table below describes the icons that are used in the Participant List to indicate what a session
attendee is doing while using Audio or Telephony. (For details on Telephony, see Chapter 8,
“Telephone Conferencing”.)
Activity
Indicator
Description
A microphone icon in the Audio column indicates that the Participant or Moderator
has Audio permissions.
A microphone icon with a yellow halo indicates that the Participant or Moderator is
currently talking using the microphone (has engaged the Talk button).
A telephone icon with a yellow halo next to a Moderator or Participant indicates that
the Participant or Moderator is currently connected to a telephone conference and
that the Teleconference participant is not muted.
If the icon appears next to the Teleconference participant, then it means that the
Teleconference participant is connected and not muted.
An interdicted telephone icon next to a Moderator or Participant means the
Participant or Moderator has switched to Telephony for audio communications but
the session is currently not connected to a telephone conference or the
teleconference has been muted.
If the icon appears next to the Teleconference participant, it means that the
Teleconference participant is muted.
Status Indicators
Page 126
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Status indicators appear on the Audio icons of Audio users in the Audio permission column (in the
Participants List) if there are delays in the receipt of Audio or if the talker or listener is not
responding to the Audio service.
All Talkers see status indicators for all listeners, Moderator listeners see
status indicators for all listeners (including themselves) and Participant listeners
see status indicators for themselves only. There are no status indicators shown
next to Talkers. 1

Amber or Amber-and-Red Indicators: Appear on the Audio icon of listeners to signify
their receipt of audio is delayed. An amber-and-red indictor signifies a greater delay than
an amber indicator alone.

Red Indicator: Appears on the Audio icon of talkers or listeners when they are nonresponsive and may be offline from the session. This usually means some problem with
the network connection and often will be followed by the user getting disconnected from
the session.
In the example to the right,

the Moderator Vivian is talking,

Lucy and Ricky are experiencing delays in
receiving the Audio signal, with Ricky
lagging further behind, and

Charlie is not having any problems
receiving Audio.
Troubleshooting Audio Delays
In general, you can continue to talk, as Elluminate Live! will buffer the audio for those who have
fallen behind and ensure they are caught up to real-time. However, if you wish to wait, to allow
users to catch up, you can mute your microphone. (See Muting Your Microphone to Let Listeners
Catch Up on page 131 for instructions.)
1. There is one exception: if there are multiple simultaneous talkers, a person can be a talker and
listener at the same time, so “talkers” may see status indicator for themselves – but only because they
are also “listeners”.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 127
Advanced Features
Advanced Features
Selecting an Audio Input Device
The first time you use Elluminate Live!, it will use the audio input device that is the system default
at the time your session is launched. You can select a different device using the Audio Wizard or
through the Select Audio Input Device dialog box.
The next time you join an Elluminate Live! session, the audio input device will be the one you used
in your previous session – provided it is available when you launch Elluminate Live!
A headset with microphone works best for most Elluminate Live! users as
both their input and output device.
Windows, Linux or Solaris
To change the input device, do so from within Elluminate Live! in one of two ways:
 through the Select Audio Input Device dialog box (Tools > Audio > Select Audio Input
Device); or
 using the Audio Setup Wizard (see Using the Audio Setup Wizard on page 118).
Devices (such as a sound card) may have a number of different input ports from which to choose,
such as Line-In, Phone and Microphone. Generally, whichever port you select will be used in all
future Elluminate Live! sessions, until you explicitly select a different port.
If you join an Elluminate Live! session when no audio input device is
connected, you don’t have to run the Audio Setup Wizard or use the Select Audio
Input Device dialog. Just connect your device and, after the system recognizes the
new input device, click on the Talk button – Elluminate Live! will automatically
connect to the device. You may need to adjust your microphone level.
To change the audio source from within the Select Audio Input Device dialog, do the following:
1. From the Tools menu of Elluminate Live!, select Audio > Select Input Device. The Select
Audio Input Device dialog box appears.
2. From the list, select the audio input line you would like to use.
3. Click on OK to save your change and close the dialog box, or Cancel to close the dialog
box without saving your change.
The available audio input line options will vary depending on your sound
card.
Page 128
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Mac OS X
When you launch your first session, Elluminate Live! will use your system’s default audio input
device. Subsequent sessions will use the same input device you used in your last session. This
system default is set under System Preferences > Sound panel > Input tab. You can change the
system default any time during an Elluminate Live! session.
If you are talking, release the microphone, change the input device and then
re-engage the microphone.
You also can change the audio input device using the Audio Setup Wizard (see Using the Audio
Setup Wizard on page 118) or through the Select Audio Input Device dialog in Elluminate Live!
You can make a change at any time during a session, except while you are talking. (If you try to
select the input device from within Elluminate Live! when talking, you will get an error message.)
The default setting in the Select Audio Input Device dialog box is Use System Default Device. To
change the audio source from the system default device to another device, do the following:
1. From the Tools menu of Elluminate Live!, select Audio > Select Input Device. The Select
Audio Input Device dialog box appears.
2. From the list, select the audio input device you would like to use. This will deselect the
Use System Default Device option.
3. Click on OK to save your change and close the dialog box, or Cancel to close the dialog
box without saving your change.
To revert back to using the system default audio input device, select the Use
System Default Device option in the Select Audio Input Device dialog. This will
deselect the device that was selected in the list of devices.
Selecting an Audio Output Device
The first time you use Elluminate Live!, it will use the audio output device that is the system
default at the time your session is launched.
If you are on a Windows, Linux or Solaris system, you can select a different device by running the
Audio Wizard or using the Select Audio Output Device dialog box. If you are on Mac OS X, you
can select a different device by changing the system default.
A headset with microphone works well for most Elluminate Live! users as
both their input device and output device.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 129
Advanced Features
Windows, Linux and Solaris
To change the audio output device, do so from within Elluminate Live! in one of two ways:
 through the Select Audio Output Device dialog box (Tools > Audio > Select Audio
Output Device); or
 using the Audio Setup Wizard (see Using the Audio Setup Wizard on page 118).
Whichever device you select will be used in all future Elluminate Live! sessions1 until you
explicitly select a different device using either the Audio Wizard or the Select Audio Output
Device dialog.
After using Elluminate Live! for the first time, changing your system
default output device will not affect which device Elluminate Live! will use.
If you join an Elluminate Live! session when no audio output device is
connected, you don’t have to the run the Audio Setup Wizard or use the Select
Audio Output Device dialog. Just connect your device and, after the system
recognizes the new output device, Elluminate Live! will automatically connect to
it. You may need to adjust your speaker level.
If you have been receiving audio before connecting your audio output
device, there will be a backlog of audio transmitted to you in “chipmunk” until the
backlog is cleared.
To change the audio source through the Select Audio Output Device dialog box, do the following:
1. From the Tools menu of Elluminate Live!, select Audio > Select Output Device. The
Select Audio Output Device dialog box appears.
2. From the list, select the audio output device you would like to use.
3. Click on OK to save your change and close the dialog box, or Cancel to close the dialog
box without saving your change.
The available audio output line options will vary depending on your sound
card.
1. Provided it is available when you launch Elluminate Live!
Page 130
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Mac OS X
Elluminate Live! uses the system’s current audio output device. If you change the system’s device
between sessions, Elluminate Live! will use that newly selected device the next time you join a
session.
If sound is not being transmitted by your audio output device, or you just want to change the audio
output device for your Elluminate Live! session, change the system default output device under
System Preferences > Sound panel > Output tab. You can do so while Elluminate Live! is running.
Muting Your Microphone to Let Listeners Catch Up
Muting your microphone is done through the Participants List.
1. Do one of the following to open the Audio context menu:
 To wait for all listeners to catch up, right-click (^Click on Mac) anywhere in the
Participants List.
 To wait for selected listeners to catch up, select the desired Participant name or names
and right-click (^Click on Mac) within the selection.
2. From the Audio context menu, select the desired function:
 To wait for all listeners to catch up, select Wait for All Listeners To Catch Up.
 To wait for selected listeners to catch up, select Wait For Selected Listeners To Catch
Up.
The Wait for All Listeners options appear in the Audio context menu only if
you have your Talk button activated.
Your Talk button will change to a Muted
Microphone button. When the audio of the listeners
has caught up, the microphone is reactivated (changes
back to the Talk button) and a bell will sound as an
audible indicator of the change of state.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 131
Advanced Features
Muting a Talker’s Speakers
When there are multiple talkers in a room and any of them are using speakers rather than
headphones to receive their audio, the audio received from other talkers is picked up in the
listener’s microphone and is sent back into the room to all the other users. This creates an echo
effect.
The echo can be avoided if those using speakers mute them. If you detect echoing, you can ask the
talkers to mute their speakers (see Muting Your Microphone to Let Listeners Catch Up on
page 131) or, as a Moderator, you can mute their speakers for them.
When you set a user’s mute speaker option, Elluminate Live! will remember
the option each time the user joins another session in the future. The user can
override this using the Audio Preferences dialog (Tools > Preferences > Audio >
Microphone Settings).
1. Select the name of the talker1 whose speakers you want to mute.
2. Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the selected name. The Audio context menu will appear.
3. From the Audio context menu, select Mute Speakers While Talking.
A dialog box will open, prompting you to confirm the operation.
1. You can select your own name from the list, giving you a quick way to turn your speakers on and
off.
Page 132
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
4. Click on Yes to
complete the
operation. The talker
whose speakers you
muted will receive a
notification.
To turn a talker’s speakers back on, select the talker in the Participants List,
right-click (^Click on Mac) to bring up the Audio context menu, and select Keep
Speakers On While Talking. You will be required to confirm the operation and the
talker will receive a notification.
Setting Audio Permission for Participants
By default, Participants are granted the Audio permission. However, there may be times when you
want to turn that permission off – such as when you want to eliminate distractions and focus
Participants’ attention on the information you are presenting.
When you remove the Audio permission of Participants, they will not be able to use their
microphones – but they will be able to listen to you.
The Audio permission is controlled in the Participants List by clicking on the microphone icon.
Below, only the Moderator Vivian and the Participant Ricky have been granted the Audio
permission.
For further details on setting permissions, please refer to Setting
Permissions on page 51.
Advanced Audio Configuration
In most cases, you probably won’t need to modify the advanced Audio configuration settings (the
default settings should be adequate). However, if you wish to modify them, you can do so in the
Preferences dialog.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 133
Advanced Audio Configuration
When you configure the Audio preferences, Elluminate Live! will
remember these settings each time you join another session.
Below are the instructions for changing Audio microphone and speaker preferences. Some of these
preferences require further explanation so additional information is contained in the subsections
below.
Microphone Configuration
Set the microphone configuration preferences as follows.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! (Apple) menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Audio > Microphone Settings. The
Microphone Settings preferences panel appears.
3. Select the desired options:

Page 134
Amplify quiet sounds from microphone dynamically – Select this option to enable
Audio to automatically increase the microphone signal level when the volume is too
low. By default, this option is enabled.
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
For further details, see Setting Level Controls on page 136.

Adjust volume automatically to limit distortion – Select this option to enable Audio to
automatically reduce the microphone signal level when the signal peaks are excessive
(volume is too high). By default, this option is enabled.
For further details, see Setting Level Controls on page 136.
To optimize the Adjust volume automatically to limit distortion control, select the type
of microphone you are using.
-
Microphone used by a single person: Select this option if using a headset or a
microphone just for yourself.
-
Microphone used by multiple people: Select this option if using a single
microphone to pick up multiple talkers. This is the default.
The first time you open the Microphone Settings
preferences panel, it may appear that Microphone used by a
single person is the default. This will be the case if you earlier
selected Single Talker in the Audio Setup Wizard; the
Microphone Settings preferences panel inherits this setting from
the Audio Setup Wizard.

Transmit all sounds, even when it appears to be silence – Select this option if you
want audio transmission to continue in times of silence. By default, this option is
disabled.
For further details, see Suppressing Transmission of Silence on page 136.

Boost the microphone volume to compensate for weak signal (Windows XP only) –
Select this option if your microphone level is too low and cannot be brought up to a
reasonable level (peaking in the yellow) with the microphone level slider. By default,
this option is disabled.
For further details, see Muting Speakers When Talking on page 139.

Microphone Sample Rate – Select a sample rate from the option menu if your
microphone is being shared with other applications.
For further details, see Setting the Sample Rate on page 137.
4. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
You can restore your Audio Microphone Settings to the default. For details
on restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on page 8.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 135
Advanced Audio Configuration
Setting Level Controls
During a session, a microphone may receive a wide range of signal levels – from very soft to very
loud. For example, the signal gets louder or softer as you move to or away from the microphone.
When sharing a microphone between a number of people in a room, not only will the signal vary
with the distance of each talker from the microphone but also will vary with the volume of
individual talkers.
For optimal clarity, sound must stay within a certain volume range. Within that range, if audio
signals are too weak (e.g., you are too far from the microphone or are talking very softly), Amplify
quiet sounds from microphone dynamically will automatically amplify the volume coming from
the microphone (without moving the volume slider). It provides a gain (increase in volume) of up
to four times the signal level, which should be sufficient to handle most circumstances. If it is
insufficient, you should probably re-adjust your microphone level slider.
If the sound surpasses the optimal range (on either end), the Adjust volume automatically to limit
distortion option kicks in and brings the volume within the optimal range by adjusting the
microphone volume slider. If your microphone level is too high, causing distortion on loud signals,
the Adjust volume automatically to limit distortion option will automatically slide the microphone
level slider to the left until the signal no longer distorts. If you have selected Microphone shared by
multiple people rather than Microphone used by a single person, it also can move the slider to the
right to try to pick up quiet voices.
You can set the level controls Adjust volume automatically to limit distortion and Amplify quiet
sounds from microphone dynamically in the Preferences dialog. For details, see Microphone
Configuration on page 134.
When Not to Use Adjust volume automatically to limit distortion
The only time you may want to turn Adjust volume automatically to limit distortion off is if you
have a microphone so sensitive that Adjust volume automatically to limit distortion is unable to
fully control the signal and manual volume adjustment is required.
When Not to Use Amplify quiet sounds from microphone dynamically
If the ambient room noise is quite loud, Amplify quiet sounds from microphone dynamically may
raise the volume of the noise to a level that becomes bothersome to others. If this occurs, turn
this option off.
Suppressing Transmission of Silence
When the Talk button is pressed, bandwidth is being used. Bandwidth usage increases with every
user that has the Talk button pressed. The more bandwidth that is used for Audio, the less
bandwidth will be available for the other features such as Application Sharing, playing of
Multimedia files, etc. Even if no one is talking while the Talk button is pressed, audio is still being
transmitted.
By default, Elluminate Live! will detect when no one is talking and will stop the transmission of
audio (suppress the silence), thereby reducing the amount of bandwidth used.
Page 136
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
If your microphone does not generate a sufficiently strong signal, your speech may be erroneously
detected as silence. If this is the case, silence suppression will cause your speech to cut in and out.
When this occurs, you should increase your microphone volume. If the volume is at maximum,
then you should enable Transmit all sounds, even when it appears to be silence. For details, see
Microphone Configuration on page 134.
When enabled, Transmit all sounds, even when it appears to be silence does
not become activated until there are at least three simultaneous talkers.
Boosting the Microphone Signal (Windows XP only)
Microphone boost is a hardware option on some Windows XP computers. If it is available on your
computer and Boost the microphone volume to compensate for weak signal is selected in the
Elluminate Live! Preferences dialog, the hardware will amplify the microphone signal (typically
making it about twice as loud) to compensate for microphones with weak signals. By default, this
option is turned on if your hardware supports microphone boost.
This option may not be available to all Window users as it depends on the
audio hardware you have; however, it may be accessible through the System’s
volume controls.
Sometimes the boost microphone feature distorts the microphone signal. If you find that your
audio setting is too loud, even though your microphone level slider is all the way to the left, deselect Boost the microphone volume to compensate for weak signal. For details, see Microphone
Configuration on page 134.
Setting the Sample Rate
Some systems that allow the microphone or speakers to be shared by multiple applications require
all applications to use the same audio sample rate.
If you have such a system, and you wish Elluminate Live! to share the microphone or speakers
with another application (e.g., an email application that beeps when you get new mail), you will
need to set the Elluminate Live! preferred sample rate to the other application’s sample rate – if the
sample rates are different.
To set the sample rate for your microphone, see Microphone Configuration on page 134. To set
the sample rate for your speakers, see Speaker Configuration below.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 137
Advanced Audio Configuration
Speaker Configuration
Set the speaker configuration preferences as follows.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! (Apple) menu, select Preferences (Macintosh)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Audio > Speaker Settings. The Speaker
Settings preferences panel appears.

Mute speakers when “Talk” pressed to prevent feedback – Select this option to mute
the speakers when you have the Talk button pressed. By default, this option is
disabled.
For further details, see Muting Speakers When Talking on page 139.

Speaker Sample Rate – Select a sample rate from the option menu if your speakers are
being shared with other applications.
For further details, see Setting the Sample Rate on page 137.
For optimal performance, Mac users should set their
speaker sample rate to 8000 Hz.
3. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you configure the Speaker Settings preferences, Elluminate Live! will remember this setting
each time you join another session.
Page 138
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
You can restore the Audio Speaker Settings preferences to the default. For
details on restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on page 8.
Muting Speakers When Talking
If you are using speakers rather than a headphones, you may wish to mute the speakers when you
have the Talk button pressed so the microphone will not pick up any audio feedback coming from
the speakers. To mute your speakers, enable the preference Mute speakers when “Talk” is pressed
to prevent feedback. For details, see Speaker Configuration above.
Just be aware that, when this option is enabled and the Moderator has configured the Elluminate
Live! session to allow Simultaneous Talkers, when you have your Talk button pressed, you will
not be able to hear others speak until you release your Talk button.
Some systems do not allow the microphone and the speakers to be active at
the same time. In this case, you won’t be able to disable Mute speakers when
“Talk” is pressed to prevent feedback.
As a Moderator, you can mute the speakers of other users. See Muting a
Talker’s Speakers on page 132 for instructions.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 139
Advanced Audio Configuration
Page 140
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 8: Telephone Conferencing
The Telephony feature of Elluminate Live! enables you to conduct your audio communications
with other session attendees via telephone conferencing, while continuing to use your computer
for all other Elluminate Live! features. As a telephone conference user, you will be fully integrated
into the Elluminate Live! session: you can communicate with users not connected via
teleconference (the traditional microphone and speaker users) and your communications will be
captured in session recordings.1
Telephone conferencing is not available in Elluminate vRoom™. For a list
of what features are available, visit the following webpage:
http://www.elluminate.com/Products/Product_Comparison/?id=146
For further information about telephone conferencing, including best
practices and a training video, visit the following web page:
http://www.elluminate.com/support/telephony/.
You can use the Telephony (telephone conferencing integration) feature for
your in-session communications only if your organization offers teleconferencing
services with Elluminate Live! If your organization does not offer
teleconferencing services with Elluminate Live! and you would like to learn more
about it, contact your Elluminate representative.
As a Moderator, you can use all the available Telephony features. Participants can use a subset of
these features. In the table below, a checkmark indicates which functions can be performed by
Moderators and which can be performed by Participants.
Feature
Moderators
Configure/edit teleconference connection information.

Connect/disconnect the session to/from the teleconference.

Announce the session to the teleconference.

Increase/decrease the volume of the teleconference.

Mute/un-mute the teleconference.

Participants
1. The visual elements of the Telephony user interface will not be visible in the recording.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 141
Feature
Moderators
Participants
Switch another Moderator or a Participant’s audio
communications from Audio (VoIP) to Telephony (telephone)
and vice versa.

Switch own audio communications from Audio (VoIP) to
Telephony (telephone) and vice versa.


Participate in Elluminate Live! session via teleconference.


Page 142
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Telephony is accessed via the Audio panel and has the following components:
The Key Players
Incorporating a telephone conference into your Elluminate Live! session requires the participation
of three key players: the Elluminate Live! Moderator, the Teleconference Bridge and the
Teleconference Chairperson.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 143
The Key Players
The Elluminate Live! Moderator
A Moderator is responsible for configuring the teleconference information in Elluminate Live!,
establishing and maintaining the connection to the telephone conference and managing the
telephony users within the Participants List. The Moderator may communicate in the session using
either microphone and speakers (VoIP) or the telephone (Telephony).
The Teleconference Bridge
To incorporate a telephone conference into your Elluminate Live! session, an Elluminate Live!
Moderator needs to establish a bridge between the teleconference and the Elluminate Live! session
by configuring teleconference connection information and connecting the session to the
teleconference. Although this bridge is not a person (it is software), it shows up as a session
attendee in the Participants List (as depicted below).
Teleconference Chairperson
With some teleconference providers, a Teleconference Chairperson must join the teleconference
before other participants can join. For example, when participants try to join a teleconference
before the chairperson has joined, they may hear a message such as “All participants will be on
hold until the chairperson has joined the teleconference.”
Beyond the initial connection phase, the Teleconference Chairperson also may need to manage the
telephone conference and its participants via call controls issued on a touch-tone telephone.
The Teleconference Bridge as Teleconference Chairperson
If the only purpose of the Teleconference Chairperson is to enable others to join the teleconference
(i.e., no further teleconference management is required), the Teleconference Bridge can be used to
simulate this role. You will need to program the Teleconference Bridge with the Teleconference
Chairperson PIN. (For details, see Configuring Connection Information to a Telephone
Conference on page 145.)
The Elluminate Live! Moderator as Teleconference Chairperson
If a Teleconference Chairperson is needed beyond the initial connection phase to manage the
telephone conference and its participants, the Teleconference Chairperson must be an actual
person. If the Elluminate Live! Moderator is familiar with the management of the teleconference
service, he or she could take on this role. In this case, the Moderator must use Telephony for audio
communications (since performing Chairperson functions requires the use of the touch-tone
Page 144
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
keypad on a telephone connected to the teleconference). Except during the initial connection
phase, there is no way to send call control codes via the Teleconference Bridge.
Configuring Connection Information to a Telephone
Conference
To connect a session to a teleconference, you must configure the teleconference connection
information within the Elluminate Live! session. This entails entering the telephone number(s) and
PIN(s) provided by your telephone conference administrator for the desired teleconference.
You can configure teleconference connection information only if telephony
has been enabled for the session by the session creator in the Elluminate Live!
Scheduling Server.1 If the telephony icons ( and ) do not appear in the status
bar, you will not be able to connect to a telephone conference.
This guide assists you with connecting to a teleconference that has already
been set up – it does not instruct you how to set up a teleconference. For
assistance with an existing teleconference, or to have a new teleconference
created, consult your telephone conference administrator.
To configure telephone conference connection information, follow the steps below:
1. Obtain the phone number(s), PIN(s) and SIP (if required) for your teleconference from
your telephone conference administrator.
2. Open the Teleconference Connection dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Telephony > Configure Telephone Conference.
 Click on the
Configure Teleconference Connection Information button in the
status bar (at the bottom of the window).
1. Session Administration System
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 145
Configuring Connection Information to a Telephone Conference
3. Enter the connection information for the teleconference.
a. Enter the telephone number and PIN for Elluminate Participants. The information is
for display purposes only (so Participants know what telephone number and PIN to
use to connect to the teleconference). North American and international numbers are
valid.
b. Enter the telephone number and PIN for Elluminate Moderators. The information is
for display purposes only (so Moderators know what telephone number and PIN to
use to connect to the teleconference). North American and international numbers are
valid.
c. Enter the telephone number or SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) URI1 and PIN for the
Elluminate Session (the Teleconference Bridge). The information entered in these
fields is processed by the teleconferencing bridge and sent over the connection to the
telephone network.
If the Teleconference Bridge will be used to simulate the
role of Teleconference Chairperson, enter the Teleconference
Chairperson’s PIN in the PIN field.
1. A SIP URI should have the following format: sip:xxx@host.domain. See your teleconference administrator for details on whether SIP is supported for your organization.
Page 146
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Telephone numbers may have any format (North American or international). The only
requirement is that the characters entered are limited to the numbers 0 to 9, spaces and the
characters - . * # ( and ).
Contact your system administrator to see if you are
permitted to use international numbers.
If programmed responses to the teleconference are required during the connection phase
(e.g., to skip roll call, wait for an announcement to complete, wait for an intermediate
connection to occur, etc.) then those codes must be entered into the Session PIN field.
Consult your teleconference provider for details.
The Elluminate Session is the bridge that connects the
Elluminate Live! session to the telephone conference. It is listed
as a session attendee in the Participants List.
A Note on the PIN and Programmed Responses
The Elluminate Session PIN field may be used to provide programmed responses. Many
call centers provide interactive functions to their users via the telephone keypad.
Typically, such commands are a # followed by two or three digits. For example, #42
might be "skip roll call" and #13 might be "re-record my roll call entry". Of course, the
codes will vary from provider to provider so you should consult your teleconference
administrator for details.
You can also program pauses into your PIN to leave time for the completion of an
automated greeting or to include a programmed response. To enter a pause, type a
comma.
The following are valid entries in the PIN field:
,,, 1212
#421212
,#42,1212
If the PIN is not accepted, then try calling the number from a land line or cell phone. If
it asks you to follow the PIN with a # key, then add that to the PIN field. You may also
try adding more commas before the PIN to provide more time for an automated message
to complete.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 147
Connecting the Session to the Telephone Conference
4. Save the teleconference information:
 If you want to connect to the teleconference immediately, click on the Save &
Connect button.
 If you want to connect to the teleconference later, click on the Save button.
Note that, when the teleconference is fully configured (with at least session
and participant data), the
Configure Teleconference Connection
Information button (in the status bar) is replaced by the
Teleconference button.
Connect to
Connecting the Session to the Telephone Conference
Once you have configured the connection information, you must establish the bridge (connection)
between the session and the telephone conference.
To connect the session to the telephone conference, follow the steps below:
1. If you will be using the telephone for audio communications in the session, switch to
Telephony (click on the
Use Telephony button in your Audio panel) and dial in to the
teleconference.
If you see the
button in your Audio panel, this means that there is no
connection information (telephone number and PIN) available for display to you.
If you have the connection information from another source, go ahead and use it
to connect to the teleconference; otherwise, wait until the
button changes to
the
Use Telephony button – the connection information will then be displayed.
2. There are two ways to begin the connection process:
 From the Tools menu, select Telephony > Connect Session to Telephone Conference.
 Click on the
Connect to Teleconference button in the status bar.
A progress window will show the connection to the teleconference.
Page 148
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
3. A confirmation dialog will prompt you to confirm that you have connected to the
teleconference. For information on how to tell if you are connected, refer to How will I
know I’m connected? below.
 Click on Confirm to confirm the connection.
 Click on Reannounce to hear the announcement again.
 Click on Disconnect to cancel connection.
How will I know I’m connected?
If you have already joined the teleconference via telephone, you will hear an audio announcement from
the Elluminate Live! session indicating that the session has joined the teleconference.a
If you are listening using your computer’s microphone and speakers, you may hear a greeting from the
teleconference (depending on the teleconference provider and/or configuration) and then the normal
sounds of the teleconference. If there are not yet any teleconference participants, you may wish to place a
quick telephone call to the teleconference to generate some sound to be heard over your computer’s
speakers. If you do so, be sure to hang up the telephone once you have confirmed the connection in order
to avoid echoing or other audio artifacts.
a. There is one exception: if it takes a while to connect to the teleconference after the PIN is sent,
you may not hear an announcement.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 149
Connecting the Session to the Telephone Conference
Note that a new “Participant” called Teleconference is listed in the Participants List.
Also note that the
Connect to
Teleconference button (in the status bar) is
replaced by the
Disconnect from
Teleconference button and the
Teleconference is not Connected status icon
is replaced by the
Teleconference is
Connected status icon.
If you configured the connection information incorrectly (e.g., invalid phone number or PIN), you
will receive the Connection Failed dialog. Click on Edit to open the Teleconference Connection
dialog and enter valid values.
Reconnecting the Session to the Teleconference when Disconnected
If the session gets disconnected from the teleconference either deliberately by a teleconference
moderator or accidentally by, for example, a telephone or network failure, a Teleconference
Disconnect notification dialog will be displayed to all session Moderators.
If the time limit for the teleconference has expired, you will be
disconnected (after a warning) and not able to reconnect. (Time limits are set by
your administrator.)
To reconnect to the session click on Reconnect. As with the issuance of the command Tools >
Telephony > Connect Session to Telephone Conference, you will be prompted to confirm the
connection.
Page 150
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
The Teleconference Disconnect notification dialog is not displayed when a
Moderator issues the command Tools > Telephony > Disconnect Session from
Teleconference.
Disconnecting the Session from the Telephone
Conference
Only a Moderator can disconnect the session from the telephone conference. You may want to do
so if, for example, you inadvertently connected to the wrong teleconference and need to change the
connection information or all Telephony users have left the session. To disconnect, follow the
steps below:
1. There are two ways to end the connection process:
 From the Tools menu, select Telephony > Disconnect Session from Telephone
Conference.
 Click on the
Doc Revision 1.0
Disconnect from Teleconference button in the status bar.
Page 151
Adjusting the Sound
You will be presented with the Confirm Disconnect dialog.
2. Click on Yes to disconnect. The Participant named Teleconference will no longer be listed
in the Participants List.
Adjusting the Sound
Muting the Teleconference
You can prevent the audio from the
teleconference from entering the session by
muting the teleconference. However, the
teleconference participants will continue to hear
each other and will still receive audio from the
session.
Muting is equivalent to
removing the Telephony privilege
from all telephone Participants. You
cannot mute individual telephone
Participants.
To mute the teleconference, click in the Audio
column of the Telephony Participant. The
Telephone icon will be interdicted1 to indicate
that the sound from the teleconference is muted
in the session.
1. circled with a line through it
Page 152
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
To un-mute the teleconference, click in the Audio column of the Telephony Participant again.
Changing the Volume
You can change the volume of the audio emitted by the session and received by the teleconference
by selecting Tools > Telephony > Increase Volume to Teleconference or by selecting Tools >
Telephony > Decrease Volume to Teleconference. Repeating these commands will increment the
volume up or down (respectively) within the preset minimum/maximum range.
Some teleconference providers normalize the incoming volume, so you will
not hear volume changes.
Announcing the Session to the Teleconference
If you are using Telephony and want to confirm that the teleconference bridge is working (such as
after a disconnection), announce the Elluminate Live! session to the teleconference by selecting
Tools > Telephony > Announce Session to Teleconference.1
You will know you are connected when you hear (via your telephone
connection) the teleconference announcement, which may be a recorded message
or an audio signature of some sort. For specific details on what announcement you
should expect, contact your teleconference administrator.
Joining a Teleconference
Any session attendee (Moderators and Participants) can join a teleconference, provided a
Moderator has set one up for the session. To join a teleconference, follow the steps below:
1. Click on the
Use Telephony button in your Audio panel. The Connect to
Teleconference dialog will open.
You cannot click on the Use Telephony button if you have the Audio Talk
button engaged – it will be disabled.
1. This command is the same as that invoked by the Reannounce button in the Confirm Connection
dialog.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 153
Leaving a Teleconference
2. Using your telephone, dial the teleconference telephone number displayed in the Connect
to Teleconference dialog.
3. Enter the teleconference PIN when prompted to do so by the teleconference (if required).
4. When you’ve successfully connected to the teleconference, click on OK in the Connect to
Teleconference dialog.
To let people know they have successfully connected, the Moderator may
choose to enable the teleconference service announcement, which may be in the
form of a recorded message or an audio signature of some sort.
Leaving a Teleconference
To leave a teleconference and once again use your Audio microphone and speakers, click on the
Use Audio button in the Audio panel.
Switching Communications Mode of Another Session
Attendee
As a Moderator, you can switch the audio communications mode of another Moderator or a
Participant within the session.
For example, you may want to switch a Participant’s mode from Audio (microphone/speakers) to
Telephony (telephone conference) if you know the Participant has joined the teleconference but
Page 154
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
has forgotten to switch to Telephony. In this situation, echo and feedback caused by the
Participant’s microphone may disrupt the session.
Microphone and Speakers (Audio) to Telephone (Telephony)
If you know a session attendee has already dialed in to the teleconference but has forgotten to
switch to telephone mode, you can switch them yourself. To switch another session attendee’s
audio communications mode from Audio (microphone/speakers) to Telephony (telephone
conference), right-click (^Click on Mac) on the session attendee in the Participants List and select
Audio > Switch to Telephone from the context menu.
Telephone (Telephony) to Microphone and Speakers (Audio)
To switch another session attendee’s communications mode from Telephony (telephone
conference) to Audio (microphone/speakers), right-click (^Click on Mac) on the session attendee
in the Participants List and select Audio > Switch to Microphone and Speakers from the context
menu.
Sending the Telephony Users to Breakout Rooms
All Telephony users must be placed into the same breakout room as the Teleconference (Bridge)
participant. If they are not, their communications will not be properly routed to the session and
VoIP users. (For details on breakout rooms, see Chapter 14,Breakout Rooms on page 293.)
If you try to move a Telephony user into a breakout room without the Teleconference (Bridge)
participant, you will receive a warning; however, you will still be able to do so.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 155
Activity Indicators
If telephone participants are moved to a breakout room that does not
contain the Teleconference (Bridge) participant, they will continue to hear the
teleconference audio from the room containing the Teleconference Bridge, and
will not be able to hear or interact with VoIP users in the breakout room.
Activity Indicators
You can monitor the state of Telephony transmissions through indicators displayed in the Audio
permission column of the Participants List. The table below lists the icons that are used in the
Participant list to indicate what activity a session attendee is doing while using Audio or
Telephony. (For details on Audio, see Chapter 7,The Audio Panel on page 117.)
Activity
Indicator
Description
A microphone icon in the Audio column indicates that the Participant or Moderator
has Audio permissions.
A microphone icon with a yellow halo indicates that the Participant or Moderator is
currently talking using the microphone (has engaged the Talk button).
A telephone icon with a yellow halo next to a Moderator or Participant indicates that
the Participant or Moderator is currently connected to a telephone conference and
that the Teleconference participant is not muted.
If the icon appears next to the Teleconference participant, then it means that the
Teleconference participant is connected and not muted.
An interdicted telephone icon next to a Moderator or Participant means the
Participant or Moderator has switched to Telephony for audio communications but
the session is currently not connected to a telephone conference or the
teleconference has been muted.
If the icon appears next to the Teleconference participant, it means that the
Teleconference participant is muted.
Page 156
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Setting Telephony Permission for Participants
There is no Telephony privilege per se. However, muting the teleconference is equivalent to
removing the Telephony privilege from all telephone Participants.
For details on muting the teleconference, please refer to Muting the
Teleconference on page 152.
Sorting the Participants List
When Telephony is enabled on your Elluminate Live! server, four new options are available to sort
the Participants List: Sort by Audio Mode, Keep Teleconference on Top, Keep Teleconference on
Bottom and Keep Teleconference on Top When Muted. These and the four standard options are
available in the Sort option menu, which can be opened by clicking on the Sort button (noted in
the diagram below).
The sorting options you choose will sort the Participant List in all rooms
you enter (the main room and breakout rooms) for the duration of your current
login session. If you exit a session and re-enter it later, your sorting options will be
lost and the defaults restored.
The Sort option menu is divided into three sections: the top section contains the Column Sorting
options, the middle section contains the Participant Sorting options and the bottom section
contains the Teleconference Sorting options.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 157
Sorting the Participants List
Column Sorting Options are mutually exclusive – you can only pick one. You cannot choose to
pick none, two or all three options:

Sort by Audio Mode: sorts by icon type in the Audio column, with the microphone icon
listed first and the telephone icon listed second.

Sort by Participant: sorts alphabetically by name in the Participant column. (default)

Sort by Raised Hands: sorts numerically by number in the Raised Hands column1 – that is,
in the order in which Participants raised their hands.
Participant Sorting Options are independent – you can pick both at once. You also can pick only
one or neither of these options:

Keep Me on Top: keeps you at the top of the list.

Keep Moderators on Top: keeps all Moderators at the top of the list. (default)
Teleconference Sorting Options are mutually exclusive – you can pick either none or one only.
You cannot choose to pick two or all three options:

Keep Teleconference on Top: keeps the teleconference “Participant” at the top of the list.

Keep Teleconference on Bottom: keeps the teleconference “Participant” at the bottom of
the list.

Keep Teleconference on Top When Muted: keeps the teleconference “Participant” at the
top of the list if it has been muted.
Sorting Rules
Rule 1: A hierarchy existing between the sorting options, where certain options take precedence
over other options.
The Participant Sorting option Keep Me on Top always supersedes the other Participant Sorting
option Keep Moderators on Top.
The Participant Sorting options (Keep Me on Top and Keep Moderators on Top) supersede the two
Teleconference Sorting options Keep Teleconference on Top and Keep Teleconference on Top
When Muted. (Keep Teleconference on Bottom is not affected by the Participant Sorting options.)
The Participant Sorting options and the Teleconference Sorting options supersede the Column
Sorting Options (Sort by Audio Mode, Sort by Participant and Sort by Raised Hands).
Rule 2: Sorting is dynamically updated following specific events: a hand is raised or lowered or a
Moderator or Participant joins or leaves the session.
Rule 3: When Sort by Raised Hands is selected and all the raised hands are cleared, the list is
sorted alphabetically by Participant name, even though Sort by Participants is not selected.
1. As Participants raise their hands, numbers are assigned to them in the Raised Hands column,
based on the order in which they raised their hands.
Page 158
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 9: The Whiteboard
The Whiteboard is the main presentation area in Elluminate Live! You can use this region to
present slides or use it as a work area where you and other session attendees can display images,
write or draw. As the Moderator, you are responsible for managing the screens in the Whiteboard,
the content of those screens and Participants’ permissions to view and work in those screens.
As a Moderator, you can use all the available Whiteboard features. Participants can use only a
subset of the features, and only if you have granted them the Whiteboard permissions. In the table
below, a checkmark indicates which functions can be performed by Moderators and which can be
performed by Participants.
Feature
Moderators
Participants
Use drawing and text tools to create objects


Insert images, clip art and screen captures as objects


Modify/edit own objects or objects of others, including
grouping and ungrouping objects


Erase or delete own objects


See what Whiteboard screens each Participant is currently
viewing and send yourself to the Whiteboard screen that a
Participant is currently viewing

Copy whiteboard screens from main room or private room
to breakout rooms and from breakout rooms to main room

Erase or delete objects of others

Move objects to the background or foreground

Load a Presentation/Open a Whiteboard file into the Main
Rooma

Create a new Whiteboard screen or Screen Group in the
Main Room

Set Participant Whiteboard permissions

Change screen properties and scale screen


Manage Clip Art collection


Doc Revision 1.0
Page 159
Whiteboard Components
Feature
Moderators
Participants
Explore objects


Explore screensb


View the Explore Screens window, Explore Objects
window and Select Screen(s) dialog in thumbnails view


Save Whiteboard screens to a filec


Print Whiteboard screensc


a. Participants can perform this, and all screen functions, in their own private work areas.
b. The Follow Moderator permission must be turned off.
c. Non-propriety Whiteboard only.
Whiteboard Components
The Whiteboard has the following components:
Page 160
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
If you do not see the Whiteboard, you are in one of the Minimal Layout
views. To view the Whiteboard, from the View menu select Layouts > Default
Layout (or one of the other non-minimal layouts).
Activity Lights and Indicators
You can monitor the state of Whiteboard activity through various lights and indicators displayed in
the Whiteboard permission column of the Participants List.
Activity Indicator
A yellow halo around someone’s Whiteboard icon indicates that he or she is writing on the
Whiteboard or loading content into the Whiteboard:
Status Indicators
Status indicators appear on Whiteboard icons of Whiteboard users in the Whiteboard permission
column (in the Participants List) when content (presentations, images or objects) is being loaded
into the Whiteboard.
Moderators see status indicators for all session attendees who are receiving
content as it is being loaded into the Whiteboard.1 Participants do not see any
status indicators.

Amber Indicator: Indicates the session attendee is receiving content from the server.

Amber-and-Red Indicator: Indicates the session attendee is still receiving content from
the server for the whiteboard screen they are currently viewing – that they cannot yet see
all the content for that screen.
When the red light disappears, you will know the session attendee can see all the objects on their
current whiteboard screen. When the amber light disappears, you will know the session attendee
has received all of the whiteboard data.
1. This is the case regardless of whether the Moderator is the person loading the content or just a
recipient of the content.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 161
Setting Whiteboard Permissions for Participants
In the example to the right,

the Moderator Vivian is loading
content into the whiteboard, and

Lucy, Ricky and Charlie are receiving
whiteboard content, with Lucy still
receiving content on her current
screen.
Setting Whiteboard Permissions for Participants
There are two types of Whiteboard permissions: the permission to use Whiteboard tools to enter
content in the workspace and the permission to freely navigate to various Whiteboard screens.
Whiteboard Tools Permission
By default, Participants may be granted the permission to use Whiteboard tools.1 However, you
may want to turn that permission off when you don’t want Participants to be able to alter the
content you are presenting. When you remove the Whiteboard tools permission, the Participant’s
Tools palette will disappear – preventing Participants from entering content in the workspace.
(Removing access removes the tools, which provides more whiteboard viewing area; this will
make the Whiteboard larger and can be useful in presentations.)
For a discussion of setting Whiteboard tool permissions, refer to Setting
Permissions on page 51.
Whiteboard Viewing Permissions
On the Whiteboard’s navigation bar, there are two permissions that you can set to control which
screens are displayed to Participants: Follow Moderator and Roam.
Follow Moderator
Select Follow Moderator when you want to force Participants in your current room (main or
breakout) to view only the same screen as your current screen in that room – presumably the
screen from which you are instructing. (This is the default setting.)
When you have Follow Moderator selected, you still privately can view the
contents of your private work area or a breakout room to which you are not
assigned. The Participants will not see those screens but will remain on their
current screen in their current room.
1. This is set by the session creator in the session scheduling server.
Page 162
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Deselect Follow Moderator when you want your Participants to work on different Whiteboard
screens or in their private work areas. When Follow Moderator is deselected, the navigation bar is
highlighted in pink to alert you that Participants may not be seeing the same screen as you.
By default, Follow Moderator is disabled in breakout rooms and
Moderators will see the pink highlight in breakout room screens. However,
Moderators assigned to a breakout room can place that room into Follow
Moderator mode and the pink highlight will disappear.
If the Whiteboard screens you are viewing are protected (see Protecting Whiteboard Screens on
page 203), only the permissions background color will be pink and Follow Moderator will be
replaced by Protected. Participants cannot move within these screens and will follow the
Moderator.
Roam
Roam permits you to navigate through screens without moving Participants and other Moderators
to those screens. The Roam permission is effective only when Follow Moderator is selected. If
Follow Moderator is not selected, Roam will have no affect on the Participants’ view.
Select Roam when you want to lock the Participants’ view on your current Whiteboard screen
while you “roam” through different screens.
When you deselect Roam after using it, you will be returned to the same screen the Participants are
on (when Follow Moderator is on) – basically acting as a bookmark to bring you back to the page
you left before you began roaming.
To move the Participants to the screen you have roamed to, turn off Follow Moderator, deselect
Roam, and turn on Follow Moderator again. Everyone will be on your current screen.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 163
Show Participant Screen Names
Show Participant Screen Names
This feature enables you to see what Whiteboard screens a Participant is currently viewing and go
directly to that screen.
This feature is valuable if the Follow Moderator option is deselected, in
which case Participants are free to move around to screens other than that being
viewed by the Moderator.
To show the screens currently being viewed by a Participant(s):
1. Click on a single Participant’s name or highlight multiple Participants in the Participants
List.
2. Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the selected Participants to open the context menu and
select Whiteboard > Show Participant Screen Name.
3. The Screens Viewed by Participants window appears.
This screen displays the list of Participants that you highlighted in the Participants List and
the name of the Whiteboard screen they are currently viewing.
4. To go directly to the screen a Participant is viewing, right-click (^Click on Mac) on the
Screen Viewed name and then click on Go To <Screen Name>.
Page 164
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Entering Content into the Whiteboard
The Tools Palette
The Tools palette contains drawing and text
tools you can use to create and manipulate
objects in the Workspace. It also has buttons to
insert images, load presentations and create a
new blank screen.
Participants will have access to the
Whiteboard tools only if they have been
granted the Whiteboard tools permission (see
Whiteboard Tools Permission on page 162).
If a tool or button is not
available, the icon is not visible. The
icon may be grayed out if it is not
relevant (e.g., the Group icon will be
grayed out if no objects are
selected).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 165
Entering Content into the Whiteboard
The Properties Editor
When you click on any of the text or drawing tools in the Tools palette, the Properties Editor
palette will appear at the bottom of the Whiteboard. From here you can format your text or graphic
by specifying various properties. The contents of the Properties Editor palette changes depending
on which tool is being used or which objects are selected. For example, if you are using the Filled
Ellipse or Filled Rectangle tool, the Properties Editor will present color buttons only.
The Properties Editor for the Simple Text and Text Editor tools contains buttons to set color, font,
size and style properties.
If you select two different kinds of objects, the Properties Editor Palette will
display the attributes common to those objects.
Inserting Graphics
Using the Pen Tool
Follow the steps below to draw a freehand line:
1. Click on the
Pen tool.
2. Select the color and line thickness from the Properties Editor at the bottom of the
Whiteboard. The default color is black and the line thickness is set at 2 pixels.
3. Position the cursor on the Whiteboard where you want the pen stroke to begin. The cursor
will be in the shape of the Pen tool .
4. Press and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the cursor to create the pen stroke.
5. Release the mouse button. The pen stroke appears on the Whiteboard configured with the
selected options.
Using the Line Tool
Follow the steps below to draw a straight line:
1. Click on the
Line tool.
2. Select the color and line thickness from the Properties Editor at the bottom of the
Whiteboard. The default color is black and the line thickness is set at 2 pixels.
3. Position the cursor on the Whiteboard where you want the line to begin. The cursor will be
in the shape of the Line tool .
Page 166
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
4. Press and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the cursor to where you want to
end the line.
5. Release the mouse button. A line of the selected width and color appears on the
Whiteboard.
Holding down the Shift key while drawing the line will result in a
horizontal, vertical or a line at a 45 degree angle depending on the direction that
you draw it.
Using the Ellipse and Rectangle Tools
Follow the steps below to draw an ellipse or rectangle:
1. Click on either of the Ellipse tools (
or
) or Rectangle tools (
or
).
2. Select the color (and if applicable the line thickness) from the Properties Editor at the
bottom of the Whiteboard. The default color is black and the line thickness is set at 2
pixels.
3. Position the cursor on the Whiteboard where you want the shape to begin. The cursor will
be in the shape of the drawing tool.
4. Press and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the cursor to create the shape.
5. When the shape is the size you want, release the mouse button. The shape appears
configured with the selected options.
Holding down the Shift key while drawing an ellipse will result in a circle.
Holding down the Shift key while drawing a rectangle will result in a square.
Using the Highlighter Tool
Follow the steps below to use the Highlighter:
1. Click on the
Highlighter tool.
2. Select the color and line thickness from the Properties Editor at the bottom of the
Whiteboard. The default color is yellow, the default line thickness is 10 pixels and the
default transparency is 40%.
3. Position the cursor on the Whiteboard where you want the highlighter stroke to begin. The
cursor will be in the shape of the Highlighter tool .
4. Press and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the cursor to where you want to
end the highlighter stroke.
5. Release the mouse button. A line of the selected width and color appears on the
Whiteboard.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 167
Entering Content into the Whiteboard
Using the Laser Pointer Tool
Follow the steps below to use the Laser Pointer:
1. Click on the
Laser Pointer tool.
2. Select an image to use as your pointer from the Properties Editor at the bottom of the
Whiteboard. The default image is the sunburst; it and the light bulb are animated GIFs.
3. Hold down your left mouse button and move the pointer on the Whiteboard – Participants
will be able to see the movement of the laser pointer. Release the mouse button to stamp
the laser pointer image on the Whiteboard.
To get the pointer to follow the mouse motion without having to hold down the mouse
button, double-click anywhere on the Whiteboard. To release this mode, click with the
mouse again or select a different tool.
Laser pointer images do not change the Whiteboard content. The image is
only visible as long as the laser pointer button is selected (dark grey). As soon as
you select another tool button, or navigate to another screen, the laser pointer
image will disappear.
Inserting Text
Using the Simple Text Tool
Follow the steps below to enter a single line of text:
1. Click on the
Simple Text tool.
2. Select the font name, color, size, bold, underline and/or italics from the Properties Editor
at the bottom of the Whiteboard. The default properties are Serif, 20 point, and black.
3. Click the Whiteboard to place an insertion point, and then type the text.
4. Press Enter when you are done typing the line of text.
The Simple Text Tool lets you type only one line of text at a time. You
cannot insert a line break and the text does not automatically wrap to the next line
when it reaches the edge of the Whiteboard screen, as does the Text Editor.
Page 168
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Using the Text Editor Tool
Follow the steps below to enter multiple lines of wrapping text:
1. Click on the
Text Editor tool.
2. Single-click on the Whiteboard to create a text box of the default size (250 x 70 pixels).
Alternatively, click and hold down the mouse button as you drag the cursor to create a text
box of the desired size. Either way, the Properties Editor will appear at the bottom of the
Whiteboard.
3. Select the font name, color, size, bold, underline and/or italics from the Properties Editor.
The default properties are Serif, 20 point, and black.
4. Type your text, pressing Enter when you want to create a new line of text within the text
box.
If the amount of text you type exceeds the space available in the text box, a
scroll bar will appear on the right side of the text box. If you don’t want the scroll
bar, resize the text box to display all the text.
The maximum number of characters that can be entered in a Text Editor
object is 10,000.
Inserting External Links
You can insert links into Whiteboard text using either the Simple Text tool or the Text Editor tool.
Anyone viewing your Whiteboard screen will be able to click on your links to access an Internet
site or send an email.
To enter a link using the Simple Text tool, do not enter any text except that
contained in the link. If you do, the link will not work.
Link Type
Syntax
Example
HTTP web site
http://
http://www.elluminate.com
Secure HTTP web site
https://
https://addons.mozilla.org/
FTP site
ftp://
ftp://ftp.linuxfocus.org/
Email message
mailto:
mailto:docs@elluminate.com
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 169
Entering Content into the Whiteboard
To launch a link, pass over the link with the
Selection tool. The pointer
will change to a hand. Single click on the link with the hand pointer. The
application that opens the link will be specific to your system.
Inserting Special Symbols and Characters (Windows only)
To type a special symbol or character on the Whiteboard, in the table below locate the numeric
code for the special symbols or character that you want to type and follow these steps:
1. Select the Simple Text tool or Text Editor and click on the Whiteboard where you want to
insert the symbol or character.
2. Make sure NUM LOCK is on.
3. Hold down the Alt key and then, using the numeric keypad, type the numeric character
code for the character that you want to type. For example, to place the copyright symbol
on the Whiteboard you would hold down the Alt key and enter the numeric character code
0169.
Some special characters only can be typed using Bold text. If the character
you want does not appear when you enter the character code, select the character
you typed and choose Bold from the Properties Editor.
Page 170
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Table 10: 1252 Windows Latin 1 (ANSI)
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
A0
B0
C0
D0
E0
F0
032
0
048
@
064
P
080
`
096
p
0112
€
0128
0144
0160
°
0176
À
0192
Ð
0208
à
0224
ð
0240
!
033
1
049
A
065
Q
081
a
097
q
0113
0129
‘
0145
¡
0161
±
0177
Á
0193
Ñ
0209
á
0225
ñ
0241
2
“
034
2
050
B
066
R
082
b
098
r
0114
‘
0130
‘
0146
¢
0162
²
0178
Â
0194
Ò
0210
â
0226
ò
0242
3
#
035
3
051
C
067
S
083
c
099
s
0115
ƒ
0131
“
0147
£
0163
³
0179
Ã
0195
Ó
0211
ã
0227
ó
0243
4
$
036
4
052
D
068
T
084
d
0100
t
0116
„
0132
”
0148
¤
0164
´
0180
Ä
0196
Ô
0212
ä
0228
ô
0244
5
%
037
5
053
E
069
U
085
e
0101
u
0117
…
0133
•
0149
¥
0165
μ
0181
Å
0197
Õ
0213
å
0229
õ
0245
6
&
038
6
054
F
070
V
086
f
0102
v
0118
†
0134
–
0150
¦
0166
¶
0182
Æ
0198
Ö
0214
æ
0230
ö
0246
7
‘
039
7
055
G
071
W
087
g
0103
w
0119
‡
0135
—
0151
§
0167
·
0183
Ç
0199
×
0215
ç
0231
÷
0247
8
(
040
8
056
H
072
X
088
h
0104
x
0120
ˆ
0136
˜
0152
¨
0168
¸
0184
È
0200
Ø
0216
è
0232
ø
0248
9
)
041
9
057
I
073
Y
089
i
0105
y
0121
‰
0137
™
0153
©
0169
¹
0185
É
0201
Ù
0217
é
0233
ù
0249
A
*
042
:
058
J
074
Z
090
j
0106
z
0122
Š
0138
š
0154
ª
0170
º
0186
Ê
0202
Ú
0218
ê
0234
ú
0250
B
+
043
;
059
K
075
[
091
k
0107
{
0123
‹
0139
›
0155
«
0171
»
0187
Ë
0203
Û
0219
ë
0235
û
0251
C
,
044
<
060
L
076
\
092
l
0108
|
0124
Œ
0140
œ
0156
¬
0172
¼
0188
Ì
0204
Ü
0220
ì
0236
ü
0252
D
045
=
061
M
077
]
093
m
0109
}
0125
0141
0157
0173
½
0189
Í
0205
Ý
0221
í
0237
ý
0253
E
.
046
>
062
N
078
^
094
n
0110
~
0126
Ž
0142
ž
0158
®
0174
¾
0190
Î
0206
Þ
0222
î
0238
þ
0254
F
/
047
?
063
O
079
_
095
o
0111
0127
0143
Ÿ
0159
¯
0175
¿
0191
Ï
0207
ß
0223
ï
0239
ÿ
0255
0
1
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 171
Entering Content into the Whiteboard
Inserting Images
Using the Insert Image Button
Image files of the following formats can be loaded onto the Whiteboard: *.bmp, *.gif, *.jpg, *.jpeg
and *.png.
To load multiple image files directly onto separate Whiteboard screens, use
the Load Presentation feature. See Loading a Presentation or Whiteboard File on
page 177.
Follow the steps below to load an image:
1. Click on the
Insert Image button. The Image File dialog box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the image file you want to open.
3. Select the desired image file. When you on an image file, a smaller version of the image
will display in the Preview area of the Image File dialog box.
4. Click Load to close the dialog box and place the image on the Whiteboard.
5. Position the image on the Whiteboard by dragging it to a new location and click on the
Whiteboard region to anchor it in position.
The image should be less than 1600 by 1600 pixels and the size of the
image file must be less than 2MB.
Using the Insert Clip Art Button
Clip Art images can be loaded from a Clip Art library of presentation and mathematical symbols.
(Refer to Customizing Your Clip Art Collections on page 222 for details on the default clip art
collections and how to create your own clip art collection.)
Page 172
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Follow the steps below to load a Clip Art image:
1. Click on the
Insert Clip Art button. The Clip Art dialog box appears.
2. Select the tab that contains the clip art you wish to load. By default the General tab is
selected.
3. Select the desired image.
As you hover your mouse over an image, a tooltip will provide a description
of the image.
4. Click Place to close the dialog box and place the image on the Whiteboard.
5. Position the image on the Whiteboard by dragging it to the appropriate location and then
click on the Whiteboard region to anchor it in position.
Using the Insert Screen Capture Button
Using the screen capture tool, AppSnap™, you can capture a screen shot from your desktop, any
application, or website and load it into the Whiteboard. You can capture the image as either a
JPEG or a PNG file. You can capture your entire desktop or a selected area only.
In general, for application images, PNG are better quality and often have a
smaller size. JPEG images are generally better for photo images.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 173
Entering Content into the Whiteboard
Follow the steps below to capture a screen image:
1. Click on the
Insert Screen Capture button. Screen Capture dialog box appears.
2. In the Select Screen Area panel select the area you wish to capture.

Entire Desktop — will capture everything currently on your desktop.

Entire Desktop with Delay — will cause a delay of 10 seconds before everything
currently on your desktop will be captured. During the delay, you may have time to
rearrange your desktop if it is currently not in the arrangement you want to capture.

Selected Area — will allow you to define an area to capture.
3. In the Select Image Type panel choose whether you wish to capture the image as a JPEG
or PNG. The appropriate Encode Settings panel will be activated, where you can further
define the quality of the file compression.
Page 174
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
4. Do one of the following:
 Select the option Hide Application First if you do not wish to include the Elluminate
Live! session in the image. The Elluminate Live! session will be hidden temporarily
until you capture the image.
On Solaris and Linux, this option works unreliably.
Some or all Elluminate Live! windows, or portions thereof, may
not be hidden.
 Do not select Hide Application First if you want to include the Elluminate Live!
session in your screen capture.
5. Do one of the following:
 Select the option Scale Down To Fit to ensure that your screen capture will fit the
Whiteboard if the capture is larger than the Whiteboard area.
 Deselect Scale Down To Fit if you want to capture the image in its actual size.
6. Click on the Capture button.
Prior to clicking the Capture button it is recommended that you have the
area you wish to capture set up correctly. If you find that you are not set and have
clicked Capture, click the Cancel button and start again.
One of two things will happen:

If you chose Entire Desktop, all the contents on your desktop will be captured as an
image. Go to step 10.

If you chose Selected Area, the Select Area window will appear. Below is an example
of the Select Area panel, placed over an image.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 175
Entering Content into the Whiteboard
7. Re-position and resize the Select Area window over the desired location.

To re-position the window, drag the window to the appropriate location or use the
arrow keys on the keyboard to move the window.

To resize the window, drag the edges of the window.

If you expand the Select Area window so that it is larger than the Whiteboard, the
edges will appear in red to indicate this. You may need to click Refresh to update the
contents of the window.
8. Click Snap once you have positioned the Select Area window over the contents that you
would like to capture. The Select Area window will close.
Instead of using the Snap, With Delay, Cancel, or Refresh buttons, you can
use the keyboard accelerators.
Snap: <Return> or <Enter> or <S> or <s>
With Delay: <D> or <d>
Cancel: <Esc> or <C> or <c>
Refresh: <R> or <r>
9. The image will appear on the Whiteboard. Position the image on the Whiteboard by
dragging it to a new location and click on the Whiteboard region to anchor it in position.
Page 176
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Loading a Presentation or Whiteboard File
Using the Load Presentation feature, in addition to loading whiteboard files (.wbd and .wbp) and
image files, you can import PowerPoint and OpenOffice.org presentations into your whiteboard.
Only Moderators can load presentations into the Main Room (public work
area) of the Whiteboard or into a breakout room. Anyone can load presentations
into their private work area.
The table below lists the presentation applications that are supported on the various platforms and
the file types that can be read by those applications and imported into the whiteboard.
Table 11: Supported Presentation Applications
Platform
Supported Applications
Supported File Types
Windows XP
PowerPoint 2003
.ppt
PowerPoint 2007
.ppt and .pptx
PowerPoint 2010
.ppt and .pptx
OpenOffice.org 3.0 and higher
.ppt, .pptx, .sxi and .odp
PowerPoint 2007
ppt and .pptx
PowerPoint 2010
.ppt and .pptx
OpenOffice.org 3.0 and higher
.ppt, .pptx, .sxi and .odp
PowerPoint 2007
ppt and .pptx
PowerPoint 2010
.ppt and .pptx
OpenOffice.org 3.0 and higher
.ppt, .pptx, .sxi and .odp
PowerPoint 2004
.ppt
PowerPoint 2008
.ppt and .pptx
OpenOffice.org 3.0 and higher
ppt, .pptx, .sxi and .odp
OpenOffice.org 3.0 and higher
ppt, .pptx, .sxi and .odp
Windows Vista
Windows 7
Mac OS X 10.5
& 10.6
Linux & Solaris
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 177
Entering Content into the Whiteboard
Various editions of OpenOffice.org (such as StarOffice and NeoOffice)
exist but OpenOffice.org is the only edition officially supported by Elluminate.
Presentations can be imported in a few different ways, as selected from the Files of Type dropdown menu in the Load File dialog:
Some file import options (e.g., PowerPoint and OpenOffice.org) will not
appear if the supporting applications are not installed on your computer.

PowerPoint Importer: uses PowerPoint to import PowerPoint (.ppt) and PowerPoint 2007
XML (.pptx) presentations.

OpenOffice.org Importer: uses OpenOffice.org to import OpenOffice.org (.sxi and .odp) or
PowerPoint (.ppt or .pptx) presentations.

Image Files: used to import*.bmp, *.gif, *.jpg, *.jpeg and *.png image files.

Protected Whiteboard Files: used to load protected Whiteboard files (.wbp).

Whiteboard Files: used to load Whiteboard files (.wbd).
To load a presentation, do the following:
1. Open the Select Screens dialog by doing one of the following:
 Click on the
Load Presentation button in the Whiteboard.
 From the File menu, select Open > Whiteboard.
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Explore Screens…, or from the
Whiteboard context menu select Explore Screens…, or press Ctrl+Shift+S ( ාໜ S on
Mac). The Explore Screens window appears (see Using the Explore Screens Window
on page 203). Select the screen you want as the insertion point and then right-click
(^Click on Mac) anywhere in the window to bring up the context menu. From the
context menu, click on Open.
 Enter Ctrl+O (ໜO on Mac). The Open dialog appears. Select Whiteboard and click on
Open.
Page 178
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. In the Select Screen dialog, determine
whether you wish to insert the file
before or after a screen, replace a
screen or insert as a sub-topic of a
screen.
3. Next, determine whether you want to
insert the file to the Current Screen or
Selected Screens. If you choose
Selected Screens, you will then see a
window that displays all of the
available screens. Select the screen
from the window.
If the Show
Thumbnails option is turned
on, you will see the screens
in thumbnail view. See
Viewing the Explore Screens
Window as Thumbnails on
page 204 for details.
To select multiple screens hold down Shift or Control ( ා or ໜ on Mac) and click on the
screen names. The screen name(s) are highlighted.
If you have multiple screens selected and are inserting As sub-topic, a subtopic will be created under each of the selected screens.
4. Click OK. The Load File dialog box appears.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 179
Entering Content into the Whiteboard
5. Navigate to the folder containing the file you want to load.
6. Select the file type you wish to load by scrolling through the Files of Type drop down
menu.
Some file import options (e.g., PowerPoint Importer and OpenOffice.org
Importer) will not appear if the supporting applications are not installed on your
computer.
The file type you select not only will filter which files you will see in the
Load File dialog box, but also allows you to control which application to use to
load a .ppt file – either PowerPoint or OpenOffice.org.
The options are as follows:

All Readable Files — Displays all file types that can be loaded into the Whiteboard.
You cannot load multiple image files using the All
Readable Files option. Use the Image Files option instead.

Page 180
PowerPoint Importer (*.ppt and *.pptx) — Uses PowerPoint to import .ppt and .pptx
files. Each slide in the PowerPoint presentation will be loaded onto a separate screen
as a background and the title from each slide will appear as the screen name.
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0

OpenOffice.org Importer (*.ppt, *.pptx, *.sxi and *.odp) — Uses OpenOffice.org to
import .ppt, .pptx, .sxi and .odp files. Each slide in the OpenOffice.org or PowerPoint
presentation will be loaded onto a separate screen as a background and the title from
each slide will appear as the screen name.

Image Files (*.bmp, *.gif, *.jpg, *.jpeg and *.png) — You can load multiple image
files directly onto separate Whiteboard screens. Each image will be loaded onto the
screen and centered as a background image. This allows you to load multiple images
exported from other presentation software simultaneously.

Protected Whiteboard Files (*.wbp) — You can load an existing protected
Whiteboard file. A Protected Whiteboard file cannot be saved, printed, or edited by
any Moderator and/or Participant.

Whiteboard Files (*.wbd) — You can load an existing Whiteboard file.
A Note on Default File Types
The default file type selected the first time you open the Load File dialog is dependant on
the operating system you are using.

If you are on Windows, PowerPoint (*.ppt or *.pptx) is the default – but only if
PowerPoint is available. If not, the default is OpenOffice.org (if available) or Image
Files (*.bmp, *.gif, *.jpg, *.jpeg and *.png).

If you are on Mac OS X, Linux or Solaris, the OpenOffice.org file type (*.ppt, *.pptx,
*.sxi and *.odp) is the default– but only if OpenOffice.org is installed. If not, the
default is Image Files (*.bmp, *.gif, *.jpg, *.jpeg and *.png).
The default file type specified above applies only to the first time you use
the Load File dialog. With all subsequent uses, the file type most recently used
will be specified.
7. Locate the file/image(s) you want to import, and select it. The file name will appear in the
File Name text box.
For optimal results, do not use the Files of Type selection All Readable
Files to load OpenOffice.org or PowerPoint presentations.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 181
Entering Content into the Whiteboard

If you are loading a PowerPoint presentation using the Files of Type selection
PowerPoint Importer, you have the following options:
Import Options:
-
Faster Import: provides the quickest upload, but in some cases may leave imaging
defects. This is the default.
-
Better Quality: provides a compromise between improved quality and upload
speed.
-
Best Quality: provides the best quality, at the expense of upload speed.
The quality of your imported presentation affects the size
of the Whiteboard file. If memory use is a concern, select Faster
Import.
Accessibility Options:
-
Page 182
Include Notes: if selected, this option will place the presenter notes from your
imported PowerPoint presentation into the Notes editor of all session attendees.
For details, see Viewing Presenter Notes Imported with a Presentation on
page 353.
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0

If you are loading a presentation using the Files of Type selection OpenOffice.org
Importer, you have the following options:
Import Options:
-
Faster Import: provides the quickest upload, but in some cases may leave imaging
defects. This is the default.
-
Better Quality: provides the best quality, at the expense of upload speed.
Accessibility Options:
-
Include Notes: if selected, this option will place the presenter notes from your
imported OpenOffice.org presentation into the Notes editor of all session
attendees. For details, see Viewing Presenter Notes Imported with a Presentation
on page 353.
If you have chosen a PowerPoint file (.ppt or .pptx) from
the Load File dialog but don’t see any options, it means All
Readable Files is selected as the file format (Files of Type). To
specify options for these file types, select PowerPoint Importer
as the file format.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 183
Entering Content into the Whiteboard

If you are loading one Image File, the image will appear in the Preview area.
When loading images you can load individual or multiple images from the same
folder. For multiple images they can be loaded in the order they are selected, in
alphabetical order or in Alpha-Number order (Alpha-number sorts first by the text and
then numerically by number 1, 2, 3, … 9, 10, 11, etc.)
8. Click Open to dismiss the dialog box and load the presentation.
9. The entire file/image(s) will be loaded into the Whiteboard area. When loading a
PowerPoint or OpenOffice.org presentation, each slide in the presentation will be loaded
onto a separate Whiteboard screen as a static image in the background. When loading
images, each image will be loaded onto a separate Whiteboard screen and will be centered
on the screen as a background image.
Page 184
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Manipulating Objects and Text
All objects on the Whiteboard are dynamic. The objects can be edited, moved, sent backwards and
forwards, re-sized and grouped.
Using the Explore Objects Window
The Explore Objects window allows you to easily take an inventory of your objects and perform
various operations on them. You can perform many operations on objects in the Explore Objects
window as you can directly in the Whiteboard.1
To open the Explore Objects window, do one of the following:
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Explore Objects….
 From the Whiteboard context menu, select Explore Objects….
 Use the accelerator key Ctrl+Shift+T ( ාໜ T on Mac).
The Explore Objects window will open, displaying all of the objects on the current screen. You
can resize and reposition this window as needed.
The objects are listed in the
order that they were placed
on the Whiteboard. The
Explore Objects window
indicates if objects are in the
background and if they are a
part of a group.
The objects are labeled with
the icon of the tool used to
create them and the name of
their creator.
Clip Art and Screen Capture objects use the same icon as that of the Image
object:
If a disclosure button ( on Windows) appears, it can be expanded to show
the objects beneath it (in a group or background).
1. You cannot resize an object, edit the text of a text object, erase an object or move an object’s
placement on the whiteboard.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 185
Manipulating Objects and Text
If the creator’s name appears in round brackets, that creator is still in the session. If the name
appears in <angle brackets>, the creator has left the session.
The Explore Objects window permits Group and Background objects to be
selected for editing as unique entities. Changes made to the selected objects will
be reflected back into the Group or Background.
To perform operations on objects, select them and open the Whiteboard context menu.
1. Select the desired object(s). To select a single object, click on it. To select multiple
objects, hold down Shift or Control ( ා or ໜ on Mac) as you click on them.
2. Right-click (^Click on Mac) to bring up the Whiteboard context menu.
3. From the Whiteboard context menu, perform any of the following operations:

Align, Copy, Paste, Cut, and Delete objects

Move selected objects forward or backward using the layering options

Edit the properties of the objects by selecting Object Properties…
Refer to the relevant sections in this chapter for further information on performing these
operations.
Viewing the Explore Objects Window with Thumbnails
You can view the current screen as a thumbnail in the Explore Objects window by toggling the
option Tools > Whiteboard > Show Thumbnails on and off. The default is to have thumbnails
turned on. Elluminate Live! will remember your setting if you leave and rejoin the same session.
The Show Thumbnails option affects not only the screen view in the
Explore Objects window but also the screen view in the Explore Screens window
and the Select Screen(s) dialog.
Page 186
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
The functionality available in the window (such as copying, pasting, dragging/dropping, etc.) is
identical in both views.
Selecting Objects
Objects can be selected directly in the Whiteboard or in the Explore Objects window.
Selecting Objects in the Explore Objects Window
Open the Explore Objects window, by doing one of the following:
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Explore Objects….
 From the Whiteboard context menu, select Explore Objects….
 Use the accelerator key Ctrl+Shift+T ( ාໜ T on Mac).
From within the Explore Objects window, click on the objects you wish to select. Use Ctrl+Click
(^Click on Mac) to select more than one object.
Selecting One Object in the Whiteboard
To select a single object, use the
Selection tool to click on the object. The
selected object will appear with a border around it.
Selecting More Than One Object in the Whiteboard
You can select several objects at the same time or add objects to an existing selection. All objects
must be on the same screen.
To select more than one object, hold down the Shift key and use the
Selection tool to click on
each object you wish to select. As each object is selected, a border will appear around it.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 187
Manipulating Objects and Text
Selecting Several Objects Simultaneously in the Whiteboard
To select several objects simultaneously, use the
Selection
tool to drag a selection area that touches a part of each object. As
each object is selected, a border will appear around it.
Selecting All Objects in the Whiteboard or Explore Objects Window
To select all the objects, do one of the following:
 Right-click (^Click on Mac) anywhere on the Whiteboard. The
Whiteboard context menu appears. Select the option Select All
Objects.
 From the Tools menu select Whiteboard > Explore Objects…,
or from the Whiteboard context menu select Explore
Objects…, or press Ctrl+Shift+T (ාໜT on Mac). The Explore
Objects window appears. Right-click (^Click on Mac)
anywhere in the Explore Objects window and select the option
Select All Objects from the context menu.
 Use the accelerator key Ctrl+A ( ໜ A on Mac).
Selecting All Objects Created by Participants
There are two ways to select all the objects created by a specific Participant or Participants.
 Using the Participant context menu:
1
Click on the Participant’s name in the Participants List. You can select multiple
Participants using Shift or Control ( ා or ໜ on Mac).
2
Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the Participant’s name. From the Participant context
menu select Whiteboard > Select All Objects From Participant. All the objects for the
specified Participant(s) will be selected in the Whiteboard.
Page 188
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
 Using the Tools > Whiteboard menu.
1
In the Whiteboard, click on an object created by a Participant.
2
From the Tools menu select Whiteboard > Select All Objects From Participant.
To de-select the objects, click anywhere on the Whiteboard.
Identifying the Creator of an Object
To identify the creator of a specific object, right-click (^Click on
Mac) on the object to bring up the Whiteboard context menu. The
creator’s name appears at the top of the menu (grayed out). If you
have selected more than one object created by different Participants,
the creator will be listed as “Multiple Creators”.
Selecting Simple Text and Text Editor Objects Containing Links
To select a Simple Text or Text Editor object that contains a link (see Inserting External Links on
page 169), hold down Shift or Control ( ා or ໜ on Mac) while using the
Selection tool to click
on the object. The selected object will appear with a border around it.
You also can select a Text Editor object with a simple click, as long as you don’t click directly on
the link. Make sure your cursor is an arrow (not a hand) before you click.
Grouping and Ungrouping Objects
Grouping and Ungrouping Objects in the Whiteboard
To group objects, select the objects you wish to group (see Selecting Objects on page 187 or Using
the Explore Objects Window on page 185) and click on the
Group Objects tool in the Tools
palette.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 189
Manipulating Objects and Text
To ungroup one or more groups of objects, select the group(s) of objects you wish to ungroup (see
Selecting Objects on page 187) and click on the
Ungroup Objects tool in the Tools palette.
The
Ungroup Objects tool is activated only if the objects you’ve
selected have been previously grouped.
Grouping and Ungrouping Objects in the Explore Objects Window
To group objects in the Explore Objects window do the following:
1. Select the objects you wish to group (see Selecting Objects on page 187).
2. Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the window to open the context menu.
3. Select Group Objects or Group Objects as Background (which will send the group to the
background).
To ungroup objects in the Explore Objects window do the following:
1. Select the group(s) of objects you wish to ungroup (see Selecting Objects on page 187).
2. Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the window to open the context menu.
3. Select Ungroup Object Groups.
You also can add or remove an object to/from an existing group by dragging and dropping it into/
out of the group.
To add an object to a group, drag it directly on the group heading.
In the example below, the Straight Line is dragged into the group created by “chair”. (For
instructions on opening the Explore Objects window, see Using the Explore Objects Window on
page 185.)
Page 190
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Moving Objects
You can move objects to other positions on the screen.
1. Select the object(s) you wish to move. (See Using the Explore
Objects Window on page 185.) In Windows, the cursor changes to
a 4-point arrow cursor (
).
2. Hold the mouse button down and drag the object(s) to a new
position on the screen.
If you drag an object completely off the Whiteboard, you can retrieve it by
selecting Whiteboard from the Tools menu and then choosing Restore Offscreen
Objects. The object will be placed in the center of the Whiteboard.
If you dragged more than one object off the Whiteboard, you may have to separate
the objects once you have moved them back onto the Whiteboard. You can use the
Explore Objects window to separate these objects if they are too close together.
Resizing Objects
You can resize a single object, multiple objects and grouped objects.
1. Select the object(s) you wish to resize. (See Using the Explore Objects Window on
page 185.)
2. Place the cursor over the object’s border or corner. The cursor will change to an arrow
shape.
3. Hold the mouse button down while you drag the edge or corner of the object. When
resizing multiple objects, they will all be resized proportionally.
To keep the same proportions when resizing a single object (lock the aspect ratio), hold
down the Shift key as you drag the edge or corner of the object.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 191
Manipulating Objects and Text
Text cannot be resized by dragging a corner. Instead, you can resize it by
selecting it and changing the font properties. (See Changing Properties of Text
Objects on page 200.)
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Objects in the Whiteboard
Cutting removes the selected objects from the Whiteboard and places them on the clipboard.
Copying retains the selected objects in the Whiteboard and places them in the clipboard. The
clipboard is overwritten whenever you copy or cut another object.
Once an object is cut or copied, you can paste it from the clipboard to the same or a different
Whiteboard screen. The last object(s) placed in the clipboard will be the object(s) pasted.
An object can be pasted multiple times. Each paste will be diagonally offset
from the previous paste.
Copying and Cutting Objects
To copy or cut an object, do one of the following:
 Select the object(s) in the Whiteboard or in the
Explore Objects window and then use an accelerator
key:
-
Copy: Ctrl+C ( ໜ C on Mac)
-
Cut: Ctrl+X ( ໜ X on Mac)
 Select the object(s) on the Whiteboard and then
right-click (^Click on Mac) anywhere on the
Whiteboard. The Whiteboard context menu appears.
Select either Copy or Cut.
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard >
Explore Objects…, or from the Whiteboard
context menu select Explore Objects…, or
press Ctrl+Shift+T ( ාໜ T on Mac). The
Explore Objects window appears. Select the
desired objects in the window. Right-click
(^Click on Mac) and then select either Copy
or Cut from the context menu.
Page 192
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Participants can cut only their own objects. Moderators can cut anyone’s
objects.
Pasting Objects
To paste an object from the clipboard, do one of the following:
 Click anywhere on the Whiteboard and then use the accelerator key:
-
Paste: Ctrl+V ( ໜ V on Mac)
 Right-click (^Click on Mac) anywhere on the Whiteboard. The Whiteboard context menu
appears. Select Paste.
 From the Tools menu select Whiteboard > Explore Objects…, or from the Whiteboard
context menu select Explore Objects…, or press Ctrl+Shift+T ( ාໜ T on Mac). The
Explore Objects window appears. Right-click (^Click on Mac) anywhere in the window
and select Paste from the context menu. The pasted item will appear at the bottom of the
Explore Objects window.
Use the
Selection tool to reposition the objects on the Whiteboard, if desired.
Copying and Pasting Whiteboard Objects by Dragging and Dropping
You can copy a Whiteboard object in a single step by dragging and dropping the object from the
Explore Objects window to the Whiteboard.
1. From the Tools menu select Whiteboard > Explore Objects…, or from the Whiteboard
context menu select Explore Objects…, or press Ctrl+Shift+T ( ාໜ T on Mac). The
Explore Objects window appears.
2. Drag the object from the Explore Objects window to the Whiteboard. A duplicate object
will be created on the Whiteboard. It will also appear in your Explore Objects Window.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 193
Manipulating Objects and Text
Dragging/Dropping and Copying/Pasting Text and Images to/from Other
Applications
Rich or plain text and images from other applications can be dragged and dropped or copied and
pasted into the Whiteboard. The following image formats are supported: bmp, .gif, .jpg, .jpeg and
.png. Images can be selected in the external application and dragged/dropped or copied/pasted
directly onto the Whiteboard, or you can drag/drop or copy/paste image files from your file
management system (e.g., Windows Explorer, Finder, etc.). You cannot drag/drop or copy/paste
text files – just selected text.
Other applications must provide the text or image in a suitable format – this
cannot be controlled by Elluminate Live! Therefore, this feature is very
application-specific.
If you are unsuccessful with drag/drop, try copy/paste – and vice versa.
Copying and Pasting
From another application to the Whiteboard: Copy the text or image in your third party application
(using its own copy function). The text or image will be placed in the clipboard. See Pasting
Objects on page 193 for instructions on pasting the text or image into the Whiteboard.
You can copy and paste only one object at a time.
Text will be placed in a Text Editor object – not a Simple Text object.
Images from web pages that have links associated with them may not paste
into the Whiteboard. Depending on your browser, the link may be pasted as text
instead.
From the Whiteboard to another application: You also can copy a text object or image in the
Whiteboard and paste it into another application. And, using the Screen Explorer, you can copy an
entire Whiteboard screen and paste into another application. The screen will be inserted as a single
image into the other application.
When copying or cutting a Simple Text object or Text Editor object,
Elluminate Live! will place an image of the cut or copied text in the system
clipboard, not the text proper. For Text Editor objects, to place the actual text in
the clipboard, open the object for editing and select the text to be copied. (This is
not possible with the Simple Text tool.)
Page 194
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Dragging and Dropping
From another application to the Whiteboard: Select the text or image in your third party
application (using its own selection function) or a graphics file in your file browser and drag it
onto the Whiteboard.
From the Whiteboard to another application: Open the Object Explorer and drag and drop one or
more objects to your third party application. You can also drag and drop an entire Whiteboard
screen into another application by dragging the screen from the Explore Screens window (see
Using the Explore Screens Window on page 207). The screen will be inserted as a single image
into the other application.
In the Main Room (public work area) of the Whiteboard, only Moderators
can drag and drop objects from the background. Participants can drag and drop
objects from the background only in their own private work area (Work Area
<User Name>).
Moving Objects to the Background or Foreground
When you move an object to the Background, you cannot select it, move it, edit it or delete it from
within the Whiteboard’s workspace. (These functions are always accessible through the Object
Explorer.)
In the Main Room (public work area) of the Whiteboard, only Moderators
can place objects in the background and similarly, move them from the
background to the foreground. Participants can place objects in the background
only in their own private work area (Work Area <User Name>).
Moving Objects to the Background/Foreground in the Whiteboard
To move objects to the background, select the objects you wish to move (see Selecting Objects on
page 187 or Using the Explore Objects Window on page 185) and click on the
Move Objects to
Background tool.
To move all objects from the background to the foreground, click on the
Move Objects to
Foreground tool. (This tool is unavailable if there are no objects in the background.) Once objects
are in the foreground, you can again select, move, edit and delete them.
Because you cannot select objects that are in the background, the only
option you have is to move all background objects to the foreground.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 195
Manipulating Objects and Text
Moving Objects to the Background in the Explore Objects Window
You cannot move the first object to the background but, if there are already objects in the
background, you can add additional objects by dragging and dropping them into the Background
group. You cannot move the objects back into the foreground using the Explore Objects Window –
do so in the Whiteboard (see above).
To add an object to a background group, drag it directly on the background
group heading.
In the example below, the Pen object is dragged into the Background group created by “chair”.
(For instructions on opening the Explore Objects window, see Using the Explore Objects Window
on page 185.)
Moving Objects to the Front/Back
All objects placed on the Whiteboard are layered and hence can be moved forward or backward
(one layer at a time) in relationship to each other. They also can be moved directly to the front or
back of other objects.
Moving objects forwards and backwards is not the same as moving objects
to the background or foreground. All objects you move forwards or backwards
reside in the foreground. You cannot move objects in the background.
1. Open the Whiteboard context menu by doing one of the following:
 Select the object(s) to be moved in the Whiteboard and then right-click (^Click on
Mac) anywhere on the Whiteboard.
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard, and then select Explore Objects… or press
Ctrl+Shift+T ( ාໜ T on Mac). The Explore objects window appears. Right-click
(^Click on Mac) on the objects to be moved.
Page 196
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. Select one of the following options:

Move to Front — moves the selected object(s) directly to the front of the Whiteboard

Move Forward — moves the selected object(s) one layer closer to the front.

Move Backward — moves the selected object(s) one layer closer to the back.

Move to Back — moves the selected object(s) directly to the back of the Whiteboard.
Erasing Objects
The
Eraser tool is available only when there are objects in the foreground. If there are no
objects in the foreground, the Eraser tool will be grayed-out.
1. Click on the
Eraser tool. A Confirm Erase dialog box appears.
2. Select My Objects to erase just the objects you created, All Objects to erase all the objects
in the foreground (created by all users) or Cancel to cancel the operation.
Participants are not given the option to erase All Objects – they can erase
their own objects only.
Deleting Objects
Deleting objects is permanent, so be careful.
To delete an object, do one of the following:
 Select the object(s) in the Whiteboard and press the
Delete key.
 Select the object(s) on the Whiteboard and then
right-click (^Click on Mac) anywhere on the
Whiteboard. The Whiteboard context menu
appears. Select Delete.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 197
Manipulating Objects and Text
 From the Tools menu select Whiteboard >
Explore Objects…, or from the Whiteboard
context menu select Explore Objects…, or press
Ctrl+Shift+T ( ාໜ T on Mac). The Explore
Objects window appears. Select the desired
objects in the window and then right-click (^Click
on Mac). The Whiteboard context menu appears.
Select Delete.
Participants cannot delete
objects created by others – only
their own. Moderators can delete all
objects.
Editing Text
You can edit text in both Simple Text and Text Editor objects, however editing of Simple Text
objects is very limited.
For information on formatting the text, see Changing Properties of Text Objects on page 200.
Text Editor Objects
To put the object in editing mode, select the object and then double-click on the text box.
You can use most standard text editing mouse actions within the text, such as double-clicking to
select a word and dragging to select text. The following standard text editing keyboard shortcuts
can be used to perform functions within the text of individual notes.
Function
Windows, Linux &
Solaris Shortcuts
Mac OS X Shortcuts
Select all text in current text box
Ctrl+A
ໜA
Copy selected text
Ctrl+C
ໜC
Cut selected text
Ctrl+X
ໜX
Paste copied text
Ctrl+V
ໜV
Delete selected text
Delete
Delete
Backspace
Page 198
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Simple Text Objects
Select the object and then double-click on the text box. To edit a Simple Text object that contains
a link (see Inserting External Links on page 169), hold down the Control ( ໜ on Mac) key while
double-clicking on the text box
Editing Object Properties
Whether you are working with a single object, multiple objects or a grouped object, an object’s
properties, including line width, line color and transparency, line style, line cap style, fill color and
transparency, and font can be changed.
To edit a single object, use the
Selection tool and select the object. The Properties Editor for
that object will be displayed at the bottom on the Whiteboard screen. Select the various attribute
buttons and/or drop down menus to change the object’s properties.
To open the Edit Object dialog box, do one of the following:
 Select the object(s) on the Whiteboard and then rightclick (^Click on Mac) anywhere on the Whiteboard.
The Whiteboard context menu appears. Select the
option Object Properties…
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Object
Properties.
 From the Tools menu select Whiteboard > Explore Objects…, or from the Whiteboard
context menu select Explore Objects…, or press Ctrl+Shift+T ( ාໜ T on Mac). The
Explore Objects window appears. Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the desired object and
select Object Properties….
Within the Object Properties dialog box, you can change an
object’s properties.
The Object Properties dialog box provides access to all the
properties of the selected objects. The dialog box consists of
a series of tabs: Shape, Text, Filled Shape, and Image.
Depending on the object selected, some of the tabs will be
available whereas others will be grayed out. Click on the tab
for the object you wish to update. The details of each tab are
explained below.
The Object Properties dialog box is the
only place where you can modify the fill of a
shape, the border of an image or Text Editor
object and the dashing or capping of a shape’s
stroke.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 199
Manipulating Objects and Text
Changing Properties of a Shape
The Line, Ellipses, Rectangle, Pen, Highlighter and Text Editor objects are categorized as Shapes.
You can change the line properties (width, cap style, line style and line color and transparency) of
all these shapes and the fill color and transparency of the Ellipses and Rectangle shapes.

Select the Shape tab and make the changes from the Object Properties dialog box and click
Apply or OK. Click OK to close the dialog box once you are done.
If the selection consisted of more than one shape, each shape will acquire the settings selected in
the dialog box.
Changing Properties of Text Objects
You can change the color, transparency and font properties for all text in the text object through
the Object Properties dialog.

Select the Text tab and make the changes from the Object Properties dialog box and click
Apply or OK. If you clicked Apply, click OK to close the dialog.
Text formatting will not be retained if you copy and paste formatted text
within the same text box, from one text box to another or into an external
application (e.g., Notepad, Word, etc.).
To change the format of just certain words in a text object, select the text
and use the Properties Editor palette at the bottom of the whiteboard to change the
it’s format.
Changing Properties of a Filled Shape
You can change the fill color and transparency for any shape.

Select the Filled Shape tab and make the changes from the Object Properties dialog and
click Apply or OK. Click OK to close the dialog box once you are done.
If the selection consisted of more than one filled shape, each filled shape will acquire the settings
selected in the dialog box.
Changing Properties of an Image
You can change the image frame style, and the transparency for any image.

Select the Image tab and make the changes from the Object Properties dialog box and click
Apply or OK. Click OK to close the dialog box once you are done.
If the selection consisted of more than one image, each image will acquire the settings selected in
the dialog box.
Page 200
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Aligning and Distributing Objects
When multiple objects on the Whiteboard are selected, they can be aligned and distributed in
various ways. This feature can be accessed from the Tools menu by selecting Whiteboard and then
Object Alignment.
The order in which the objects are selected is important as the first one is
considered the anchor and all other objects will be aligned according to the first.
To align and distribute objects, do the following:
1. Select the objects that you wish to align.
2. Do one of the following to bring up the Alignment dialog.
 Right-click (^Click on Mac) anywhere on the
Whiteboard. The Whiteboard context menu appears.
Select Align Objects.
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Object
Alignment.
Depending on your selection, various options will be available.
Objects may be aligned with each other, or with the Whiteboard.
Multiple selected objects will be aligned using the first-selected
object as the anchor. A single selected object will be aligned using the Whiteboard as the anchor.

Align Top Edges – aligns the tops of the selected objects to the top of the anchor.

Align Vertical Centers – aligns the vertical center of the selected objects to the vertical
center of the Anchor.

Align Bottom Edges – aligns the bottom of the selected objects to the bottom of the anchor.

Align Left Edges – aligns the left edges of the selected objects to the left edge of the
anchor.

Align Horizontal Centers – aligns the horizontal center of the selected objects to the
horizontal center of the anchor.

Align Right Edges – aligns the right edges of the selected objects to the right edge of the
anchor.
Distribution requires three or more objects to be selected. If less than three objects are selected, the
Distribute panel options will be grayed out and will not be accessible. The first-selected and the
last-selected objects are used as anchors and the remaining objects will be distributed between the
two anchors in the order selected

Distribute Vertical Centers – distributes the objects between the anchors so that the
centers of the objects are all evenly spaced.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 201
Working with Whiteboard Screens

Distribute Vertical Spacing – distributes the objects between the anchors so that the edgeto-edge spacing between the objects is the same.

Distribute Horizontal Centers – distributes the objects between the anchors so that the
centers of the objects are all evenly spaced.

Distribute Horizontal Spacing – distributes the objects between the anchors so that the
edge-to-edge spacing between the objects is the same.
Working with Whiteboard Screens
The Elluminate Live! Whiteboard consists of a number of screens that can be organized into screen
groups and hierarchically into topics and subtopics. You can manage which screens the
Participants can view by setting permissions.
The Whiteboard consists of various areas:
Main Room
When you first join a session, you will
have one Whiteboard screen in the main
room. This work area is public and
available to all session attendees.
Private Work Area
When users join a session, they will have
their own private work area (Work Area
<Your Name>) with one blank screen
(Private Screen 1). Moderators can use
their own private work area at any time.
Participants can use their private work
area only when they have been granted
the appropriate permission. (Follow
Moderator must be deselected.) Users,
including Moderators, cannot see each
other’s private work areas.
Screen Groups
Moderators can create additional screen
groups for separate presentations.
Sub-Topics
Under each screen, you can create sub-topics consisting of multiple screens; these may have their
own sub-topics. Sub-topics can be useful for presenting supplementary material.
Page 202
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Scaling the Whiteboard Screen
The Whiteboard screen can be scaled automatically to fit the Whiteboard as it is resized. You will
not see scroll bars as the content and working area will scale to fit your Whiteboard. The
percentage that the Whiteboard screen is scaled is displayed in the navigation bar.
To scale the Whiteboard, select Tools > Whiteboard > Scale to Window.
Protecting Whiteboard Screens
The Whiteboard screens can be protected so that all attendees in your session (including yourself)
will not be able to save or print the slides.
To activate this feature, select Tools > Whiteboard > Protect Whiteboard. Even when attendees
disconnect from the session, they still will not be able to save or print the Whiteboard content.
When you load a protected Whiteboard file (*.wbp), all the Whiteboard
screens in all the rooms will be marked as protected. This is also the case for
Breakout Rooms.
To un-protect the Whiteboard screens, select Whiteboard and then de-select Protect Whiteboard.
Using the Explore Screens Window
The Explore Screens window allows you to easily perform Whiteboard screen operations. The
window provides access to a set of screens and operations on the screens. You can resize and
reposition this window as needed.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 203
Working with Whiteboard Screens
To access the Explore Screens window, from the Tools menu select Whiteboard > Explore
Screens..., or from the Whiteboard context menu select Explore Screens…, or press Ctrl+Shift+S
( ාໜ S on Mac). The Explore Screens window appears.
To select screens, click on the name of the screen. To select multiple screens, hold down Shift or
Control ( ා or ໜ on Mac) as you click on them.
Selecting the screens in the Explore Screens window and then right clicking with your mouse
(^Click on Mac) can perform the following operations:

Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete screens by selecting Selected Screen(s).

Create new screens by selecting New and then select the option Whiteboard Screen….

Create new screen groups by selecting New and then select the option Whiteboard Screen
Group…

Load Whiteboard, PowerPoint and image files by selecting Open…

Save the selected screens as a Whiteboard file, PDF file or as an Image File by selecting
Save…

Go to the highlighted screen by selecting Go To Screen

Paste objects from one screen to another by selecting Paste Objects to Screens

Edit Screen Properties by selecting Selected Screen(s)…> Current Screen Properties…
Viewing the Explore Screens Window as Thumbnails
You can view the whiteboard screens as thumbnails in the Explore Screens window by toggling
the option Tools > Whiteboard > Show Thumbnails on and off. The default is to have thumbnails
turned on. Elluminate Live! will remember your setting if you leave and rejoin the same session.
Page 204
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
The Show Thumbnails option affects not only the screen view in the
Explore Screens window but also the screen view in the Explore Objects window
and the Select Screen(s) dialog.
The functionality available in the window (such as copying, pasting, dragging/dropping, etc.) is
identical in both views.
Navigating Between Screens
To navigate between screens, you can use the Whiteboard navigation bar, the Explore Screens
window or the Page Up and Page Down keys on your keyboard.

To move to the next screen:
 Tools > Whiteboard > Go to Next Screen
 Alt + Page Down ( ໩ Page Down on Mac)
 Down Arrow
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 205
Working with Whiteboard Screens

To move to the previous screen:
 Tools > Whiteboard > Go to Previous Screen
 Alt + Page Up ( ໩ Page Up on Mac)
 Up Arrow
Using the Whiteboard Navigation Bar
The Whiteboard navigation bar allows you to move within a screen group, to a new screen group
or to your private work area.

Use the navigation buttons – First, Previous, Next and Last – to move within the current
screen group.

Use the
View Topic menu to view a list of all the screens available as sub-topics under
the current screen and choose the sub-topics you wish to move to. Sub-topics are
alphabetically listed to make them easy to find by title. (To find them by position, use the
View Screen menu.) The View Topic menu will appear only if a screen has a sub-topic.

Use the View Screen menu to select and move to a particular screen, a different screen
group or to your private work area. When you move to your private screen(s), others will
not see the screen(s).
The navigation buttons allow you to navigate only through the current
screen group and a topic level. Use the View Screen and View Topic menus to
access other screen groups and sub-topics.
Page 206
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Using the Screen Counter
The Screen Counter in the navigation bar helps you keep track of
which screen you are at relative to the others within the screen group
or sub-topic group you are viewing.
For example, if your Whiteboard consisted of the screens listed in the
Screen Explorer to the right, the following screen counts would be
displayed:

The Screen 1 count would be 1/2 since it is the first of two
screens within the Main Room.

The Screen 6 count would be 4/5 since it is the fourth of five
screens within Group 1. Note that Screens x and y are not
counted as part of the group as they are sub-topics.

The Screen y would be 2/2 since it is the second of two subtopics beneath Screen 5.
As a Moderator, you can turn the Screen Counter on and off.
From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Show Screen Count and
select one of the three options: Show to All, Show to Moderators Only
(default) and Disable Screen Count.
Using the Explore Screens Window
Within the Explore Screens window you can move within a screen group, to a new screen group or
to your private work area. To navigate within the Explore Screens window, do the following:
1. From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard >
Explore Screens…, or from the Whiteboard
context menu select Explore Screens…, or
press Ctrl+Shift+S ( ාໜ S on Mac). The
Explore Screens window appears.
2. Move to a screen by doing one of the following:
 Double-click on the screen name in the list.
 Select a screen in the list and then rightclick (^Click on Mac) to display the
Explore Screens context menu. From here,
select the option Go To Screen.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 207
Working with Whiteboard Screens
Creating New Blank Screens
When you first join a session, one Whiteboard screen exists in the Main Room.1 (There is also one
screen in your private work area.) You can create as many screens as you need before your
Participants join the session or at any time during the session.
You can add more screens using the Create New Screens dialog box, indicate where you wish the
screens to be inserted into the current Whiteboard or your private work area, set the screen size,
and rename each screen.
There are two ways to create a new blank screen:
 Click on the
Create Blank Screen button in the Tools palette. This will create a single
new blank screen after the screen you are currently on and immediately take you to that
screen.
 Open the Create New Screens dialog box to create one or more blank screens at a
specified location. You can also define screen properties. (See instructions below.)
1
Open the Create New Screens
dialog box, by doing one of the
following:
 From the File menu, select New
> Whiteboard Screen.
 From the Tools menu, select
Whiteboard > Explore
Screens…, or from the
Whiteboard context menu
select Explore Screens…, or
press Ctrl+Shift+S ( ාໜ S on
Mac). The Explore Screens
window appears. Select a
screen from the list and then
right-click (^Click on Mac) on
the selected screen. From the
context menu, select New >
Whiteboard Screen….
 Enter Ctrl+N ( ໜ N on Mac).
The New dialog opens. Select
Whiteboard Screen and click
on New.
2
Select the Screen Location.
1. The exception to this is when a whiteboard file has been preloaded into the session by the session
creator on the Scheduling Server.
Page 208
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
3
Select where you wish to insert the new screen(s). You can choose to insert your
screen(s) after or before the current screen, at the end of the existing set of screens in
the group or as a sub-topic of your current screen.
4
Specify the Screen Size. You can create screen(s) sized for a specific monitor
resolution or you can specify the width and height in pixels. If you select Monitor
Resolution, use the drop down menu to choose the appropriate resolution from the list.
The default screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. If you select Canvas Size, enter
the Width and Height in the text boxes provided.
Each of the Monitor Resolution options has a
corresponding Canvas Size – they are just two ways of expressing
the same thing. These options can be used interchangeably.
5
Enter the number of screens you wish to create. In the Number of new screens text
box enter the number of blank screens you wish to add. The maximum number of
screens that may be added at one time is 99. The list of screens will be displayed in the
list area. Each screen will have a number along with a default Screen Name, for
example Public Screen 2.
6
Edit the name of each screen by double-clicking on the Screen Name and editing the
text box.
7
Click OK to create the screen(s) and close the dialog.
A blank screen will be inserted in the location you specified and, if you created the new screen
using the
Create Blank Screen button in the Tools palette, you will automatically move to that
screen.
How New Screens are Named
The default names of new screens are as follows, for both main topics and subtopics:

If inserted in the main room, the screen will be called “Public Screen X”.

If inserted in your private room, the screen will be called “Private Screen X”.

If inserting a public screen and a private screen simultaneous (by selecting both a public
screen and a private screen in the Explore Screens dialog before creating a new screen),
the new screens both will be called “Screen X”.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 209
Working with Whiteboard Screens
As you add more screens, the screen numbers in the screen names
are incremented by 1. The numbers represent in what order the
screen was added, not where it was added, as depicted at the right.
If you delete a screen (for example Private Screen 3) and then added
another new screen, the number of the newest screen will still be
incremented by 1 from the deleted screen (will be Private Screen 4,
not Private Screen 3).
You can edit the default name of a screen by
double-clicking on the Screen Name and editing the
text box.
Creating Whiteboard Screen Groups
You can create additional screen groups for separate presentations.
To create a new screen group do the following:
1. Open the Create New Screen Group dialog box by doing one of the following:
 Go to File > New > Whiteboard Screen Group.
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Explore Screens…, or from the
Whiteboard context menu select Explore Screens…, or press Ctrl+Shift+S ( ාໜ S on
Mac). The Explore Screens window appears. Select a screen from the list and then
right-click (^Click on Mac) on the selected screen. From the context menu, select
New > Whiteboard Screen Group.
 Enter Ctrl+N ( ໜ N on Mac). The New dialog opens. Select Whiteboard Screen Group
and click on New.
2. Enter a name for the screen group in the text box provided and click OK.
The new screen group will be created with one blank screen.
Page 210
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Moving Screens
You can easily rearrange your Whiteboard screens using the Explore Screens window. To open the
window, select Tools > Whiteboard > Explore Screens…, or from the Whiteboard context menu
select Explore Screens…, or press Ctrl+Shift+S ( ාໜ S on Mac). Select the screens you want to
move and drag and drop them to their new position, above or below an existing screen.
Creating a Sub-Topic
If you want your dragged/dropped screen to be a sub-topic of another screen, drag it directly on top
of that screen.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 211
Working with Whiteboard Screens
Copying Screens to Breakout Rooms
Moderators can copy Whiteboard screens in the main room (or their private rooms) to breakout
rooms either directly from the Whiteboard, from the Tools menu or from within the Explore
Screens window. (Participants cannot perform this function.)
Moderators also can copy screens from breakout rooms to the main room.
For details, see Copying Screens to the Main Room on page 303.
Copying a Single Screen Using Menu Options
1. Move to the screen which you would like to copy to a
breakout room.:
2. Do one of the following to open the Copy Main
Room dialog:
 Select Tools > Whiteboard > Copy Screen to
Breakout Rooms….
 Right-click on the Whiteboard and, from the
context menu, select Current Screen > Copy
Screen to Breakout Rooms….
3. Select the breakout rooms to which you would like to
copy the current screen. By default, all the breakout
rooms are selected.
If you have a large number of breakout rooms but want to copy your screens
to only a few, click on the None button to deselect all the breakout rooms and then
select the few desired rooms.
4. Click on the Copy button. If you want to confirm that you copied the correct screens, click
on the down arrow of the View Screen menu on the navigation bar to see a list of all
screens in all rooms.
Page 212
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Copying Single or Multiple Screens Via the Explore Screens Window
1. Open the Explore Screens window. From the Tools
menu, select Whiteboard > Explore Screens…, or
from the Whiteboard context menu select Explore
Screens…, or press Ctrl+Shift+S ( ාໜ S on Mac).
2. Select the screen(s) you would like to copy to a
breakout room.
3. Right click (^Click on Mac) on the selected screens
and, from the context menu, select Selected Screens
> Copy Screen to Breakout Rooms…. The Copy
Main Room dialog will open.
4. Select the breakout rooms to which you would like to
copy the selected screen(s). By default, all the
breakout rooms are selected.
If you have a large number of breakout rooms but want to copy your screens
to only a few, click on the None button to deselect all the breakout rooms and then
select the few desired rooms.
5. Click on the Copy button. If you want to confirm that you copied the correct screens, just
scroll to the destination breakout room in the Explore Screens window.
Cutting/Copying/Pasting/Deleting Screens
You can cut, copy, paste, and delete screens; select all screens at the same screen level; and empty
the screen clipboard from the Whiteboard area.
Cutting Screens
Cutting a Whiteboard screen removes the screen and places it on the clipboard. The clipboard is
overwritten whenever you cut or copy another screen.
To cut a Whiteboard screen, do one of the following:
 In the Whiteboard, navigate to the screen you wish to cut and right-click (^Click on Mac).
From the context menu, select Selected Screen(s) > Cut Screen.
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Explore Screens…, or from the Whiteboard
context menu select Explore Screens…, or press Ctrl+Shift+S ( ාໜ S on Mac). The
Explore Screens window appears. Select the screen in the Explore Screens window and
then right-click (^Click on Mac) on a selected screen. The context menu appears. Select
Selected Screen(s) and then select Cut Screen.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 213
Working with Whiteboard Screens
The screen is removed and placed in the Screen Clipboard. The Paste Screen and Empty Screen
Clipboard options should be activated in the context menu list. You can now paste the cut screen.
Copy Screen
Copy Screen copies the selected screen and places the screen on the Screen Clipboard. The copied
screen is not removed from the current list of screens. The clipboard is overwritten whenever you
copy or cut another screen.
To copy a screen, do one of the following:
 In the Whiteboard, navigate to the screen you wish to copy and right-click (^Click on
Mac). From the context menu, select Selected Screen(s) and then choose Copy Screen.
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Explore Screens…, or from the Whiteboard
context menu select Explore Screens…, or press Ctrl+Shift+S ( ාໜ S on Mac). The
Explore Screens window appears. Select the screen in the Explore Screens window and
then right-click (^Click on Mac) on a selected screen. The context menu appears. Select
Selected Screen(s) and then select Copy Screen.
A copy of the screen is placed in the Screen Clipboard. The Paste Screen and Empty Screen
Clipboard options should be activated in the context menu list. You can now paste the copied
screen.
Copying a Screen by Dragging and Dropping
Hold down the Control key (໩ on Mac), click on the screen which you want to copy and drag it to
the position where you would like the copied screen. Release the mouse before releasing the
Control key (if you release Control first, you will end up moving the original screen rather than
copying it).
Page 214
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Paste Screen
You can paste the screen from the clipboard before or after the current screen, to the end of the
current screen group, or as a sub-topic of the current screen. If the option Paste Screen is .ppt,
.pptx, .sxi (that is, ‘grayed out’), then the clipboard is empty. The screen can be pasted multiple
times.
You must have previously cut or copied a screen to have placed the screen in the clipboard. The
last screen or screens placed in the clipboard will be the screen(s) that will be pasted.
To paste a screen, do one of the following:
 In the Whiteboard navigate to the screen group and right-click (^Click on Mac) anywhere
on the Whiteboard. From the context menu, select Selected Screen(s), select Paste Screen,
and then select where you wish to paste the screen. The options are: After, Before, At End,
or As Sub-Topic.
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Explore Screens…, or from the Whiteboard
context menu select Explore Screens…, or press Ctrl+Shift+S ( ාໜ S on Mac). The
Explore Screens window appears. Select the screen in the Explore Screens window and
then right-click (^Click on Mac) on a selected screen. The context menu appears. Select
Selected Screen(s), select Paste Screen and then select where you wish to paste the screen.
The options are: After, Before, At End, or As Sub-Topic. If the screens in multiple topic
levels are selected the screens in the clipboard will be pasted once to each topic level.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 215
Working with Whiteboard Screens
The screen will appear in the location you selected.
Delete Screen
To delete a screen, do one of the following:
 In the Whiteboard, navigate to the screen you wish to delete and right-click (^Click on
Mac). From the context menu, select Selected Screen(s) and then choose Delete Screen.
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard >Explore Screens… or press Ctrl+Shift+S
( ාໜ S on Mac). The Explore Screens window appears. Select the screen in the Explore
Screens window and then right-click (^Click on Mac) on a selected screen. The context
menu appears. Select Selected Screen(s) and then select Delete Screen. The screen is
deleted.
Selecting All Screen Peers
The option Select All Screen Peers will select all the screens at that level. All the screens will be
highlighted in the Explore Screens window. Once highlighted, you can copy, paste, or delete all
the screens.
1. From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Explore Screens…, or from the Whiteboard
context menu select Explore Screens…, or press Ctrl+Shift+S ( ාໜ S on Mac). The
Explore Screens window appears. Select the screen in the Explore Screens window and
then right-click (^Click on Mac) on a selected screen. The context menu appears.
Page 216
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. Select Selected Screen(s) and then select the option Select All Screen Peers.
In the Explore Screens window, all screen peers will be highlighted.
3. You can copy, paste, or delete all the screens.
Emptying Screen Clipboard
The Empty Screen Clipboard feature removes the last copied screen from the clipboard. You do
not need to clear your clipboard to copy or cut another screen because the clipboard is overwritten
when you cut or copy another screen.
To empty the Screen Clipboard, do one of the following:
 Right-click (^Click on Mac) anywhere on the Whiteboard. The context menu appears.
Select Selected Screen(s) > Empty Screen Clipboard.
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Explore Screens…, or from the Whiteboard
context menu select Explore Screens…, or press Ctrl+Shift+S ( ාໜ S on Mac). The
Explore Screens window appears. Right-click (^Click on Mac) anywhere in the Explore
Screens window. The context menu appears. Select Selected Screen(s) and then select
Empty Screen Clipboard.
The Screen Clipboard will be empty.
Dragging/Dropping Screens to Other Applications
You can also copy an entire Whiteboard screen into another application by dragging the screen
from the Explore Screens window. The screen will be inserted as a single image into the other
application.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 217
Working with Whiteboard Screens
Editing Screen Properties
You can edit the properties of your current screen in the Edit Screen Properties dialog box.
To open the Edit Screen Properties dialog box, do one of the following:
 In the Whiteboard, navigate to the screen you wish to edit and right-click (^Click on Mac)
anywhere on the Whiteboard. From the context menu, select Selected Screen(s) and then
choose Current Screen Properties.
 In the Whiteboard, navigate to the screen you wish to edit. From the Tools menu, select
Whiteboard and then choose Current Screen Properties…
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard >Explore Screens… or press Ctrl+Shift+S
( ාໜ S on Mac). The Explore Screens window appears. Select the screen(s) you wish to
edit and then right-click (^Click on Mac) on the selected screen. The context menu
appears. Select Selected Screen(s) > Current Screen Properties…
Page 218
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
From the Screen Properties dialog box you are able to change the following:

The preferred Screen Size for a specific monitor resolution or you can specify the width
and height in pixels.

Edit the name of each screen by double-clicking on the text box in the Screen Name
column and editing it.
Saving Whiteboard Screens
You can save the Whiteboard screens in Elluminate Live! in the following formats:
WBD File
When Whiteboard screens are saved as a Whiteboard file (.wbd), they are saved as
one file that can only be imported and reviewed in an Elluminate Live! session.
WBP File
When Whiteboard screens are saved as a Protected Whiteboard file (.wbp), they are
saved as one file that can only be imported and reviewed in an Elluminate Live!
session. These files are protected and cannot be printed, saved, or edited unless the
Moderator removes the protection flag by going to Tools, Whiteboard, and deselecting the option Protect Whiteboard.
PDF File
When Whiteboard screens are saved as a PDF file (.pdf), they are saved as one file
and can be reviewed outside of the Elluminate Live! environment.
PNG File
When Whiteboard screens are saved as Image files (.png), they are saved as separate
images and can be loaded individually onto the Whiteboard as images or used in any
other image processing application.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 219
Working with Whiteboard Screens
To save Whiteboard screens, do the following:
1. Open the Save Whiteboard dialog by doing one of the following:
 Click on the
Save button in the Toolbar.
 From the File menu, select Save > Whiteboard…
 From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Explore Screens…, or from the
Whiteboard context menu select Explore Screens…, or press Ctrl+Shift+S ( ාໜ S on
Mac). The Explore Screens window appears. Select the screen you wish to save and
then right-click (^Click on Mac) on the selected screen. The context menu appears.
Select Save to a File…
 Enter Ctrl+S ( ໜ S on Mac). The Save dialog appears. Select Whiteboard and click on
Save.
2. The Select Screens dialog box appears. Choose
whether you want to save all the screens in the
Current Screen Group, only the Current Screen
or Selected Screens. If you choose Selected
Screens, you will then see a list of all the
screens. Select the screen(s) you wish to save.
Use Shift or Control ( ා or ໜ on Mac) to select
multiple screens. Then click OK.
3. From the Save Whiteboard dialog box, navigate
to and open the file folder in which you want to
save the Whiteboard.
4. Type a file name in the File name text box.
5. Scroll through the Files of type drop down menu
and choose the file format.
6. Click Save to save the file and close the Save
Whiteboard dialog box.
Printing Whiteboard Screens
You can print individual screens, multiple selected screens and screen groups.
1. Open the Select Screens dialog by doing one of the following:
 Click on the
Print button in the Toolbar.
 From the File menu, select Print and then choose Whiteboard…
 Enter Ctrl+P ( ໜ P on Mac). The Print dialog appears. Select Whiteboard and click on
Print.
The Select Screens dialog box appears.
Page 220
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. Choose whether you want to print all the screens in the
Current Screen Group, only the Current Screen or Selected
Screens. If you choose Selected Screens, you will then see
a list of all the screens. Select the screen(s) from the list.
Use Shift or Control ( ා or ໜ on Mac) to select multiple
screens. Then click OK.
3. The Page Set-up dialog box appears.
4. In the Page Setup dialog box, specify your preferences and
click OK.
If the Whiteboard is protected no one, including the Moderator, can print
any screens.
Locating an OpenOffice.org Installation
The OpenOffice.org executable will be found automatically on the Mac and Windows. If you wish
to use an installation other than the default, you can change the location through the Whiteboard
Preferences dialog.
Configure your OpenOffice.org location in the Preferences dialog.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! (Apple) menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select OpenOffice.org under Whiteboard. The
OpenOffice.org Application preferences panel appears.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 221
Customizing Your Clip Art Collections
3. If you don’t want to use the default location, de-select the option Use default
OpenOffice.org installation.
4. Click the Browse button. The Open dialog box appears.
5. Navigate to and open the folder where the OpenOffice.org installation is located. This
location must contain the /classes folder. The classes folder contains the jar file.
6. Select the file. The file name will appear in the File Name: text box. Click Open to load
the file and dismiss the dialog box.
7. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you change your OpenOffice.org installation location, Elluminate Live! will remember your
setting each time you join another session.
You can restore your OpenOffice.org installation location to the default.
For details on restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on
page 8.
Customizing Your Clip Art Collections
Elluminate Live! offers you the ability to customize and add images to those available in the Clip
Art library from the
button in the Whiteboard toolbar. A set of images can be saved as a
collection and any number of clip art collections can be created and can be loaded each time you
join Elluminate Live!
The Clip Art Collections dialog box lists all the clip art collections that are available.
Page 222
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Organizing Your Clip Art Collection
The clip art collections that are available to use with the
Whiteboard must be loaded into the Clip Art library and then
selected to appear.
To view and/or modify the collections that appear in the Clip
Art library, do the following:
1. From the Tools menu, select Whiteboard > Clip Art
Collections… The Clip Art Collections dialog box
appears
2.
Select the collections that you want to appear in the
Clip Art library. A check mark will appear in the box
next to the Collection name. All Clip Art collections
selected in this window will be loaded each time you
join an Elluminate Live! session.
3. To disable the collections from being used with the
Whiteboard, de-select the collections in the list.
Adding a Clip Art Collection to the Library
To add a Specified Clip Art Collection to the Clip Art Library, do the following:
1. From the Clip Art Collections dialog box, click on the
button in the tool bar.
2. The “Browse for Collections Files to Use” dialog box appears.
3. Navigate to the folder containing the clip art collection file and select the file from the list.
4. Click Open to load the collection and dismiss the dialog box.
The Clip Art collection is now loaded into the Clip Art library and appears in the Clip Art
Collections dialog box.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 223
Customizing Your Clip Art Collections
Removing the Clip Art Collection from the Library
To remove a customized Clip Art collection from the Clip Art
Library, do the following:
1. From the Clip Art Collections dialog box, select the
collection to be deleted and then click on the
button.
2. The Remove User Collections Confirmation dialog
box appears.
3. Click OK to remove the Clip Art collection from the
library.
You cannot remove the BuiltIn Collections, only turn them off.
Creating New Clip Art Collections
New Clip Art collections can be created at any time. To create a new collection, do the following:
1. Open the Clip Art Collections dialog box by doing one of the following:
 From the Clip Art Collections dialog box, click on the
 The Create/Edit Clip Art Collections dialog box appears.
Page 224
button.
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. Click on the
button to display a blank collection file template.
3. Enter the title of the collection in the Collection Title: text box (highlighted in pink).
4. Click on the
button to load a new image into the collection. A dialog box will appear
which will allow you to select images from your folders. When loading images you can
load them individually or you can load multiple images from the same folder using Shift
or Control ( ා or ໜ on Mac).
When loading multiple images, they can be loaded in the order that they are selected, in
alphabetical or in alphanumeric order. Alphanumeric sorts first by number (1, 2, 3, etc.)
and then by text (a, b, c, etc.).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 225
Customizing Your Clip Art Collections
5. Click Open to load the images and dismiss the window. The images will appear in the list.
6. For every image, the ToolTip Text to display for file column will show the name of the
image. You may edit the names by double-clicking in the text box and entering the name.
7. Re-order the images by clicking on either the up
button to move the image up or
clicking on the down
button to move the image down. You can also delete the image
by clicking on the
button.
8. You can add an existing collection into the current collection by clicking on the
button. This will add the collection to the existing set and will appear as a new tab in the
current collection.
9. Once you have entered the images, click on the
new file.
button to save the collection(s) to a
10. Click Close to exit this window. The new collection will now appear on the Clip Art
Collections dialog box.
Editing, Deleting, and Merging Clip Art Collections
To edit a customized Clip Art collection, load the collection using one of the following methods:
 In the Clip Art Collections dialog box, select the appropriate name of the Clip Art
Collection and click on the
button.
 In the Create/Edit Clip Art Collections dialog box, click on the
existing collection.
Page 226
button to load an
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
In the Create/Edit Clip Art Collections dialog box, you will be able to use the buttons at the top of
the dialog box to:

Create a new collection in the current collection.

Load a collection.

Save the collection to the current location and name.

Save the collection to a different location and/or name.

Delete the current collection from the collections.

Add the specified collections to the current collection. Each new collection will appear as
a tab in the display area.
Use the buttons in the display area to:

Reorganize the image files within the collection by selecting the image file displayed in
the list and then use the up
and down
buttons to move the file to the desired
location.

Add a new image file to the current collection by clicking on the

Delete the selected image file(s) from the current collection by selecting the image file(s)
displayed in the list and then click on the
button.
button.
Edit the Tool Tip Text by double-clicking in the Tool Tip Text to display for file text box, modify
the text.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 227
Customizing Your Clip Art Collections
Page 228
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 10: Session Plans
Preparing for and conducting an Elluminate Live! session involves a number of tasks such as
creating whiteboard screens and quizzes, gathering multimedia and other files to be presented or
shared, loading whiteboards and multimedia files into the session, preparing an outline of topics,
writing presenter notes and creating a list to remind you to perform specific actions (e.g., start
recording, move to the next screen, create breakout rooms, load and present a quiz, play a
multimedia file, etc.).
Elluminate Plan! is a standalone desktop application that enables you to prepare the content of an
Elluminate Live! session ahead of time and then automate the actions within a session. During the
session, all it takes is the selection of a session plan item to trigger an action in Elluminate Live!
(e.g., start recording, move to the next screen, create breakout rooms, load and present a quiz, play
a multimedia file, etc.). Topic headings and notes are embedded in the session plan to provide
cohesiveness and coherence to the material being presented.
Elluminate Plan! is priced separately from Elluminate Live! To learn more
about Elluminate Plan!, visit http://www.elluminate.com/plan/index.jsp and for
information on purchasing Elluminate Plan!, visit http://www.elluminate.com/
info_form.jsp
Although it possesses most of the functionality of Elluminate Live!, Elluminate Plan! operates
independently of Elluminate Live!, allowing you to create session plans on a computer without an
Internet connection. Once you have created a session plan in Elluminate Plan!, you can load it into
your Elluminate Live! session at class time.
Refer to the Elluminate Plan! User’s Guide for further details on session
plans. You can find the guide on the following Elluminate Training page under
the section on Elluminate Publish! and Plan!:
http://www.elluminate.com/training/
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 229
Page 230
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 11: Application Sharing
When using the Application Sharing feature, you can do the following:

Share application(s) running on your desktop

Share a region or your entire desktop

Have another person control your desktop or application

View and control another person’s desktop or application

Send a snapshot of the shared application to the whiteboard
As the host, when you begin sharing an application and/or region, it (and all its content) will
appear in the Application Sharing window of other session attendees.
Setting the Application Sharing Permission for
Participants
Moderators automatically have the permission to host an Application Sharing session. A
Participant must be given the permission to host an Application Sharing session by a Moderator.
To grant the Application Sharing permission to Participants, click in the Application Sharing
permission column next to the Participants’ names. The
Application Sharing icon will be
displayed next to the Participants’ name, indicating they have the permission.
To remove the permission from Participants, click on the
names.
Application Sharing icon next to their
For further details on setting permissions, please refer to Setting
Permissions on page 51.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 231
Hosting an Application Sharing Session
Hosting an Application Sharing Session
 Hosting an Application Sharing session can be performed in single, quick step or, for
more control, using a multi-step approach.
 For a description of the options you may set prior to actually hosting an Application
Sharing session, refer to Advanced Application Sharing Options on page 253.
When sharing an application, any new windows that open relating to the
application also will be shared.
If you minimize the application you are sharing or cover it with a different
application (one that is not being shared), others in the session will no longer be
able to view the application.
Quick Step for Sharing a Single Application
With this method, you can share one application only. If you use this approach to Application
Sharing, you will not have an opportunity to change the options configured in the Hosting Options
Preferences panel (see Hosting Options on page 254).
The application you wish to share must be open on your desktop.
1. Select Tools > Application Sharing > Share Application and then select the appropriate
application from the list.
If you have two monitors, be sure the shared application is displayed in
your primary monitor – otherwise, it will not be present in the list.
2. The Application Sharing window will appear to other session attendees.
Sharing Your Desktop
To share your entire desktop, select Tools > Application Sharing > Share Entire Desktop.1 The
Application Sharing window will appear to other session attendees.
For information on sharing a region on your desktop, refer to Sharing a Region of Your Desktop on
page 251.
1. If you have more than one monitor, only your primary display (main monitor) can be displayed.
Page 232
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Sharing One or More Applications
Using the Host Applications dialog, you can share a single application or multiple applications at
the same time.
The applications available for sharing are listed in a tree structure under the Applications tab of the
Host Applications dialog. You can see which windows are open1 in each application by expanding
the tree using the disclosure buttons or toggling the Expand All/Collapse All button.
Windows Host Applications dialog:
1. If you have more than one monitor, only those applications in your primary display (main monitor) will be displayed.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 233
Hosting an Application Sharing Session
Mac Host Applications dialog:
1. Launch the Application Sharing feature by doing one of the following:
 Click on the
Share Application button located in the main toolbar.
 Select Tools > Application Sharing > Host Applications…
The Host Applications dialog appears.
2. Click on the Applications tab (if it isn’t already open).
3. From the list, select one or more applications you wish to share. To select more than one
item, hold down Shift or Control ( ා or ໜ on Mac) while clicking with the mouse. The
selected applications will be highlighted.
Double-clicking on the application you wish to share is a short-cut for
selecting the application and clicking on OK.
Expand and collapse items in the tree hierarchy, as required, to view the
windows open in each application.
Page 234
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
4. Select your options:

Select Show in Presentation mode to automatically open up your shared application in
Presentation Mode view. (See Showing Application Sharing Session in Presentation
Mode on page 235.)

(Mac only) Select Exclude menu bar to display the shared application without its
menu bar and associated menus and context (pop-up) menus.

Click on the Options… button to open the Hosting Options preferences panel to set
options. For details, see Hosting Options on page 254.
5. Click OK (or double-click on the application to be shared) to save and dismiss the dialog
box.
The Application Sharing window will appear on the person’s monitor.
If you are sharing more than one application, you (as the host) can move
between them using the Windows Alt+Tab function ( ໜ Tab on Mac).
Showing Application Sharing Session in Presentation Mode
Application Sharing sessions can be displayed in Presentation Mode by selecting the option Show
in Presentation Mode. This shows the shared application or region to others using the entire
Elluminate Live! window.
For full details about Presentation Mode, see Chapter 12, “Presentation
Mode” on page 277.
You are able to see you are sharing your application in Presentation Mode in two ways:

The Present Content button in the main toolbar will incorporate the Application Sharing
icon
.

Two messages will scroll in the status bar (at the bottom of the Elluminate Live! window):
one stating “
Presenting Application Sharing” and another describing what is being
shared (i.e., the application name, a region or the desktop).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 235
Application Sharing Window
By default, a yellow border is displayed to all viewers of an Application
Sharing session while it is being displayed in Presentation Mode. Viewers can
change this default through the Viewing Options preferences panel. (For details,
see Viewing Options on page 258.) The border will disappear if the user opts out
of Presentation Mode.1
Application Sharing Window
The Host’s Window
When you share an application or your desktop on a Mac, Linux or Solaris, by default your main
view will be changed to the Narrow Minimal Layout and the Elluminate Live! window will be
moved as far left as possible. When you share an application or your desktop on Windows, by
default your main view will be changed to the Left Docked Minimal Layout.
To better view the Application Sharing window, Mac users are advised to
move the Elluminate Live! window to the right side of their monitors.
On all platforms, by default your shared application or region will have a yellow border around it,
making it easy to identify on your screen. (For this feature to work, some requirements must be
met. For details, see the Highlight Shared Region option under the Hosting Options section on
page 254) Attached to the border will be a controller (normally at the top2) with buttons for
stopping and pausing/resuming the application share and a button for sending a snapshot of the
application sharing window to the Whiteboard. There is one exception: there will be no controller,
and perhaps not even the border, if there is no room for them on your screen, such as when you are
sharing the entire desktop.
To change the default options, see Hosting Options on page 254.
1. As the host of the Application Sharing session, you may see a yellow border. It won’t be shown
because the application is being shared in Presentation Mode but because the border is an Application Sharing Hosting preferences (see Hosting Options on page 254). The default color is yellow.
2. The controller may move to the bottom, left side or right side if there is no room for it on the top.
Page 236
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Mini-Controller View
If you want more space for your Application Sharing window, control your Application Sharing
session through the Mini-Controller:
 If already in Application Sharing mode, click on the
Show Mini-Controller button in
the main tool bar or select View > Switch to Mini-Controller.
 If not yet in Application Sharing mode, you can configure Elluminate Live! to
automatically switch to the Mini-Controller whenever you share applications. To do so,
select the option Switch to Mini-Controller under Tools > Preferences > Application
Sharing > Hosting Options. Whenever you start hosting an Application Sharing session,
the Main window will minimize and the Mini-Controller toolbar will appear, displaying
the Application Sharing buttons.
Hosting Options are also accessible through the Host Applications dialog
by clicking on the Options button.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 237
Application Sharing Window
The Application Sharing buttons will appear in the Mini-Controller.
For information on using the Mini-Controller for sharing applications, refer
to the relevant sections below. For general information about the Mini-Controller,
refer to The Mini-Controller on page 43.
Return to Main Window View
To switch back to the main window view, click on the Restore Main Window
Mini-Controller.
button in the
The Viewer’s Window
When someone else is hosting an Application Sharing session, an Application Sharing window
will appear in the content area of your Elluminate Live! window. When you move your mouse
below the Application Sharing title bar, a translucent Application Sharing tool bar appears.
The bar has two buttons. The first button toggles between enabling and disabling the Scale to Fit
feature:

If the button looks like
, scale to fit is disabled; click on it to enable.

If the button looks like
, scale to fit is enabled; click on it to disable.
The second button is used to request remote control of the shared applications.

If the button looks like
, you may request remote control of the shared applications.

If the button looks like
applications.
, you are not permitted to request control of the shared
The Application Sharing tool bar is not available when you are remotely
controlling another user’s application.
Page 238
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
When you are hosting an Application Sharing session, and windows of nonshared applications overlap your Application Sharing window, the viewers of
your shared application will see a black box in front of their Application Sharing
window – the content of both windows is “redacted” in the overlapped area. When
you select Raise shared application to front, changes to viewers’ Application
Sharing windows may occur to eliminate the overlap and associated redaction:
viewers’ windows may be automatically re-sized or the scaling or scroll bars
changed (this may take several seconds).
Scale to Fit
The Application Sharing window can be resized and repositioned (and also moved to a second
monitor) to better view the content. However, if scroll bars are still required to view the contents of
the Application Sharing window, because the application that is being shared is still larger than the
Application Sharing window, use Scale to Fit. Either
 click on the Scale to Fit button in the Application Sharing tool bar, or
 select Tools > Application Sharing > Scale to fit.
The application being shared will fit in the window. The percentage that the application is scaled
from the original image will be indicated at the top of the Application Sharing window.
If the text is too difficult to read because the application has been scaled
down too much, de-select this option.
Emphasized Cursor
If the application host has turned on the option Emphasize Cursor, you will see their cursor
surrounded with a circle (the default color is yellow), making it easier for you to follow.
Bringing the Window into Focus
If the Application Sharing window is hidden behind another window, you can bring it to the front
(into focus) by selecting Window > Application Sharing.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 239
Pausing Application Sharing
Pausing Application Sharing
To pause Application Sharing, do one of the following:
 Application Sharing controller
Click on the
button.
 Main window tool bar
Click on the
button.
 Mini-Controller
Click on the
button.
 Tools menu
Select Tools > Application Sharing > Pause Application Sharing
The session attendees will see a still-shot of what you are sharing in the Application Sharing
window.
When the Application Sharing session is paused, Hosting Options are suspended. For example, if
you are in the Default Layout (before you start sharing an application) and select the Hosting
Option Switch to Mini-Controller, when you started sharing an application you will be switched to
the Mini-Controller. When you pause your Application Sharing session (including when you send
a snapshot to the Whiteboard), you will be placed in the view you were in before you started
sharing the application – in this case, the Default Layout. Once you resume your Application
Sharing session, you will be switched back to the Mini-Controller (Hosting Options resume).
(Obviously, if you do not set a Hosting Option to switch your view when you begin Application
Sharing, there will be no change in your view when you pause and resume Application Sharing.)
Also, if you chose to display a border around the Application Sharing window, it will disappear
when Application Sharing session is paused and be restored when Application Sharing resumes.
Resuming Application Sharing
To resume Application Sharing, do one of the following:
 Application Sharing controller
 Click on the
button.
 Main window tool bar
Click on the
button.
 Mini-Controller
Click on the
button.
 Tools menu
Deselect Tools > Application Sharing > Pause Application Sharing.
Page 240
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Any changes that were made in the application or region when the Application Sharing session
was paused will immediately be sent to the session attendees.
Show Preview Window
The Show Preview Window feature allows you to view what the session attendees are seeing in the
Application Sharing window when you are hosting the Application Sharing session. A thumbnail
view of the hosted Application Sharing session is displayed in the Application Sharing Preview
window in the Main room and an extended panel when accessed from the Mini-Controller.
To open the Application Sharing Preview window, do one of the following
 Main window tool bar
Click on the
button.
 Mini-Controller
Click on the
button
 Tools menu
Select Tools > Application Sharing > Show Preview Window.
The preview window will look something like the following:
To dismiss the Application Sharing Preview window, do one of the following:
 Click on the Close button in the Application Sharing Preview window.
 Main window tool bar
Click on the
Doc Revision 1.0
button.
Page 241
Send Snapshot to Whiteboard
 Mini-Controller
Click on the
button.
 Tools menu
Select Tools > Application Sharing > Hide Preview Window.
Preview in Mini-Controller
When you click on the
button in the Mini-Controller to preview your Application Sharing
session, an extended panel will open above the Mini-Controller.
This button and the preview area also have a contextual right-click menu (^Click on Mac) to select
a normal size or double size thumbnail view, and to give or take away remote control permission.
Send Snapshot to Whiteboard
The Send Snapshot to Whiteboard feature allows you to take a snapshot of the contents of the
Application Sharing window and place the snapshot on the Whiteboard.
To use this feature, you must be a Moderator and must be hosting the
Application Sharing session.
The snapshot will be placed as the background image of a new whiteboard slide, immediately after
the current Whiteboard screen and the Application Sharing session will be paused. The snapshot of
the Application Sharing session will be loaded into the Whiteboard. The title of the Whiteboard
screen will be Application Sharing Image x, where x is an incremental number.
Page 242
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
When the Application Sharing session is paused, Hosting Options are suspended. For details, see
Pausing Application Sharing on page 240.
1. To send a snapshot to the Whiteboard, do one of the following:
 Application Sharing controller
 Click on the
button.
 Main window tool bar
Click on the
button.
 Mini-Controller
Click on the
button.
 Tools menu
Select Tools > Application Sharing > Send Snapshot to Whiteboard.
 Hot Keys
Ctrl+Print Screen (^F13 on Mac). (Substitute your own hot key here if you modified
the default hot key definition.)
The Application Sharing session will be paused.
2. Resume Application Sharing. (For instructions, refer to Pausing Application Sharing on
page 240.) Once you resume the session, if you had a layout change specified in the
hosting options, you will be returned to whatever layout you were in before you took the
snapshot.
Send Snapshot with Delay to Whiteboard
Send Snapshot with Delay to Whiteboard is the same as snapshot to Whiteboard, except there is a
10 second delay before the snapshot is taken and placed on the Whiteboard.
1. To send a snapshot to the Whiteboard with a delay, do one of the following
 Tools menu
Select Tools > Application Sharing > Send Snapshot with Delay to Whiteboard.
 Mini-Controller
Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the
Snapshot with 10 sec delay.
button to open the context menu and select
The Application Sharing session will be paused and the snapshot to the Whiteboard will
take 10 seconds before it will be placed on the Whiteboard screen.
2. Resume Application Sharing. (For instructions, refer to Resuming Application Sharing on
page 240.) Once you resume the session, you will be returned to whatever layout you were
in before you took the snapshot.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 243
Stop the Application Sharing Session
Stop the Application Sharing Session
To stop Application Sharing, do one of the following
 Application Sharing controller
Click on the
button.
 Main window tool bar
Click on the
button.
 Mini-Controller
Click on the
button.
 Tools menu
Select Tools > Application Sharing > Host Applications (de-select this option).
 Hot Keys
Enter Ctrl+Pause (^End). (Substitute your own hot key here if you modified the default hot
key definition.)
The Application Sharing session will terminate and you will be returned to your default Main
window view.
Control of Your Shared Applications
When you grant someone permission to remotely control your shared application, you retain the
ability to control the shared application as well – control is shared.
When hosting an Application Sharing session, you have the ability to

give control of your desktop or shared application to another Participant or Moderator; and

take away control of the shared applications.
The Participant must have Host Application Sharing permissions.
Give Control
By giving control of your Application Sharing session to another session attendee, that person will
then be able to manipulate what you are sharing in the Application Sharing window.
1. Start hosting an Application Sharing session on your desktop.
2. Select the person in the Participants List to whom you wish to give control.
Page 244
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
3. Do one of the following:
 Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the person’s name and select Give Control of Shared
Applications from the context menu.
 Select Tools > Application Sharing > Give Control of Shared Applications.
4. The Give Control notification window appears. Click OK to confirm the operation and
close the window.
The Participants List is updated to indicate who is controlling the application(s). A red arrow will
appear in the Application Sharing column indicating the person who is now in control of your
application.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 245
Request Control of Someone Else's Desktop
Take Away Control
You can regain control of your shared applications performing one of the following methods:
 Main window tool bar
Click on the
button.
 Mini-Controller
Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the
button to bring up the context menu and select
Take Away Control of Shared Applications.
 Tools menu
Select Tools > Application Sharing > Take Away Control of Shared Applications.
 Participants List
Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the name of the person who has control of your
Application Sharing session. From the context menu select Take Away Control of Shared
Applications.
 Hot Key
Ctrl+Space (^Space on Mac). (Substitute your own hot key here if you modified the
default hot key definition.)
Request Control of Someone Else's Desktop
You can request control of a person’s desktop at any time during a session. Both the person
requesting control and the person receiving the request must have Application Sharing
permissions.
When you receive permission to remotely control someone else’s desktop, that person retains the
ability to control their desktop as well – control is shared.
If a different user already has control of the desktop you want to control, or
the desktop owner is already sharing their own desktop, you will not be able to
request control (Request Desktop Control will be disabled).
To request control of a person’s desktop, do the following:
1. Select the person in the Participants List from whom you wish to request desktop control.
2. Do one of the following:
 Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the person’s name and select Request Desktop
Control from the context menu.
 Select Tools > Application Sharing > Request Desktop Control.
Page 246
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
3. Depending on how the person is configured and how they wish to allow others to control
their desktop, one of the following will occur:

If they set their Remote Control preference to Allow without asking, you will
automatically gain control of their desktop.

If they set their Remote Control preference to Require password, the Enter Password
dialog box will appear and you will have to enter the correct password before you can
take control of their desktop.

If they set their Remote Control preference to Ask me for permission, then they will
have to acknowledge your request before you will be granted control of their desktop.
For further details on these preferences, see Permit Remote Control of Your
Desktop on page 259.
If you have the default Viewing Option preferences set, you will know you are remotely
controlling another’s desktop by the presence of a magenta border around the Application Sharing
window. This border is displayed to you (the remote controller) only. (For details on turning off
or changing the color of the border, see Viewing Options on page 258.)
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 247
Request Control of Someone Else's Desktop
Return Control Back to the Desktop Owner
There are five ways to release control of a person’s desktop and return control back to them:
 Main window toolbar
Click the
button.
 Mini-Controller
Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the
button to bring up the context menu and select
Release Control of Shared Applications.
 Tools menu
Select Tools > Application Sharing > Release Control of Shared Applications.
 Participants List
Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the name of the person whose desktop you are controlling.
From the context menu select Release Control of Shared Applications.
 Hot Key
Ctrl+Space (^Space on Mac). (Substitute your own hot key here if you modified the
default hot key definition.)
Control of the Application Sharing session will be returned to the person hosting the session.
Request Control of Shared Applications
To request control of a person’s Application Sharing session, do the following:
1. Select the person in the Participants List from whom you wish to request control.
2. Do one of the following:
 Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the person’s name and select Request Control of
Shared Applications from the context menu.
 Select Tools > Application Sharing > Request Control of Shared Applications.
3. You will now have control of the person’s Application Sharing session.
Page 248
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
If you have the default Viewing Option preferences set, you will know you are remotely
controlling another’s application by the presence of a magenta border around the Application
Sharing window. This border is displayed to you (the remote controller) only. (For details on
turning off or changing the color of the border, see Viewing Options on page 258.)
Send Simulated Keystrokes
When you are remotely controlling another person’s Application Sharing session, the
appears in the Main window toolbar.
button
To send a simulated keystroke, do the following:
1. Click on the
button. Or alternatively Select Tools > Application
Sharing > Send Keys. A sub-menu appears with the list of defined
simulated keystrokes.
2. Select the appropriate simulated keystroke in the list, or select Other
which calls up the Define Keystroke dialog box where you can define
an on-the-fly simulated keystroke.
3. The simulated keystroke will be sent to the host machine and interpreted appropriately.
For example, sending Ctrl+Escape to a Windows platform will result in the Start menu
popping up. The host machine will accept these keystrokes as long as they are not in the
Filtered Keystrokes list.
The list of simulated keystrokes available can be changed by defining
simulated keys under Preferences. To add or modify a simulated key, refer to
Simulated Keystrokes on page 264.
Terminate Remote Desktop Sharing
Both the owner of the desktop being shared (host) and the user remotely controlling the desktop
can terminate the remote control of a desktop.
A Moderator can terminate any Application Sharing in the session.1
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 249
Request Control of Someone Else's Desktop
Desktop Controller
If you are controlling another’s desktop, you can terminate remote desktop sharing by doing one of
the following:
 Main window toolbar
Click the
button.
 Mini-Controller
Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the
button to bring up the context menu and select
Release Control of Shared Applications.
 Tools menu
Select Tools > Application Sharing > Release Control of Shared Applications.
 In the Participants List, select the name of the person whose desktop you are controlling,
right-click (^Click on Mac) and select Release Control of Shared Applications from the
context menu.
 Hot Key
Ctrl+Space (^Space on Mac). (Substitute your own hot key here if you modified the
default hot key definition.)
Desktop Owner (Host)
If your desktop is being controlled by another, you can terminate their control by doing do one of
the following:
 Main window toolbar
Click the
button.
 Mini-Controller
Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the
button to bring up the context menu and select
Take Away Control of Shared Applications.
1. If it is in a breakout room, the Moderator must first move to that room.
Page 250
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
 Tools menu
Select Tools > Application Sharing > Take Away Control of Shared Applications.
 Participants List
Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the name of the person whose desktop you are controlling.
From the context menu select Take Away Control of Shared Applications.
 Hot Key
Ctrl+Space (^Space on Mac). (Substitute your own hot key here if you modified the
default hot key definition.)
Sharing a Region of Your Desktop
The Host Applications dialog is used to define a region of your desktop1 when you host an
Application Sharing session. If you will be sharing a region of your desktop, you must redefine the
region every time you host an Application Sharing session.
To share a region, follow the steps below:
1. Open the Host Applications dialog by doing one of the following:
 Click on the
Share Application button in the main toolbar.
 Select Tools > Application Sharing >Host Applications.
The Host Applications dialog appears.
1. If you have more than one monitor, a region only on your primary display (main monitor) can be
displayed.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 251
Sharing a Region of Your Desktop
2. Select the Region tab, if it is not already selected.
The Host Applications dialog shows a graphical representation of your desktop’s window
layout.
3. Use one of the following methods to define the region on your desktop you wish to share:
 To share a specific window — Click on the window displayed in the display area
under the Region tab and then click OK to begin Application Sharing. The dialog box
will close and the region will be shared.
 To define a specific region — Click the area where you want to start Application
Sharing and drag the cursor to create a rectangular outline of the selected area. The
selected region will be highlighted in white. Click OK to begin Application Sharing.
If you have difficulty seeing the region that you are selecting, use the Magnifier
option (small or large magnifier) to zoom in on the area you wish to share. You also
can define the area you wish to share by entering the position and size in the text
boxes provided.
 To share your entire desktop — Check Share entire desktop. Click OK to begin
Application Sharing.
4. Click on OK (or double-click the shared region) to save the settings or Cancel to close the
dialog without saving.
Page 252
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
By default, the region you are sharing will be surrounded by a yellow border (with controller) so
you can easily keep track of what you are sharing.1 To change the default, see Hosting Options on
page 254.)
Advanced Application Sharing Options
Prior to hosting an Application Sharing session, you can define the following options through the
Preferences dialog box:

Filtered Keys

Hosting Options (to set the appearance of the Application Sharing window when you are
hosting an Application Sharing session)

Viewing Options (to set the appearance of the Application Sharing window when you are
viewing an Application Sharing session)

Remote Control

Simulated Keys
Mac users also can set the option to use Open GL. See Use OpenGL Option
(Mac only) on page 267.
1. For this feature to work, some requirements must be met. For details, see the Highlight Shared
Region option under the Hosting Options on page 254.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 253
Advanced Application Sharing Options
Hosting Options
The Hosting Options dialog box allows you to define how to display the Elluminate Live!
Application Sharing window while you are hosting an Application Sharing session.
The default settings are based on the client you are using. For Windows, the settings are as
follows:

Remain in main window set to “on”

Change layout to set to
-
“Left Docked Minimal Layout” (Windows)
-
“Narrow Minimal Layout” (Mac, Linux and Solaris)
Because non-Windows platforms do not support the docked layouts, the
default window layout hosting options are Remain in Main Window, change
layout to Narrow Minimal Layout and move main window to Top Left.

Raise shared applications to front set to “on”

Highlight shared region set to “on” with “yellow” selected in the color selector

Emphasize cursor set to “off”

Show a notification set to “on”

Image Quality set to “Normal”
Change the Hosting Options in the Preferences dialog.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
 From the Host Applications dialog (Tools > Application Sharing > Host
Applications), click on the Options button (all platforms)
Page 254
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Application Sharing > Hosting Options.
The Hosting Options preferences panel appears.
3. Set your preferences for how the Elluminate Live! application window will be displayed
when hosting begins:

Switch to Mini-Controller – Select this option if, when you start hosting an
Application Sharing session, you want the Elluminate Live! application window (main
window) to be minimized and the Mini-Controller to appear. (See Mini-Controller
View on page 237.)

Remain in main window – Select this option if, when you start hosting an Application
Sharing session, you want the Elluminate Live! application window (main window) to
remain visible.

Change layout to – If you chose to remain in the main window (see above) and want
the main window to be in a layout other than the default (Left Docked Minimal
Layout), select this option (and the desired layout from the option list) to specify the
layout of the Elluminate Live! application window during Application Sharing. If you
don’t select this option, you will stay in the same layout your were in before you
started Application Sharing.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 255
Advanced Application Sharing Options
Switching to a Docked layout (Windows only) may change
the location or size of other windows on your screen and the
position of desktop icons. This may be a concern if you are
sharing a “region” of your desktop. If you want to use the Docked
layout and shared region features at the same time, manually
place Elluminate Live! into Docked mode before you select a
region to share.

Move main window – If you have the option Remain in main window selected (and the
window layout is not a docked layout), select this option if you want to define the
position where the Elluminate Live! application window (main window) will appear
on your monitor. You can select
-
an option from the To option menu,
-
To previous location (last known position when previously application shared), or
-
To alternate display (if you have another monitor, when you start Application
Sharing, this will move the Elluminate Live! window to that monitor).
4. Set other options as required:

Raise shared application to front – Select this option if you want the application that
is being shared to be brought to the front of all other windows. If the option is not
selected, the application may be hidden behind other windows on your monitor and
the Application Sharing window will be black.
This option does not work on Linux using KDE or
Gnome and on Solaris using Gnome.

Page 256
Highlight shared region – Select this option if you would like your shared application
or region to be surrounded by a border. The border identifies what is being shared so
you will always know what the viewers of your application share are seeing. Included
with the border will be a controller containing buttons to stop or pause/resume
application sharing and a button to send a snapshot to the Whiteboard.
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
The default color is yellow. To change the default, click on the yellow square to open
a color selector dialog and select another color.
For Windows, Linux1 and Solaris,2 the border/controller
feature is present based on certain settings on your operating
system. Windows users must be running Java 1.6.0_12 or higher.
Linux and Solaris users must have 1) a configuration compatible
with Sun’s requirements, 2) their X11 display server must be
configured to support shaped windows and per-pixel translucency
and 3) they must be running Java 1.6.0_12 or higher. Java can be
installed from http://www.java.com. The additional settings for
Linux and Solaris entail configuration of the X11 display server
and, therefore, are beyond the scope of Elluminate’s technical
support.

Emphasize cursor – Select this option if you would like the cursor in your shared
application to stand out so it is easier for viewers of the shared application to follow
its movements. If set, the viewer’s cursor will be surrounded by a colored circle. (As
host, your view of the cursor is not emphasized.)
The default color is yellow. To change the default, click on the yellow square to open
a color selector dialog and select another color.

Show a notification – Select this option if you want a Notification window to appear
on your monitor every time you start hosting an Application Sharing session. If you
wish not to have this window appear, de-select this option.

Image Quality – Set the image optimization speed you wish to use when transmitting
data to the server. In most cases, the default setting of Normal is adequate. The Image
Quality should be set to Best Quality or Better Quality only if artifacts are seen and set
to Higher Speed or Highest Speed when the bandwidth is at a premium and the
Application Sharing session will be image-heavy.
5. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you configure the Hosting Options settings, Elluminate Live! will remember these settings
each time you host an Application Sharing session.
1. Except for 64-bit Linux, for which this feature is disabled.
2. This feature is available with all supported versions of Java on the Mac. Apple distributes all Mac
Java versions; you can download new versions using Software Update or directly from Apple’s web
site (http://www.apple.com/support).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 257
Advanced Application Sharing Options
You can restore the Hosting Options settings to the default. For details on
restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on page 8.
Viewing Options
The Viewing Options dialog box allows you to define how to display the Elluminate Live!
Application Sharing window while you are viewing an Application Sharing session.
The default settings are as follows:

Highlight when presented set to “on” with “yellow” selected in the color selector

Highlight when controlling set to “on” with “magenta” selected in the color selector
Change the Viewing Options in the Preferences dialog.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
 From the Host Applications dialog (Tools > Application Sharing > Host
Applications), click on the Options button (all platforms)
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Application Sharing > Viewing Options.
The Viewing Options preferences panel appears.
3. Set your preferences for how the Application Sharing window will be displayed when you
are viewing an Application Sharing session:

Highlight when presented – Select this option if you want to display a border around
the Application Sharing viewing window when the shared application or desktop is
being shown in Presentation Mode.
The default color is yellow. To change the default, click on the yellow square to open
a color selector dialog and select another color.
Page 258
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0

Highlight when controlling – Select this option if you want to display a border around
the Application Sharing viewing window when you are controlling someone else’s
shared application or desktop.
The default color is magenta. To change the default, click on the magenta square to
open a color selector dialog and select another color.
4. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you configure the Viewing Options settings, Elluminate Live! will remember these settings
each time you view an Application Sharing session.
You can restore the Viewing Options settings to the default. For details on
restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on page 8.
Permit Remote Control of Your Desktop
You can grant permission to anyone with Application Sharing permissions to take control of your
desktop at anytime during the session. There are three choices for granting permission to others to
control your desktop: Ask me for permission, Require password and Allow without asking.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
 From the Host Applications dialog (Tools > Application Sharing > Host
Applications), click on the Options button (all platforms)
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 259
Advanced Application Sharing Options
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Application Sharing > Remote Control.
The Remote Control preferences panel appears.
3. Select the desired Remote Control option: Ask me for permission, Require password or
Allow without asking. See the sub-sections below for a discussion of these options.
4. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you configure the Remote Control setting, Elluminate Live! will remember this setting each
time you host an Application Sharing session.
You can restore the Application Sharing Remote Control setting to the
default. For details on restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default
Settings on page 8.
Ask me for permission
If you want other users to request permission from you to remotely control your desktop, set the
Remote Control option to Ask me for permission. Any time a user with Application Sharing
permissions requests control of your desktop, the Remote Control Requested dialog box will
appear on your monitor.
Select the option Allow all other requests until I quit, and leave the password field blank, if you
want to allow other users to be able to control your desktop without asking permission. (This is
equivalent to the Allow without asking option.)
Page 260
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
1. Select the option Allow all other requests
until I quit, and enter a password, if you
want to allow other users to be able to
control your desktop only if they enter a
password. (This is equivalent to the
Require password option.)
2. Click on Yes to grant the user permission
to remotely control your desktop.
3. If you click on No (or the window expires
before you acknowledge the message),
permission to remotely control your desktop
will be denied. A message, indicating that the
request was denied, will appear to the user
requesting access.
Require password
If you want to require other users to enter a password prior to being able to remotely control your
desktop, set the Remote Control option to Require password. Only those who enter the correct
password will have access to your desktop.
1. Any time a user with Application Sharing
permissions requests control of your desktop,
the Password Required dialog box appears on
their monitor.
2. They must enter the correct password and click
on OK before your desktop will appear in their
Application Sharing window. You do not have
to acknowledge the request.
Allow without asking
If you want anyone with Application Sharing permissions to be able to control of your desktop
without asking, set the Remote Control option to Allow without asking.
This option lets anyone in the session take control of your computer
remotely.
At anytime during the session, when anyone with Application Sharing permissions requests
control of your desktop, your desktop will automatically appear in their Application Sharing
window. You do not have to acknowledge the request.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 261
Advanced Application Sharing Options
Filtered Keys
When hosting an Application Sharing session, the keystrokes defined in the Filtered Keys list will
be ignored if sent by someone remotely controlling your application.
The default set of filtered keystrokes is defined on a per-platform basis.
Within the Filtered Keys panel of the Preferences dialog, you can add new keystrokes, modify the
existing keystrokes or remove the keystrokes from the list.
Change the Filtered Keys in the Preferences dialog.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
 From the Host Applications dialog (Tools > Application Sharing > Host
Applications), click on the Options button (all platforms)
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Application Sharing > Filtered Keys. The
Filtered Keys preferences panel appears.
3. Add, modify or remove keystrokes. (See subsections below.)
Page 262
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
4. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you configure Filtered Keys settings, Elluminate Live! will remember these settings each
time you join another session.
You can restore the Application Sharing Filtered Keys settings to the
default. For details on restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default
Settings on page 8.
Adding Filtered Keys
1. In the In the Filtered Keys dialog, click on the Add button. The Configure Filtered
Keystroke dialog box opens.
2. Enter new keystrokes in one of two ways:
 Click on the down arrow to select a key from
the key option list, and then select the
desired modifier keys by clicking on their
check boxes. For example, the keystroke to
the right is Ctrl+Alt+Delete.
 Select the text box and enter the keystrokes.
This will automatically select the modifier
keys you used in your keystrokes.
There are certain keys that cannot be entered as keystrokes (such as Tab,
which will cause your focus to move to the next field) and must be selected from
the menu.
Modifying a Keystroke
1. In the Filtered Keys dialog, select the keystroke you wish to modify.
2. Click on the Modify button. The Configure Filtered Keystroke dialog box opens.
3. Make your modifications. (For instructions, see Adding Filtered Keys on page 263.)
Removing a Keystroke
1. In the Filtered Keys dialog, select the keystroke you wish to remove.
2. Click on the Remove button. The keystroke will be removed from the list.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 263
Advanced Application Sharing Options
Simulated Keystrokes
Simulated keystrokes can be sent to a host system when remote controlling an Application Sharing
session from a computer running a different operating system than the host system. For example,
you may want to remotely control a Mac from your Windows system. Since Windows does not
have a ໜ key, you can simulate Mac accelerator keys such as ໜ C by defining them using the
Simulated Keys feature of Elluminate Live!
Within the Simulated Keys panel of the Preferences dialog, you can add new keystrokes, modify
the existing keystrokes or remove the keystrokes from the list.
The default set of simulated keystrokes that may be sent is defined on a perplatform basis.
Change the Simulated Keys in the Preferences dialog.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
 From the Host Applications dialog (Tools > Application Sharing > Host
Applications), click on the Options button (all platforms)
Page 264
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Application Sharing > Simulated Keys.
The Simulated Keys preferences panel appears.
3. Add, modify or remove keystrokes. (See subsections below.)
4. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you configure Simulated Keys settings, Elluminate Live! will remember these settings each
time you remotely control an Application Sharing session.
You can restore the Application Sharing Simulated Keys settings to the
default. For details on restoring default preferences, see Restoring Default
Settings on page 8.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 265
Advanced Application Sharing Options
Adding Simulated Keys
1. In the Simulated Keys dialog, click on the Add button. The Configure Keystroke dialog
box opens.
2. Enter new keystrokes in one of two ways:
 Click on the down arrow to select a key
from the key option list, and then select
the desired modifier keys by clicking
on their check boxes. For example, the
keystroke to the right is Shift+Alt+Tab.
 Select the text box and enter the
keystrokes. This will automatically
select the modifier keys you used in
your keystrokes.
3. Enter a trigger keystroke (optional).
Sending the triggered keystroke in the
Application Sharing window will not send
the typed triggered keystroke, but the
associated simulated keystroke.
4. You may further define the keystroke to be applicable only on a specified host client. The
choices here are Windows, Mac OS and Linux/Solaris.
5. Click on OK.
Example Definition
Since you cannot type the Command ໜ key from a Windows system, you could define a simulated
keystroke as follows:

Keystroke to send: Meta+X (On Windows, the Meta key is labelled “Windows”.)

Trigger on: Ctrl+X

Only when host is: Mac
This will then automatically translate the Windows Ctrl+X (cut command) gesture to the
appropriate Mac gesture and only do it when remote controlling an application on a Mac.
Modifying Simulated Keys
1. In the Simulated Keys dialog, select the keystroke you wish to modify.
2. Click on the Modify button. The Configure Keystroke dialog box opens.
3. Make your modifications. (For instructions, see Adding Simulated Keys on page 266.)
Page 266
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Removing Simulated Keys
1. In the Simulated Keys dialog, select the keystroke you wish to remove.
2. Click on the Remove button. The keystroke will be removed from the list.
Use OpenGL Option (Mac only)
OpenGL is a 3D imaging system used by many Mac programs (e.g., Keynote) for performing 3D
graphics effects directly on the video card (i.e., not rendered by the system CPU). OpenGL is the
preferred screen capture mechanism on a Mac as it will capture screen images from virtually all
applications correctly.
To get the best results in Application Sharing, select the Use OpenGL option (Tools > Application
Sharing > Use OpenGL).
Activity Lights and Indicators
You can monitor the state of Application Sharing transmissions through various lights and
indicators displayed in the Application Sharing permission column of the Participants List.
Activity Indicators
The table below lists the icons that are used in the Participant List to indicate what a session
attendee is doing while using Application Sharing.
Activity
Indicator
Description
The Application Sharing icon indicates that this person has Host Application
Sharing permission – but is currently not hosting.
The Application Sharing icon plus the yellow halo and the red arrow indicates
that this person is hosting the Application Sharing session and has control of
their own desktop or shared application.
A yellow halo behind the host Application Sharing icon indicates that this person
is currently hosting the Application Sharing session, but does not currently have
primary control of their own desktop or shared application. (When you grant
someone permission to remotely control your shared application or desktop, you
retain the ability to control the shared application or desktop as well – control is
shared.)
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 267
Activity Lights and Indicators
Activity
Indicator
Description
The Application Sharing icon plus the red arrow indicates that this person with
the Host Application Sharing permission as been given control of another’s
desktop or shared application.
The red arrow indicates that this person without the Host Application Sharing
permission has been given control of another’s desktop or shared application.
None
This person does not have permission to host an Application Sharing session or
request control of another person’s shared application or desktop. This person
also has not been given control of another’s desktop or shared application.
Status Indicators
Status indicators appear on Application Sharing icons of Application Sharing users in the
Application Sharing permission column (in the Participants List) if there are delays in the
transmission or receipt of Application Sharing.
Only the person currently hosting an Application Sharing session can see
status indicators.
If you are sharing the application (hosting), you will see an amber or amber-and-red indicator light
on the viewer’s Application Sharing icon if they are falling behind in receiving the shared content.
You will see an amber or amber-and-red indicator light on your own Application Sharing icon, if
you are falling behind in sending the shared content to the server.
An amber-and-red indictor signifies a greater delay than an amber indicator
alone.
Page 268
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
In the example below,

the Moderator Vivian is hosting the Application Sharing session and is experiencing
delays in sending the shared content to the server, and

Charlie, Lucy and Ricky are experiencing delays in receiving the shared content, with
Charlie lagging the furthest behind.
Hosting Application Sharing Sessions on Windows Vista
and Windows 7
Microsoft’s Window’s Vista and Windows 7 operating systems provide security through the User
Account Control (UAC) feature. With User Account Control, users logged on as administrators
can run most applications and processes with normal privileges but must obtain elevated Vista/
Windows 7 privileges for administrative tasks requiring higher security. When administrators
encounter tasks that require elevated Vista/Windows 7 privileges, such as attempting to run
Device Manager, UAC presents them with a secure desktop dialog (such as one of the two shown
below), prompting them for permission (to Continue or Allow).
Which dialog will be presented depends on whether or not the requested application is
properly signed (and thus recognized by Vista/Windows 7).
Typically, when users logged on in standard
user mode attempt to perform tasks requiring
elevated Vista/Windows 7 privileges, UAC
presents them with a secure desktop dialog,
prompting them for administrator credentials: password and possibly user name (see
JoeAdministrator login below).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 269
Hosting Application Sharing Sessions on Windows Vista and Windows 7
There are a few exceptions in which standard
users will be denied their attempt to perform tasks
requiring elevated Vista/Windows 7 privileges,
such as when attempting to run Device Manager.
User Account Control and Application Sharing
When UAC is enabled on Vista/Windows 7, Application Sharing in Elluminate Live! may be
hosted with or without elevated Application Sharing privileges.
Modifying the default system settings may prevent you from being able to
request elevated Application Sharing privileges (the Request Elevated Privileges
option will be unavailable). Contact your system administrator for assistance.
If you do not have elevated privileges, anything that brings up a UAC dialog on Vista/Windows 7
will cause Application Sharing to terminate.1
User
Elevated Application
Sharing privileges on?
Result of requesting to do an operation requiring elevated
Vista/Windows 7 privileges within an Application Sharing
session
Admin
Yes
automatically granted
Admin
No
UAC dialog presented and application sharing
terminated
Standard
Yes
automatically denied
Standard
No
UAC dialog presented and application sharing
terminated
1. A UAC dialog causes a switch to a secure desktop, which is what ultimately causes the termination of Application Sharing.
Page 270
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
To prevent Vista/Windows 7 from posting any UAC dialogs (and, thus, prevent termination of
Application Sharing), you need to request elevated Application Sharing privileges. Then, in
situations where Vista/Windows 7 would ordinarily post a UAC dialog, instead it will
automatically grant or deny consent, depending on whether the user is an administrator or a
standard user (respectively).1
Elevated Application Sharing privileges affect the hosting user only – not
viewers of the Application Sharing session. Also, these privileges have no effect
on operations performed by the host outside of the Application Sharing session.
For example, when administrators attempt to change Date and Time settings within an
Application Sharing session with elevated privileges, the Date and Time dialog will open and
Application Sharing will continue – administrators will not be prompted to provide consent. When
standard users attempt to change Date and Time settings within an Application Sharing session
with elevated privileges, they will get a message stating that they are not able to continue and,
therefore, will not be able to change the Date and Time settings; however, their Application
Sharing session will continue. When either user (administrator or standard user) attempts to
change Date and Time settings within an Application Sharing session without elevated privileges,
a UAC dialog will be posted and Application Sharing will be terminated.
All users (including standard, non-administrators) need administrator
credentials to acquire elevated Application Sharing privileges. Those who don’t
have these administrator credentials will have to run Application Sharing without
elevated privileges.
Requesting Elevated Privileges
When you first join an Elluminate Live! session, you can see that you don’t have elevated
privileges by the appearance of an amber triangle in the Application Sharing button on the
toolbar:
To request elevated privileges, do the following:
If you are logged on to Vista/Windows 7 as a standard user, you will need
an administrator password (and possibly user name) in order to request elevated
privileges. Please obtain this information from your system administrator.
1. This automatic allowance for administrators and automatic denial for standard users mimics what
happens on XP when it is asked to do something that requires administrator privileges.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 271
Hosting Application Sharing Sessions on Windows Vista and Windows 7
1. Select Tools > Application Sharing > Request Elevated Privileges.
If you do not see the Request Elevated Privileges option, contact your
system administrator for assistance to modify your system settings.
2. Respond to the UAC dialog presented to you:

Page 272
If you are logged on to Vista/Windows 7 as a standard user, enter an administrator
password (and possibly user name) for your computer.
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0

If you are logged on to Vista/Windows 7 as an administrator, click on Allow.
The disappearance of the amber bar in the Application Sharing button on the toolbar indicates
you now have elevated Application Sharing privileges. The button now displays the same icon
used by non-Vista/Windows 7 implementations of Elluminate Live!:
Your elevated privileges last for the duration of the session. If you leave a
session and re-enter it, you will retain your privileges. If you join a different
session, you will need to request elevated privileges again.
To relinquish elevated privileges, select Tools > Application Sharing >
Yield Elevated Privileges (returning you to standard privileges).
Because of the demands placed on your computer’s CPU, if you are using
an old, slow computer, you can improve the performance of Application Sharing
on Vista/Windows 7 if you run with elevated privileges – even if the application
being shared does not require them. (This is not necessary for sharing your
desktop.)
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 273
Hosting Application Sharing Sessions on Windows Vista and Windows 7
Example Scenarios
Sharing Secure Applications with Elevated Privileges
To illustrate Application Sharing with elevated privileges, let’s look at both a standard user and an
administrator trying to change the Date and Time settings.
1. Request and obtain elevated privileges (as described above).
2. Share your entire desktop (Tools > Application Sharing > Share Entire Desktop).
3. Select Date and Time from the Control Panel.
4. Click on the button Change date and time….

If you are logged on to Vista/Windows 7 as a standard user, you will receive the
following error message, indicating you are not able to continue.

If you are logged on to Vista/Windows 7 as an administrator, the Date and Time
Settings dialog will open and you will be able to change the Date and Time settings.
Sharing Secure Applications without Elevated Privileges
To illustrate Application Sharing without elevated privileges, again we’ll look at both a standard
user and an administrator trying to change the Date and Time.
1. Share your entire desktop (Tools > Application Sharing > Share Entire Desktop).
2. Select Date and Time from the Control Panel.
3. Click on the button Change date and time….

If you are logged on to Vista/Windows 7 as a standard user, you will receive the
“Unable to continue” error message and Application Sharing will terminate.

If you are logged on to Vista/Windows 7 as an administrator, you will be prompted to
Continue and Application Sharing will terminate.
Page 274
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Allowing the Remote Control of your Application or Desktop
If you grant remote control of your application or desktop to another user when you are without
elevated Application Sharing privileges, the remote user will not be able to control any
applications that prompt you with a UAC dialog (Application Sharing will be terminated).
As long as the UAC dialog or Application Sharing Terminated error is open
on your desktop, any attempt by a remotely controlling user to regain control of
your desktop will result in a “Remote Start Failed” error message. Once you
cancel the dialog and error message, or they cancel themselves (after about 90
seconds), the remote user again will be able to request remote control of your
desktop.
When you have elevated privileges, a remotely controlling user can control any applications that
you can: if you are logged on to Vista/Windows 7 as a standard user, your access (and that of the
remote user) to some applications will be restricted; if you are logged on as an administrator, you
(and an associated remote user) will have greater access.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 275
Hosting Application Sharing Sessions on Windows Vista and Windows 7
Page 276
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 12: Presentation Mode
Moderators can change the view of the Whiteboard or an Application Sharing window so it fills
the entire Elluminate Live! window. This is called Presentation Mode. In Presentation Mode,
everyone in the session will have the same full-window view – until either they “opt out” of
Presentation Mode or the Moderator ends Presentation Mode and returns the content to a normal
view.
When Presentation Mode is engaged, the toolbar, status bar and some of the interaction features
(such as Chat and the Participants panel) are hidden from view. (Audio is accessible through the
Presentation Mode controller, discussed below, as well as it accelerator key.) Those wishing to
interact with others in the session by sending Chat messages, raising their hands, etc. can still do
so1, but they must first opt out of Presentation Mode or use the assigned accelerator keys for those
functions.
You cannot use the Graphing Calculator, Multimedia, Quiz Manager, Web Tour and File Transfer
library during Presentation Mode. If you have them open when Presentation Mode begins, they
will be closed, and you won’t be able to open them until Presentation Mode ends.
If open, the Video, Notes, Timer and Closed-Captioning windows will remain open when a
Moderator starts Presentation Mode. You also can open them after Presentation Mode has been
engaged.
Use Presentation Mode when you want to

reduce distractions and focus everyone’s attention on what is being presented;

project your Elluminate Live! session onto a large screen to a group assembled in a
conference room or classroom (since the group is logged in as one session attendee,
interaction features are not as important as maximizing the content being presented);

demonstrate software applications, where it is important to have a “full-screen” view of
the application in order to easily see all the menus and options; and

record Elluminate Live! sessions for instructive purposes, where the interaction features
cannot be used (as there is no live participation in the session) and you want to keep the
viewer’s focus directed toward the content.
As a Moderator, you can use all the available Presentation Mode features. Participants have
limited control over Presentation Mode. In the table below, a checkmark indicates which functions
can be performed by Moderators and which can be performed by Participants.
Feature
Put the Whiteboard or an Application Sharing window into
Presentation Mode
Moderators
Participants

1. Provided they have been granted the proper permissions.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 277
Presentation Mode as Seen by the Viewer
Feature
Moderators
Participants
Return the Whiteboard or an Application Sharing window to
normal view

View Whiteboard or Application Sharing content (hosted by
another) in Presentation Mode


Opt out of Presentation Mode


Return to Presentation Mode after opting out


Presentation Mode as Seen by the Viewer
The Presentation Mode window of the people viewing your content has the following components,
where the presented content can be either an Application Sharing session or the Whiteboard:
Page 278
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
If you (as a viewer) are in one of the minimal layouts (narrow, flat, leftdocked and right-docked) when Presentation Mode starts, or you switch to a
minimal layout during Presentation Mode1, you will automatically be opted out of
Presentation Mode as these layouts do not display the Whiteboard or Application
Sharing. To view content in Presentation Mode, you will need to switch to a nonminimal view (default, wide, tall or Whiteboard only) and then use the
Return to Presentation Mode button in the toolbar to opt back in to Presentation
Mode.
The Presentation Mode Controller
The Presentation Mode Controller is a small control strip in the Presentation Mode window. The
controller contains one set of controls for presenting Application Sharing sessions and another for
presenting the Whiteboard.
You will see the controller tab in the top right corner of the Presentation Mode window. To show
it, click on the tab. To hide the controller, click on the tab again.
You can also move the controller up and down the right side of the window by dragging its tab.
1. You can switch layouts only when opted out.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 279
Presentation Mode as Seen by the Viewer
Controller for the Whiteboard in Presentation Mode
When you are viewing the Whiteboard in Presentation Mode, the controller has two buttons:

The Opt Out of Presentation Mode button to view the Whiteboard in normal view. (You
might want to do this in order to send a Chat message or raise your hand.)

The Talk button to toggle your microphone on and off for talking. (For details on using the
Talk button, see Activating and Releasing Your Microphone on page 122.)
The Talk button is disabled if you are using Telephony for your audio.
Controller for Application Sharing in Presentation Mode
When you are viewing an Application Sharing session in Presentation Mode, the controller has
four buttons:

The Opt Out of Presentation Mode button to view the Application Sharing session in
normal view. (You might want to do this in order to send a Chat message or raise your
hand.)

The Talk button to toggle your microphone on and off for talking. (For details on using the
Talk button, see Activating and Releasing Your Microphone on page 122.)
The Talk button is disabled if you are using Telephony for your audio.

The Request Remote Control button to request remote control of the shared application.
(For details on remotely controlling an Application Sharing session, see Request Control
of Someone Else's Desktop on page 246.)

The Scale To Fit button to resize and reposition the Application Sharing window. If the
application that is being shared is larger than the Application Sharing window, clicking on
this button will scale the application to fit into the Application Sharing window.
When you zoom out using the
Scale to Fit (zoom out) button, the button changes to
the
Scale to Fit (zoom in) button, which you can use to zoom back in to full view.
Page 280
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Also note the yellow border surrounding the shared application, indicating it is being shown in
Presentation Mode. You can turn off this border or change its color through the Viewing Option
Highlight when presented. For details, see Viewing Options on page 258.
Displaying Content in Presentation Mode
When you start displaying your content in Presentation mode, any currently running Web Tours
will be terminated. If anyone in the session has a Graphing Calculator, Multimedia, Quiz Manager
or File Transfer window open, it will be closed.
The Whiteboard
1. Open the Present Content dialog box in one of three
ways:
 From the View menu, select Present Content.
 Enter Ctrl+Alt+P ( ໩ ໜ P on Mac)
 Click on the
Present Content button in the
toolbar or the Mini-Controller.
2. Select Whiteboard.
3. If you wish your own view of the Whiteboard to be
in Presentation Mode, select Present to Self.
The next time you engage Presentation Mode in the current session,
Elluminate Live! will remember whether or not you selected this option.
4. Click on the Present button.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 281
Displaying Content in Presentation Mode
Presentation Mode as Seen by the Host
If you did not select Present to Self when you put the Whiteboard in Presentation Mode,1 your
view of the Whiteboard will be surrounded by a yellow border containing text to indicate that it
has been placed in Presentation Mode. You will also know you are in Presentation Mode because
“
Presenting Whiteboard” is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the window.
If you have your layout unlocked (View > Layout Locked), you will not see
the yellow border. However, you will see “
Presenting Whiteboard” in the
status bar.
The Application Sharing Window
You can put your Application Sharing window into Presentation Mode either though the Present
Content dialog box or through the Host Applications dialog box. Application Sharing will appear
in the Present Content dialog box only if an Application Sharing session has already been started
(by you or anyone in the room).
1. If you select Present to Self, you will see the same view as any other viewer.
Page 282
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
You will be able to tell an Application Sharing session is in Presentation
Mode in two ways: the Present Content button in the toolbar will incorporate the
Application Sharing icon (
) and a message will scroll in the status bar (at the
bottom of the Elluminate Live! window) stating “
Presenting Application
Sharing”, along with a description of what is being shared (i.e., the application, a
region or the desktop).
Using the Present Content Dialog
1. Share your application through the Host Applications dialog box. (See steps 1 and 2 under
Using the Host Applications Dialog on page 284 for instructions.)
2. Open the Present Content dialog box in one of
three ways:
 From the View menu, select Present Content.
 Enter Ctrl+Alt+P ( ໩ ໜ P on Mac).
 Click on the
Present Content button in
the toolbar or the Mini-Controller.
3. Select Application Sharing.
If Application Sharing is not displayed in the Present Content dialog, this
means there is no application being shared in this room.
4. Click on the Present button.
The Present to Self option is not available for displaying an Application
Sharing window in Presentation Mode if you are hosting the Application Sharing
session (you do not see the Application Sharing content as do others in the
session). However, if another session attendee is hosting the session, you can
select the Present to Self option.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 283
Opting Out and Returning to Presentation Mode
Using the Host Applications Dialog
1. Open the Host Applications dialog box in
one of two ways:
 From the Tools menu, select
Application Sharing > Host
Applications….
 Click on the
Share Application
button in the toolbar.
2. Select the application or region you wish
to share.
3. Select the Show in Presentation mode
option.
4. Click on the OK button.
Opting Out and Returning to Presentation Mode
Anyone in the session can opt out of Presentation Mode at any time. They might want to do so in
order to send a Chat message or raise their hand. When done, they can return to Presentation
Mode.
If you were the Moderator who put the content into Presentation Mode, you
can opt out of Presentation Mode yourself without affecting the view of others in
the session. Others’ views change only if they opt out themselves or you end
Presentation Mode.
Opting Out of Presentation Mode
When you opt out of Presentation Mode, you will be returned to whichever window layout you
were in before you activated Presentation Mode. To opt out of Presentation Mode, do one of the
following:
 Click on the
Opt Out button in the Presentation Mode controller.
 From the View menu, de-select Show Presentation.
 Enter Ctrl+Shift+P ( ා ໜ P on Mac).
Page 284
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Returning to Presentation Mode
After opting out of Presentation Mode, you can return to it by do one of the following:
 Click on the
Return to Presentation Mode button in the toolbar.
 From the View menu, select Show Presentation.
 Enter Ctrl+Shift+P ( ා ໜ P on Mac).
Exiting Presentation Mode
When you end Presentation Mode, everyone in the session will be returned to whichever layout
they had been in prior to Presentation Mode.
Anyone with Moderator privileges can end Presentation Mode – not just the
Moderator who initiated it.
To end Presentation Mode, do one of the following:
 Click on the Exit Presentation Mode button in the toolbar. It will appear as either
presenting the Whiteboard or
if
)if presenting an Application Sharing session.
 If in the Mini-Controller, click on the
Exit Presentation Mode button.
 From the View menu, select Stop Presentation.
 Enter Ctrl+Alt+Shift+P ( ໩ ා ໜ P on Mac).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 285
Exiting Presentation Mode
Page 286
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 13: Web Tour & Web Push
There are two ways for a Moderator to show session attendees web sites: in a Web Tour or a Web
Push.
The Web Tour window will appear in front of the Main window. In a Web Tour, you, as the tour
guide, have more control of what the session attendees will see. If they are viewing the web site via
the Web Tour window, they can browse on their own within the site. The moment you move
within the Web Tour window (click on a link or push them to a different URL), they will move
with you.
With a Web Push, the Internet URL opens up in the session attendee’s own web browser. This
window is outside the Elluminate Live! session and the session attendees have full control of their
own windows – they can type URLs into the browser, use their own bookmarks and close the
window. When you move to another web page (push session attendees to a different URL), that
page will open up in a new browser window.
To start or view a Web Tour, you must be one of the following systems:

any supported Windows system

any Mac OS X 10.6 or higher running a 32-bit or 64-bit JVM

Mac OS X 10.5 running a 32-bit JVM
If you are on one of the following systems, you will be able to perform or view a Web Push only.
Therefore, when a Moderator starts a Web Tour, users on these systems will see the specified web
page open in their default web browsers (a Web Push):

any Linux or Solaris system

Mac OS X 10.5.x running a 64-bit JVM (Java 1.6)
In Elluminate Live! 8.5 recordings, Mac OS X users will see Web Tours as
Web Pushes, where each page of a Web Tour will open in a new external web
browser window.
If session attendees are running Linux or Solaris, in order to see both
the Web Push browser window and Elluminate Live! at the same time, they may
want to select the Minimal Window Layouts (Narrow or Flat), so that the
Whiteboard is hidden. They will be able to move the browser window into the
vacated Whiteboard area. When you finish with the website, ask the session
attendeesto close their browsers and return to the Elluminate Live! window.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 287
Web Tour
Following are additional differences between the two features:

When you close the Web Tour window, all Web Tour windows in the session will close.
With Web Push, when you close your web browser, the session attendees’ web browser
remains open; they must manually close their web browser window.

When you close the Web Tour window, the session attendees will no longer have access to
that site (unless they saved the URL and go there in their own web browser). If you want
the session attendees to be able to view the web site at a later date, a Web Push will allow
the session attendees to bookmark the URL in their web browser. Then they can view the
web site at their leisure.
Web Tour
Starting a Web Tour
The Web Tour window will appear in front of (on top of) other open windows. To start a Web
Tour with a specific web site, do the following:
1. Click on the
button in the toolbar or, alternatively, from the Tools menu select Web
Tour > Start Web Tour.
2. In the Start Web Tour dialog box, enter the URL that you wish to display to your session
attendees and then click OK.
The Web Tour Window will open with the specified web page.
In a web tour, if you get an error (displayed in the Web Tour window)
something like “This program cannot display the webpage”, it may be because
you are connected to the Internet through a proxy server and need to turn the
Popup Blocker preference off. For details, see Enabling Popups in the Browser
(Windows only) on page 290.
Page 288
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Session attendees can move to other pages in the Web Tour window, but
will be redirected when the tour guide makes a change.
Using the Web Tour Window
Within the Web Tour window, you can do the following:

Move within the web site by clicking on the various links. The links will be stored. Within
the same session, you can use the arrow buttons to move to these links.

Move within the web site by using the page arrows.

Move to another web site by entering the URL in the URL text box. The URL will be
stored and you can access the URL via the arrow buttons.

Publish a URL to the Chat panel by clicking on the Publish URL button.

Close and resize the Web Tour window.
Only one Moderator at a time can control the Web Tour window (be the ‘tour guide’). To become
the tour guide, select the Tour Guide check box in the Web Tour window. If you do not have the
Tour Guide option selected, you will be moving only yourself and not anyone else in the session.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 289
Web Tour
The initiator of a Web Tour is automatically the initial tour guide (the Tour
guide option is selected).
The Web Tour feature on Mac OS X does not have the ability to run Java
applets from a web page. Mac OS X users, however, will be able to view the other
content on the web page.
Publishing URL to Chat Panel
You can publish URLs from your Web Tour to the Chat Panel so they are accessible to everyone.
Only Moderators can publish a URL to the Chat panel. You must enter your URL and press Enter
to load the web page before the
Publish URL button is enabled. (When the URL address field
does not contain a valid URL, the Publish URL button is disabled.)
Closing the Web Tour Window
To close the Web Tour window, do one of the following:
 From the Tools menu, select Web Tour > Stop Web Tour.
 Click on the
button in the toolbar.
 Click the Web Tour window’s Close button.
 Enter Ctrl+W ( ໜ W on Mac).
 Enter ALT+F4 (Windows, Linux and Solaris only).
The Web Tour window will close in all the sessions. If the URL was launched in the session
attendee’s web browser, their web browser will not close. You will have to ask them to close their
web browser.
Enabling Popups in the Browser (Windows only)
The web browser embedded in Elluminate Live! is, by default, configured to block popup windows
during web tours. When you are connected to Elluminate Live! through a proxy server that
requires you to enter authentication information, the Popup Blocker will prevent the authentication
dialog from “popping up” and you will not be able to provide authentication credentials to the
proxy server.1 In this case, you need to disable the Popup Blocker the Preferences dialog.
Page 290
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
This preference setting is available on Windows systems only.
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Popup Blocker under Web Tour. The
Popup Blocker preferences panel appears.
3. De-select Block Popups.
4. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you change the Popup Blocker, Elluminate Live! will remember this setting each time you
join another session.
You can restore your Popup Blocker to the default. For details on restoring
default preferences, see Restoring Default Settings on page 8.
1. You will get an error something like, “This program cannot display the webpage.”
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 291
Web Push
Web Push
To perform a Web Push, follow the steps below:
1. Open the Go to URL dialog box by doing one of the following:
 From the Tools menu, select Web Tour and then Go to URL… (all platforms).
 Click on the
button in the toolbar.
2. In the Go to URL dialog box, enter the URL that you wish to display to your session
attendees and then click OK.
The URL will launch in the session attendee’s default browser.
If you currently have the Web Tour window open and then you do a Web
Push, the Web Tour window will close.
Page 292
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 14: Breakout Rooms
Moderators can create breakout rooms any time during the session and move session attendees
between rooms. A breakout room has the same features as the Main Room and can be used to
facilitate small group activities or private meetings. Breakout rooms have their own private Audio,
Whiteboard, Application Sharing, Video, polling, etc. What is said or viewed in a breakout room
will not be captured in a recording.
For instructions on sending Telephony users to breakout rooms, refer to
Sending the Telephony Users to Breakout Rooms on page 155.
Creating Private Breakout Rooms
Private breakout rooms can be created at any time but must have someone in the room at all times.
Participants and Moderators can easily be moved in and out of the room. When the last Moderator
or Participant is moved out of the private breakout room, the breakout room will automatically
close.
To create a private breakout room:
1. In the Participants List, click on the names of Participants you wish to move to a breakout
room. Hold down Shift or Control ( ා or ໜ on Mac) to select multiple Participants.
2. Right-click (^Click on Mac) and select Send to Breakout Room and then select New
Private Breakout Room from the context menu. Alternatively, this option is also available
from the Tools > Breakout Rooms > Send to Breakout Room > New Private Breakout
Room.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 293
Creating Public Breakout Rooms
A new private breakout room, represented by a folder icon, will be created. The Participants in the
room will be listed along with their permissions.
The naming convention for a private breakout room is Private Room (1),
Private Room (2), Private Room (3), etc.
Creating Public Breakout Rooms
Public breakout rooms can be created at any time and Participants and Moderators can easily be
moved in and out of the room.
The advantage to creating a public breakout room versus a private breakout room is that a public
breakout room does not require anyone in the room. This means that you can create the room, load
content for the Participants to collaborate on and then during the session move them into the room.
When all the Participants and Moderators are moved out of the public breakout room, the breakout
room and its contents will still remain (unlike a private breakout room which closes when no one is
left in the room), allowing you to use the room and content again.
Page 294
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
1. In the Participants List right click (^Click on Mac) anywhere in the window and select
Create Breakout Room… from the context menu or alternatively, Select Tools > Breakout
Rooms > Create Breakout Room…
2. The New Breakout Room dialog box appears.
3. Enter a name for the breakout room and click OK.
A new public breakout room, represented by a folder icon, will be created.
Distributing Participants and Moderators into Public
Rooms
The Distribute Participants feature allows you to automatically distribute the Participants and
Moderators in the Main Room into breakout rooms. The breakout rooms created using this feature
are public.
There are three ways you may distribute the session attendees:

Into the last breakout room they were in — this option will return all the session attendees
to the last breakout room that they were in prior to returning to the Main Room. If they
were never in a breakout room, they will remain in the Main Room.

Into x groups — The session attendees in the Main Room will be divided up as evenly as
possible into the x number of groups. For example, if you have 10 people in the Main
Room and ask for groups of 4, you will get groups of 3, 3, 2, and 2 rather than 3, 3, 3, 1.
You may create no more than 1000 groups.

Into group of x people — enter the number of people in each group. Based on the number
of people in each group, the appropriate number of rooms will be created. For example, if
you have 5 people in the Main Room and wanted to have 2 people in each group, three
rooms will be created with one room only having one person in the room. You may place
no more than 1000 people in a group.
You also have the options to include Moderators in the distribution and to stipulate the name of the
breakout room(s). Each room will contain the base name (that you've entered or the default Rm.)
and the numbers 1, 2, 3, etc. appended to the base name.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 295
Sending Others to Breakout Rooms
1. In the Participants List right click (^Click on Mac) anywhere in the window and select
Distribute Participants… from the context menu or alternatively, Select Tools > Breakout
Rooms > Distribute Participants…
2. The Distribute Users dialog box appears.
3. Select how you wish to distribute the session attendees from the Main Room.
4. If you wish to include the Moderators in the distribution, then select the option Include
moderators in the distribution.
5. Modify the base name if you do not wish to use the default base name “Rm”.
6. Click OK. The users will be distributed according to your definition.
After a distribution into the last breakout room is performed, all previously
private breakout rooms will now be public breakout rooms.
Sending Others to Breakout Rooms
You can send Participants and Moderators from the Main Room to a public breakout room or from
one breakout room to another.
Using the Menu Option
1. In the Participants List, click on the names of session attendees you wish to move to a
breakout room. Hold down Shift or Control ( ා or ໜ on Mac) to select multiple people.
Page 296
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. Do one of the following:
 Select Tools > Breakout Rooms > Send to Breakout Room and then select the desired
room from the list of available rooms.
 Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the selected name(s) to open the context menu and
then select the desired room from the Send to Breakout Room submenu.
The Participants List will be updated displaying the session attendees in each room.
By Dragging and Dropping
You can drag and drop Participants or Moderators (including yourself) from the Main Room to a
breakout room by selecting them and, while holding down the mouse button, drag them to a
breakout room. When your cursor is over the desired breakout room, release the mouse button.
You can drag and drop multiple adjacent people by selecting the first
participant and holding down Shift (ා on Mac) to select the last participant. If you
want to move multiple people that are not listed next to each other in the
Participants List, you will need to use the menu option (as described above).
In the example below, the Moderator is dragging and dropping Linus and Lucy into the Tutorial
breakout room. Note that, as the Moderator moves Linus and Lucy over breakout rooms, each is
highlighted in green to indicate it is a potential “target”.
1. Select the session attendees to move into the breakout room while keeping the mouse
button pressed.
2. Drag the session attendees past the Lab breakout room to the Tutorial breakout room, still
keeping the mouse button pressed.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 297
Allowing Participants to Move Themselves to Breakout Rooms
3. Drop the Session attendees into the Tutorial breakout room by releasing the mouse button.
Allowing Participants to Move Themselves to Breakout
Rooms
If you want Participants to be able to move freely between rooms, explicitly grant them the
permission to do so by selecting Tools > Breakout Rooms > Allow Participants to Move
Themselves to Breakout Rooms.
Sending Yourself to a Breakout Room
You can send yourself from the Main Room to a breakout room or from one breakout room to
another.
Using the Menu Option
There are two options for sending yourself to a breakout room using a menu:
 In the Participants List, right-click (^Click on Mac) on your own name to open the context
menu and then select the desired room from the Send to Breakout Room submenu.
 Select Tools > Breakout Rooms > Send Self to Breakout Room and then select the desired
room from the list of available rooms.
Page 298
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
By Dragging and Dropping
You can drag and drop yourself into a breakout room just as you would any other participant. See
the instructions for sending others to breakout rooms by dragging and dropping on page 301.
Returning Yourself to the Main Room
Using the Menu Option
You can return yourself to the Main Room using menus in one of two ways:
 Right-click (^Click on Mac) on your name in the Participant’s list and, from the Send to
Breakout Room submenu, select Main Room.
 Select Tools > Breakout Rooms > Send Self to Breakout Room > Main Room.
By Dragging and Dropping
You can drag and drop yourself from a breakout room back to the Main Room by selecting your
name and, while holding down the mouse button, drag it to the Main Room.
The process for returning yourself to the Main Room is a little different than
that for dragging and dropping yourself from the Main Room to a breakout room.
Take special note of step 2 below.
In the example below, Linus is dragging and dropping himself from the Tutorial breakout room
back to the Main Room.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 299
Returning Yourself to the Main Room
1. Select your name, keeping the mouse button pressed.
2. Drag yourself either
 over any user currently in the Main Room (e.g., Vivian or Ricky), still keeping the
mouse button pressed; or
 over any blank area in the Participants List, still keeping the mouse button pressed.
If there are no session attendees or blank areas in the Main Room, you will
not be able to drag and drop people back to the Main Room. Use the menu option
Send to Breakout Room > Main Room instead.
Page 300
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Returning Participants to the Main Room
Using the Menu Option
1. In the breakout room, click on the names of session attendees (including yourself) you
wish to move to the Main Room. Hold down Shift or Control ( ා or ໜ on Mac) to select
multiple people.
2. Do one of the following:
 Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the selected name(s) and, from the Send to Breakout
Room submenu, select Main Room.

(If moving yourself) Select Tools > Breakout Rooms > Send Self to Breakout Room
> Main Room.
 Select Tools > Breakout Rooms > Send to Breakout Room > Main Room.
By Dragging and Dropping
You can drag and drop session attendees (or yourself) from a breakout room back to the Main
Room by selecting the desired participant(s) and, while holding down the mouse button, drag them
to the Main Room.
You can drag and drop multiple adjacent session attendees by selecting the
first participant and holding down Shift ( ා on Mac) to select the last participant.
If you want to move multiple session attendees that are not listed next to each
other in the Participants List, you will need to use the Context menu (as described
above).
The process for returning people to the Main Room is a little different
than that for dragging and dropping from the Main Room to a breakout
room. Take special note of step 2 below.
In the example below, the Moderator is dragging and dropping Linus and Lucy from the Tutorial
breakout room back to the Main Room.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 301
Returning Participants to the Main Room
1. Select the Session attendees to move to the Main Room.
2. While keeping the mouse button pressed, drag the Session attendees
 over any user currently in the Main Room (e.g., Vivian or Ricky); or
 over any blank area in the Participants List.
3. Release the mouse button.
If there are no session attendees or blank areas in the Main Room, you will
not be able to drag and drop people back to the Main Room. Use the menu option
Send to Breakout Room > Main Room instead.
Page 302
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Return Everyone at Once to the Main Room
In one step, you can return everyone (including yourself) to the Main Room regardless of where
they are. You can do this in one of two ways:
 Right-click (^Click on Mac) anywhere in the Participants List, and select the option
Return Everyone to Main Room from the context menu.
 Select Tools > Breakout Rooms > Return Everyone to Main Room.
All the Participants and Moderators will be moved back into the Main Room. All private breakout
rooms will automatically close; public breakout rooms will still be listed in the Participants List.
Copying Screens to the Main Room
Moderators can copy all or selected Whiteboard screens from breakout rooms to the Main Room.
(Participants cannot perform this function.)
Moderators also can copy screens into breakout rooms from the Main
Room. For details, see Copying Screens to Breakout Rooms on page 212.
Copying All Screens of Selected Breakout Rooms
To copy all screens in a specific room to the Main Room, do one of the following:
 In the Participants List, right click (^Click on Mac) on the breakout room from which you
want to copy whiteboard screens. From the context menu, select Copy Whiteboard to
Main Room.
 Select Tools > Whiteboard > Copy Breakout Rooms to Main Room…. From the Copy
Breakout Rooms dialog, select the desired breakout rooms and click on Copy.
If you have a large number of breakout rooms but want to copy the
whiteboard screens of only a few, click on the None button to deselect all the
breakout rooms and then select the few desired rooms.
If you want to confirm that you copied the screens from the correct breakout room, click on the
down arrow of the View Screen menu on the navigation bar to see a list of all screens in all rooms.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 303
Copying Screens to the Main Room
Copying All Screens of All Breakout Rooms
To copy all screens in all rooms to the Main Room, do one of the following:
 Right click (^Click on Mac) anywhere in the
Participants List and, from the context menu, select
Copy All Whiteboards to Main Room..
 Select Tools > Whiteboard > Copy Breakout Rooms to
Main Room…. From the Copy Breakout Rooms dialog,
select all breakout rooms (this is the default) and click
on Copy.
If you want to confirm that you copied the screens from the
correct breakout room, click on the down arrow of the View
Screen menu on the navigation bar to see a list of all screens in
all rooms.
Copying Selected Screens of Breakout Rooms
To copy one or multiple selected breakout room screens to the Main Room, do the following:
1. Open the Explore Screens window. (For instructions, see Using the Explore Screens
Window on page 203.)
2. Select the screens to be copied. You can select individual screens in different breakout
rooms.
3. Right click (^Click on Mac) in the Explore Screens window and, from the context menu,
select Selected Screens > Copy Screen to Main Room.
Page 304
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Copying A Single Breakout Room Screen
To copy only one breakout room screen to the Main Room, do one of the following:
 Navigate to the desired screen, right click (^Click on Mac) in the screen and, from the
Whiteboard context menu, select Selected Screens > Copy Screen to Main Room.
 Follow the procedure outlined above under Copying Selected Screens of Breakout Rooms.
Renaming a Breakout Room
A public breakout room may be renamed at any time during the session. Renaming a breakout
room will not change the attributes of the room or who is in the room.
To rename a breakout room
1. In the Participants List, click on the breakout room you wish to rename.
2. Right-click (^Click on Mac) and select Rename Breakout Room from the context menu.
Alternatively, Select Tools > Breakout Rooms > Rename Breakout Room.
3. The Rename Breakout Room dialog box appears.
4. Enter the new breakout room name and then click OK. The new Breakout Name will
appear in the Participants List.
Breakout rooms are listed in the Participants List in alphabetical order. Depending on the new
name, the breakout room may move its position in the Participants List.
Closing a Breakout Room
A private breakout room will automatically close when all of the Participants and Moderators are
removed from that room. A public breakout room must be manually closed. When you close any
breakout room, the Participants and Moderators are returned to the Main Room.
To close either a private or public breakout room
1. In the Participants List, highlight the breakout rooms you wish to close. You may close
more than one at a time.
2. Right-click (^Click on Mac) and select the option Close Breakout Room from the context
menu. Alternatively, Select Tools > Breakout Rooms > Close Breakout Room.
All the Participants and Moderators will be moved back into the Main Room and the breakout
room will disappear from the Participants List.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 305
Closing a Breakout Room
Page 306
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 15: The Timer
The Timer in Elluminate Live! is a clock that you can use to effectively manage your sessions. It
can be useful in helping you pace your own presentations or coordinate multiple presenters by
tracking the time allotted to each.
You also can use the Timer when working with Participants. Let’s say you have sent Participants
to breakout rooms for thirty minutes to work on an assignment. To help the Participants stay on
track with the assignment, you could make the Timer (set for thirty minutes) visible to them.
The Timer can be set to count down from a specified time to zero or count up from zero for an
indefinite time. It can be paused and can be hidden from view at any time.
The Timer interface consists of two elements: the Timer Settings dialog in which you set the time
and Timer options and the Timer window that displays the time. Only one Timer can be running at
a time in a session.
When the Timer has expired, you will be notified by an audible tone and/or visual notification
(such as the one below). Anyone in the session can turn their own audible and visual notifications
off. For details, see Setting Notification Preferences on page 11.
The Timer window has the following components:
The Participants’ Timer window looks the same as yours except that it doesn’t have the Pause and
Stop buttons.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 307
The Timer Settings dialog has the following components:
As a Moderator, you can use all the available Timer features. Participants can use a subset of the
features (when the Show to All option is selected). In the table below, a checkmark indicates which
functions can be performed by Moderators and which can be performed by Participants.
Feature
Moderators
Participants
Start the Timer

Set Timer options

Pause the Timer

Stop the Timer

View the Timer


Hide and Show the Timer


Page 308
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Feature
Moderators
Set preferences for Audible and Visual notifications.
Participants


Starting the Timer
Opening the Timer Settings Dialog
There are two ways to open the Timer Settings Dialog:
 From the Tools menu, select Timer > Start Timer.
 Click on the
Start Timer button in the Toolbar.
You can’t open the Timer Settings dialog if a timer is already running or
paused. If you need to change the time of the existing Timer, you can do so in the
Timer window. (See Changing the Time on page 312.)
Setting the Time
You can set the Timer to work in one of two modes:

You can have the Timer Count down from the number you specify to zero. Use this
option when you want to keep track of how much time you have left. (This is the default
mode.)

You can have the Timer Count up from zero to an indefinite time1. Use this option when
you want to keep track of how much time has expired.
Counting Down
1. Click on the Count Down From radio button.
2. Move to the time field (Hour, Minute or Second) you want to change. Either click in the
desired field with your mouse or use your Right and Left Arrow Keys.
3. Enter values in the Hours, Minutes and Seconds fields. There are three ways to do this:
 Select the existing values in the time fields and type the new values over them.
 Use the Time spinner to change the values in the time fields.
 Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to change the values in the time fields.
1. The Timer can count up to a maximum of 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 309
Starting the Timer
You cannot leave the time fields at zero. If you do, the Start button will be
disabled (grayed out).
The maximum value you can enter in the Hours field is 99. If you enter a value greater
than 59 in the Minutes or Seconds fields, the values will be converted.
4. Select your Timer expiration indicator options. These indicators can be used to notify
users that the Timer has expired – that time’s up. You can choose none, one or both
options:

Choose Play Sound if you want a “beep” to sound when the Timer has expired.

Choose Display Message if you want to display a visual notification when the Timer
has expired. (This is the default option.)
If a user has not acknowledged the “Timer expired” notification (by
clicking on Dismiss) within 30 seconds, the notification will automatically close.
Anyone in the session can turn their own audible and visual notifications
off. For details, see Setting Notification Preferences on page 11.
5. Select your visibility options to specify which users you want to be able to see the Timer.
You must choose one:

Choose Show to All if you want everyone in the session, including Participants, to see
the Timer.1 (This is the default option.)
1. The Timer is shown to everyone in breakout rooms, as well as those in the main room.
Page 310
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0

Choose Show to Moderators Only if you want only Moderators to see the Timer.
6. (Optional) Enter a message (of up to 25 characters) to session attendees explaining the
purpose of the timer. You might want to enter the name of a timed assignment to make it
clear to students how much time they have left to complete the assignment.
7. Click on the Start button. The Timer will end when zero is reached.
Counting Up
1. Click on the Count Up From radio button.
2. Select your visibility options. You must choose one:

Choose Show to All if you want everyone in the session, including Participants, to see
the Timer.

Choose Show to Moderators Only if you want only Moderators to see the Timer.
3. (Optional) Enter a message (of up to 25 characters) to session attendees explaining the
purpose of the timer. You might want to enter the name of a timed assignment to make it
clear to students how much time they have left to complete the assignment.
4. Click on the Start button. The Timer will not end on its own and must be stopped
manually.
Hiding and Showing the Timer Window
Both Moderators and Participants can hide and show their own Timer windows. This will not
affect whether or not the Timer window is shown to, or hidden from, others in the session.
The Show/Hide Timer Button
When the timer is running, a second button, the
Show/Hide Timer button is added to the
Elluminate Live! toolbar. This button can be toggled back and forth to hide and show the Timer
window.
When the Timer window is visible (as when the Timer first starts), this button is the Hide Timer
button (highlighted in white). When you click on the Hide Timer button, the button changes to the
Show Timer button (no highlighting). To make the Timer visible again, click on the Show Timer
button.
Hiding the Timer
Hiding the Timer window does not interfere with the time (does not stop the timer). There are a
few ways to hide the timer:
 Click on the
Hide Timer button on the toolbar.
 Click on the Close button in the Timer window.
 Enter Ctrl+W ( ໜ W on Mac).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 311
Pausing and Resuming the Timer
 Enter ALT+F4 (Windows, Linux and Solaris only).
Whenever a new Timer is started, the Show/Hide Timer function is reset –
the timer will be visible.
Showing the Timer
To bring a hidden Timer window back into view, do one of the following:
 Select Timer from the Window menu.
 Click on the
Show Timer button on the toolbar.
Pausing and Resuming the Timer
Moderators can pause and resume the Timer at any time, regardless of whether or not they
personally started the Timer.
Before you can pause or resume the Timer, make sure it is visible (see Hiding and Showing the
Timer Window on page 311).
After the Timer is paused and resumed, the Timers of all users will be resynchronized with the new time.
Changing the Time
You don’t have to stop the Timer if you want a different time setting. You can change the time
while the Timer is still running.
1. Click on the Pause button in the Timer window to pause the Timer.
2. Move to the time field (Hour, Minute or Second) you want to change. Either click in the
desired field with your mouse or use your Right and Left Arrow Keys.
Page 312
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
3. Enter new values in the Hours, Minutes and Seconds fields. There are three ways to do
this:
 Select the existing values in the time fields and type the new values over them.
 Use the Time spinner to change the values in the time fields.
 Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to change the values in the time fields.
You cannot leave the time fields at zero. If you do, the Start button will be
disabled (grayed out).
The maximum value you can enter in the Hours field is 99. If you enter a value greater
than 59 in the Minutes or Seconds fields, the values will be converted.
4. Click on the Resume button in the Timer window to resume the Timer.
After the time is changed, the Timers of all users will be re-synchronized
with the new time.
Stopping the Timer
There are two ways to stop the timer:
 From the Tools menu, select Timer > Stop Timer.
 Click on the Stop Timer button in the toolbar.
When the Timer is started, the
button.
Start Timer button in the toolbar changes to a
Stop Timer
Keep in mind that, when you stop the Timer, others in your session will not
be notified (as they can be when the Timer expires). The Timer will just
disappear. If you want to notify users, use the Chat function (see Chapter 6, “The
Chat Panel”).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 313
Working with the Timer within the Mini-Controller
Working with the Timer within the Mini-Controller
You can perform all Timer functions from within the Mini-Controller (see The Mini-Controller on
page 43) except for one – you cannot start a new Timer from the Mini-Controller.
When you switch to the Mini-Controller while a Timer is running (or paused), the
Show/Hide
Timer button is added to the Mini-Controller toolbar. This button can be toggled back and forth to
hide and show the Timer.
Showing and Hiding the Timer from within the Mini-Controller
When you switch to the Mini-Controller, the Timer is hidden. To show the Timer, click on the
Show Timer button. The Timer will appear as a fly-out panel attached to the Mini-Controller.
To hide the Timer, click on the
Hide Timer button. The button will revert back to the Show
Timer button. See Hiding and Showing the Timer Window on page 311 for further details.
Pausing and Resuming the Timer from within the Mini-Controller
Moderators can pause and resume the Timer at any time, regardless of whether or not they
personally started the Timer.
Before you can pause or resume the Timer, make sure it is visible (see Showing and Hiding the
Timer from within the Mini-Controller on page 314).
Pausing the Timer
Resuming the Timer
1. Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the
Timer panel or the
Hide Timer
button.
1. Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the
Timer panel or the
Hide Timer
button.
2. Select Pause Timer from the option
menu.
2. Select Resume Timer from the option
menu.
The Timer panel changes appearance.
Page 314
The Timer panel changes back.
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
After the Timer is paused and resumed, the Timers of all users will be resynchronized with the new time.
Changing the Time from within the Mini-Controller
You don’t have to stop the Timer if you want a different time setting. You can change the time
while the Timer is still running.
1. Pause the Timer (as described in Pausing and Resuming the Timer from within the MiniController on page 314).
2. Move to the time field (Hour, Minute or Second) you want to change. Either click in the
desired field with your mouse or use your Right and Left Arrow Keys.
3. Enter new values in the Hours, Minutes and Seconds fields. There are three ways to do
this:
 Select the existing values in the time fields and type the new values over them.
 Use the Time spinner to change the values in the time fields.
 Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to change the values in the time fields
You cannot leave the time fields at zero. If you do, the Start button will be
disabled (grayed out).
The maximum value you can enter in the Hours field is 99. If you enter a value greater
than 59 in the Minutes or Seconds fields, the values will be converted.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 315
Bringing the Timer into Focus
4. Resume the Timer (as described in Pausing and Resuming the Timer from within the MiniController on page 314).
After the time is changed, the Timers of all users will be re-synchronized
with the new time.
Stopping the Timer from within the Mini-Controller
1. Right-click (^Click on Mac) on the Timer panel or the Hide Timer button.
2. Select Stop Timer from the option menu. The Timer panel will disappear.
Keep in mind that, when you stop the Timer, others in your session will not
be notified (as they can be when the Timer expires). The Timer will just
disappear. If you want to notify users, use the Chat function (see Chapter 6, “The
Chat Panel”).
Bringing the Timer into Focus
When you have a number of windows open, you may want to bring the Timer window into focus
(make it the active window). To do so, select Timer from the Window menu.
The Timer item is present in the Window menu only when the Timer is
enabled (running or paused).
Moving the Timer Window
You can move the Timer by dragging the window’s title bar.You can move it either inside or
outside of the Elluminate Live! window (if it is inside, it will always remain on top).
The Timer window will appear in the same location each time a new Timer is started – until you
move it again.
Page 316
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 16: File Transfer
The File Transfer feature permits Moderators (and Participants granted the permission) to upload
files into the File Transfer library in order to share them with everyone in the session. Uploaded
files can be pushed out to everyone in the session and explicitly saved by the receiving Participants
and Moderators. Everyone has permission to save the files but a Moderator must give a Participant
permission to upload files. If you have permission to upload a file, you will automatically be given
permission to delete any files that you uploaded.
The File Transfer Library
To open the File Transfer library click on the
File Transfer.
button in the main toolbar or select Window >
The File Transfer library displays a list of all the preloaded files and files currently being loaded
into the library.
Each file or URL displayed in the list contains the following information:

Name of the File — the name of the file is derived from where the file was loaded. If the
file was loaded from a users file system, then this is the name of the original file. If it was
loaded from a URL, this is the last component of the URL path.

Owner of the File — this is the name of the person who loaded the file. If the file was
preloaded by the server, then the owner will be listed as ---

Size – the size of the file and what progress has been made downloading the file to your
machine.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 317
The File Transfer Library

Server — indicates the status of loading the file onto the server. If the file has been fully
loaded onto the server the status will read Complete. If the file is uploading, it will indicate
the status as Loading and the percentage of completion. If the file has not been completely
uploaded to the server and the user who was uploading the file has left the session or been
disconnected, the status will read Partial and the percentage of completion.

Progress — the Progress bar is a status indicator for each Participant and Moderator
indicating the overall progress of deploying the file to the Participants and Moderators of
the session. It shows a graph with red, orange, yellow, cyan, and green bars. Red: the
number of users who has less than 50% of the file. Orange: users with less than 75%.
Yellow: users with less than 95%. Cyan: users with less than 99%. Green: is 100%
complete.
If you had saved the file locally, you can find out where by hovering your
mouse over the filename in the library. A tool tip will display the full pathname.
Loading a File
The number of files you can load is dependent upon the size of the files. The default total file size
is 10 Megabytes.
To load a file, from the File Transfer library, do the following:
1. Open the File Transfer library in one of the following ways:
 Click on the
button in the main toolbar.
 Select Windows > File Transfer.
2. Click on the
Load File button. The Load File dialog appears.
3. Navigate to the appropriate folder and select the file you wish to transfer.
Page 318
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
4. Select the option Prompt recipients if you wish to have everyone in the session be notified
to save the file as soon as it is added to the library. If you do not select this option, you can
prompt recipients later (using the
Prompt Recipients button in the toolbar) or, if you
want to give the file to only a few people, notify them directly that the file is available for
download.1
5. Click Open to close the dialog box. The file is now loaded into the File Transfer library.
You may also load a file by going to File > Open > File to Transfer> From
File. This will take you directly to the Load File window.
Loading a File by URL
Loading a file by URL can be used to avoid uploading to the Elluminate Live! server over a slow
connection. The URL is sent to the server, which then loads the data directly from the target of the
URL. This can save time if connection between the Elluminate Live! server and the target of the
URL is faster than that between the Elluminate Live! server and the uploading user.
To load a file by using a URL to its contents, do the following:
1. Open the File Transfer library in one of the following ways:
 Click on the
button in the main toolbar.
 Select Windows > File Transfer.
2. Click the
Load URL button. The Load URL dialog box appears.
Enter the URL for the file data in the text box provided.
Don’t forget to include the “http://, “https://”, “ftp://”, etc. at the beginning
of the File URL field.
1. Anyone in the session will see, and be able to download, the file if they open the File Transfer
Library.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 319
The File Transfer Library
3. Select the option Prompt recipients if you wish to have everyone in the session be notified
to save the file as soon as it is added to the library. If you do not select this option, you can
prompt recipients later (using the
Prompt Recipients button in the toolbar) or, if you
want to give the file to only a few people, notify them directly that the file is available for
download.1
4. Click Load to close the dialog box. The file is now loaded into the File Transfer library.
You may also load a file by going to File > Open > File to Transfer> From
URL. This will take you directly to the Load URL dialog box.
Prompting Recipients to Save a File
If you want everyone in the session be notified to save the file as soon as you add it to the library,
select the option Prompt recipients in the Load File or Load File URL dialog (see above).
Alternatively, you can prompt recipients later by clicking on the
Prompt Recipients button in
the toolbar or, if you want to give the file to only a few people, notify them directly that the file is
available for download.
Saving a File
If the person who uploaded the file or a Moderator requests that you be prompted by Elluminate
Live! to save it, the Save File dialog will appear.
1. Click on Yes. The Save dialog will open.
2. Navigate to the folder to which you wish to save the file and click Save.
You can also save the file without being prompted to do so:
1. Open the File Transfer library in one of the following ways:
 Click on the
button in the main toolbar.
 Select Windows > File Transfer.
1. Anyone in the session will see, and be able to download, the file if they open the File Transfer
Library.
Page 320
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. Select the file you would like to save.
3. Click on the
Save button in the toolbar. The Save dialog will open.
4. Navigate to the folder to which you wish to save the file and click Save.
Removing a File
To remove file from the File Transfer library, do the following:
1. Select the file you would like to remove from the library.
2. Click on the
appear.
Remove button in the toolbar. The Delete File confirmation dialog will
3. Click OK to remove the file.
Giving Upload File Transfer Permission to Participants
By default, Participants are not given permission to upload files to the File Transfer library.
To grant permission to individual Participants, do the following:
1. Open the File Transfer library. When the File Transfer library is open, the file transfer
permission column is visible in the Participants List.
2. Click the file transfer permission column next to the person’s name. That permission’s
symbol appears in the column to indicate the person has been given permission to use that
feature.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 321
The File Transfer Library
Closing and Reopening the File Transfer Library
Closing the File Transfer library will not affect the files already loaded into the library – it just
closes the window. To close the window, do one of the following:
 Enter Ctrl+W ( ໜ W on Mac).
 Enter ALT+F4 (Windows, Linux and Solaris only).
 Click on the Close Window button in the title bar of the window.
To reopen the window, select Window > File Transfer.
Page 322
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 17: Multimedia Files
The Multimedia play feature allows you to play a multimedia file or a multimedia URL in a
session.
Playing a multimedia file is a two-step process:
1. Load the multimedia file(s) or multimedia URLs. These are placed in the Multimedia
Library.
The Multimedia feature supports WMV, MPEG, MPEG4, MP3,
QuickTime, and Flash files.
2. After the files or URLs have been loaded, select the file or URL to be played from the list
in the Multimedia Library dialog box.
The appropriate players must be installed to view these files. The
Multimedia feature will first attempt to play the file in the Multimedia window
and if this is not possible, it will then attempt to open the file up in your machine’s
supported media player.
The Multimedia Library Window
To open the Multimedia Library window click on the
from the Window menu, select Multimedia Library.
button in the Main window toolbar or
The first time you access this feature, a Multimedia Warning message appears, reminding you of
which files are supported.
By default, the option Do not warn me again this session is selected. If you leave this option
selected, the warning will not appear again. Click OK to continue. The Multimedia Library will
open.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 323
The Multimedia Library Window
The number of multimedia files or URLs you can load is dependent upon
the memory on your computer.
Each file or URL displayed in the list contains the following information:

Name — the name of the file or the URL.

Size – the size of the file in Kilobytes.

Server — indicates the status of loading the file onto the server. If the file is loading, it will
indicate the status as Loading and the percentage of completion. If the media has been
fully loaded onto the server the status will read Complete.

Progress — the Progress bar is a status indicator for each user indicating how much of the
file has been downloaded to that users’ machine. Each section of the bar represents a
session attendee, with the first section reserved for the Moderator. There are five download
status reporting levels: Red: 0% – 50%, Orange: 51% – 75%, Yellow: 76% - 95%, Cyan:
96% – 99% and green is 100% complete.
When a session is being recorded, the Progress bar shows the recording as
another session attendee. For example, if you have three people in your session
and you are recording the session, the Progress bar will be divided into five
sections: the first section represents the Moderator and the remaining sections
represent the three session attendees and the recording session attendees.
Page 324
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Loading a Multimedia File
To load a multimedia file, do the following:
1. In the Multimedia Library window, click the
Open button or, alternatively, from the
File menu, select Open > Multimedia from File….
2. The Open dialog box appears.
3. Navigate to the folder containing the multimedia file. Select the search method by
scrolling through Files of Type pull-down box and highlighting the format.
4. Click the file to select it.
5. Click OK to load the multimedia file and dismiss the dialog box.
Large multimedia files should be loaded early to allow time to transfer the
files to the server.
Loading a Multimedia URL
A multimedia URL is a multimedia file located on a web server. Typically, these are multimedia
files stored in a central web repository (such as LearnCentral) or files that you placed on a web
server yourself, specifically for retrieval during an Elluminate Live! session. (For assistance
uploading your files to a web server, see your system administrator.)
Use Multimedia URL loading when you have concerns about bandwidth.
Downloading large multimedia files from a web server can be much more
efficient than downloading from your own computer, where the bandwidth
resources are likely more limited.
To load a multimedia URL, do the following:
1. In the Multimedia Library window, click the
Load button or, alternatively, from the
File menu, select Open > Multimedia from URL….
2. The Enter Multimedia URL dialog box appears.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 325
Playing a Multimedia File or URL
3. Type the URL in the text box.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
The URL is now loaded into the Multimedia library.
Playing a Multimedia File or URL
After you have loaded either a multimedia file or multimedia URL you can select to play them,
one at a time.
The Multimedia feature will first attempt to play the file in the Elluminate Live! Multimedia
window and if this is not possible, it will then attempt to open the file up in the machine’s
supported media browser.
To send and play a multimedia file or URL to another session attendee,
1. In the Multimedia Library window, select the file or URL you wish to play from the list.
The selected item will be highlighted in the list.
2.
Click the
button.
Removing Multimedia Files or URLs
To remove the multimedia files or URLs from the Multimedia library,
1. In the Multimedia Library window, select the files and/or URLs you wish to remove. To
select more than one item, hold down Shift or Control ( ා or ໜ on Mac) while clicking
with the mouse. The selected items will be highlighted in the list.
2. Click the
the files.
button. A confirmation dialog will appear, asking you to confirm removal of
3. Click on Yes. The selected media file(s) will be removed from the library.
Stopping the Currently Playing Media
To stop the playing of a multimedia file, do the following:
1. In the Multimedia Library window, click the
will appear.
button. The Confirm Media Halt window
2. Click Yes to halt the playing of the current media.
Page 326
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Closing and Reopening the Multimedia Window
Closing the Multimedia window will not affect the files already loaded into the library – it just
closes the window. To close the window, do one of the following:
 Enter Ctrl+W ( ໜ W on Mac).
 Enter ALT+F4 (no Mac equivalent).
 Click on the Close Window button in the title bar of the window.
To reopen the window, select Window > Multimedia.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 327
Closing and Reopening the Multimedia Window
Page 328
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 18: Interactive Recordings
As a Moderator, you can record a session and play it later by clicking on a link. You may want to
provide the link to those who missed the session or to those who attended but would like to review
the session. Or you may want to record sessions for archival purposes.
Interactive recordings are not available in Elluminate vRoom™. For a list
of what features are available, visit the following webpage:
http://www.elluminate.com/Products/Product_Comparison/?id=146
All activity that occurs in the main room of the session will be recorded,1 except for private Chat
messages, the Timer and personal Notes. As the recording progresses, Elluminate Live! inserts
index entries to mark significant events within the session (see Using the Recording Index on
page 338 for further details). Anyone viewing the recording can navigate through the recording to
points marked with index entries.
You can start or stop recording at any time during the session. You also can erase the recording at
any time during the session.
Some sessions, when created, may have been set to record automatically. If
this is the case, you cannot start, stop or erase the recording. See your System
Administrator if you wish to control the recording of your session.
The recording controls are at the bottom-left corner of the Elluminate Live! window in the status
bar: 2
As a Moderator, you can use all the available Indexed Recordings features. Participants cannot
record sessions, but they can play them. In the table below, a checkmark indicates which functions
can be performed by Moderators and which can be performed by Participants.
Feature
Record a session (start, pause, resume and stop)
Moderators
Participants

1. Only the activity in the main Elluminate Live! room will be recorded. Anything that occurs in a
breakout room will not be recorded.
2. If the session creator disables recording or sets up the session to record automatically, you will
not see these controls.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 329
Recording Your Sessions
Feature
Moderators
Participants
Erase a recording while in a session

Manually add an index entry to a recording

Play, pause, resume and stop a recording


Navigate through a recording using the Playback control
buttons, the Playback menu and the Recording Index window


Search for a recording Index Entry using the Recording Index
window


Recording Your Sessions
The Recording Reminder Dialog
When you launch into a new session, if the session is not configured to be recorded automatically,
by default you will be prompted to record the session:
This dialog is presented to every Moderator. When you dismiss this dialog, you dismiss it for
yourself only – other Moderators will continue to see it until they dismiss their own dialogs.
To turn this reminder off for future sessions, select the option Don’t remind me again and close the
Recording Reminder dialog. You can turn the reminder back on for future session, using the
Preferences dialog:
1. Open the Preferences dialog in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Preferences… (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
From the Elluminate Live! menu, select Preferences (Mac OS X)
 Enter Ctrl+Comma (Windows, Linux & Solaris)
Enter ໜ , (Mac OS X)
Page 330
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. In the left pane of the Preferences dialog, select Recorder > Reminder. The Recorder
preference panel appears.
3. Select the option Always remind me to start the session recording.
4. Click on OK to save your preferences and close the Preferences dialog, Apply to save
your preferences and leave the Preferences dialog open or Cancel to close the Preference
dialog without saving any of your changes.
When you change preferences, Elluminate Live! will remember the settings each time you launch
future sessions on the same computer.
Starting a Recording
To begin recording your session, do one of the following:
 Click on the Start button in the Recording Reminder dialog (if it is presented to you).
 Click on the
Record button.
 From the Tools menu, select Recorder > Record.
Session attendees will be able to tell that recording has begun in two ways:
 The Recording icon in the status bar changes from
gray to
red.
 The audible notification “Recording started” is played to everyone in the session.(Those
using the telephone for audio communications may not hear it.)
Those who join the session after recording as already resumed will hear the
audible notification “Recording in progress.”
You can turn audible notifications off. For details, see Setting Notification
Preferences on page 11.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 331
Recording Your Sessions
Stopping and Pausing a Recording
At any time during your session, you can stop or pause the recording by doing one of the
following:
 Click on the
Pause button.
 From the Tools menu, de-select Recorder > Record.
Session attendees will be able to tell that recording has stopped in two ways:
 The Recording icon in the status bar changes from
red to
gray.
 The audible notification “Recording stopped” is played to everyone in the session. (Those
using the telephone for audio communications will not hear it.)
You can turn audible notifications off. For details, see Setting Notification
Preferences on page 11.
You can start and stop the recording as many times as you like during your session.
Frequently starting and stopping a recording can cause the recording file to
be larger than the file created when you simply allow the recording to run
uninterrupted. The recording also may play back slower.
Resuming a Recording
To resume the recording if you’ve paused it, do one of the following:
 Click on the
Record button.
 From the Tools menu, select Recorder > Record.
Manually Adding an Index Entry
As a recording progresses, Elluminate Live! inserts index entries to mark significant events within
the session (see Using the Recording Index on page 338 for further details). If the automatic
indexing does not mark a spot in your session that you want to be able to reference later when you
play the recording (such as when you begin a discussion or take a break), you can manually add an
index entry.
1. Open the Enter Description of Index dialog box in one of two ways:
 From the Tools menu select Recorder > Add Index Entry.
 Enter Ctrl+Shift+I ( ාໜ I on Mac)
Page 332
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. Enter a description for your index entry.
3. Click on OK to add the index entry or Cancel to close the dialog without saving an index
entry.
The index entry is created for the place you are at in the recording when you
click on OK – not when you open the Enter Description of Index dialog.
Erasing a Recording
You can erase the content of the recording at any time during the session.
1. From the Tools menu select Recorder > Erase Recording. A dialog box appears, asking
you to confirm that you want to erase the recording.
2. Click on OK to erase the recording or Cancel to keep the recording.
Playing a Recording
A recording is played by clicking on a recording link. The access to your recordings will be
dependent on your organization’s administrative interface. Please contact your administrator for
more information on accessing recording links.
Use the Playback Controller panel (at the bottom-left corner of the window in the status bar) to
start, stop, pause/resume and navigate through the recording:
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 333
Playing a Recording
Follow the steps below to play a recording:
1. Click on the recording link. An Elluminate Live! window will open. The Playback
Controller panel is at the bottom-left corner of the window in the status bar:
2. To begin playing the recording, do one of the following:
 Click on the
Play/Resume button to begin playing the recording at normal speed.
 Click on the
Fast-Forward button to play the recording at an accelerated speed.
Video, Multimedia, Web Tour and File Transfer are not displayed when
you fast-forward through a recording. Also, Audio is muted when fastforwarding.
In Elluminate Live! 8.5 and older recordings, Mac users will see Web Tours
as Web Pushes, where each page of a Web Tour will open in a new external web
browser window.
As the recording advances, the Playback Time indicator, the Current Index
Entry Mark and the Playback slider will show your progress through the
recording.
3. To cease playing the recording, do one of the following:
 Click on the Pause button to stop playing the recording and maintain your current
place in the recording. (To begin playing where you left off, click on the Play/
Resume button.)
 Click on the Stop button to stop playing the recording and return to the beginning
of the recording.
Names Hidden in Recordings
If, when viewing a recording, you see session attendee names replaced by the generic “Participant”
or “Moderator” (such as in the Chat panel and Participants List), this means that the session creator
configured the session to hide attendee names. This is done to protect the identity of session
attendees.
Page 334
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Navigating Within a Recording
When you play a recording, you are not required to play it from start to finish. You can skip ahead
or move back to areas of particular interest by navigating through a list of index entries. When
Elluminate Live! is recording a session, it automatically creates index entries for the following
events:

Change slide in the Whiteboard

Change topic in the Whiteboard

Start a Web Tour

Start an Application Sharing session

Stop an Application Sharing session

Start playing a Multimedia file

Load a file for transfer

Start a Quiz

Show the Graphing Calculator

Hide the Graphing Calculator

Connect session to teleconference

Disconnect session from teleconference
You also can manually enter an index entry (see Manually Adding an Index Entry on page 332).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 335
Navigating Within a Recording
There are four ways to navigate within a recording:
To…
Use…
Move to a general area within the recording, Playback slider
not associated with an index entry
Move to the previous or next index entry
Previous Index Entry and Next Index Entry
buttons or Playback slider
Move to a nearby index entry
Playback slider or Prior Index Entries and
Upcoming Index Entries menu options in the
Playback menu
Move to any index entry by selecting it
from, or searching for it in, the Recording
Index
Recording Index
Regardless of which method you use, it may take several seconds for the
recording to reach the specified location – especially if moving backward in the
recording.
Knowing Where You Are
There are three ways you can determine your current position in a recording:
Playback Slider: When you move your cursor over the slider you will see a tool tip containing the
name of the index entry over which you are hovering and the associated time in the recording. If
you are not hovering over an index entry, the tooltip will display the text “Drag indictor to move
within the recording” followed by the time.
Current Index Entry and Time: The Current Index Entry and Current Time are displayed in the
status bar. The Current Index Entry displays the icon and name of the closest index entry within a
+/- 30 second range.1 If there is no index entry within that range, there will be no Current Index
Entry displayed. In the example below, the recording is currently at or near the point where a web
tour of www.thermodynamics.ca is being started.
1. The index entry normally is the same as the text in the Details column of the Recording Index. If
there is no “Details” text, the text will be the same as that in the Kind column of the Recording Index.
Page 336
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Play Icon: The Play icon in the Recording Index indicates the current playback position in the
recording (see Using the Recording Index on page 338).
Using the Playback Slider
You can move to a specific index entry or just move randomly backward or forward in the
recording using the Playback Slider. The slider can be used in one of two ways:
 Move your cursor over the Playback Slider noting the tooltips (indicating location) and
click at the desired position.
 Grab the Playback Slider indicator with your cursor and
drag it to the left or right.
Using the Previous and Next Index Entry Buttons
If you want to move to the previous or next index entry, click on the Previous Index Entry button
or the Next Index Entry button.
Using Prior and Upcoming Index Entries
If you want to move to a specific index entry, you can select it from one of two sub-menus: Prior
Index Entries and Upcoming Index Entries.
1. Click on the Show Playback Menu button in the Playback Controller panel. The
Playback menu will open.
2. From the Playback menu, select either Prior Index Entries or Upcoming Index Entries.
3. Select the desired index entry.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 337
Navigating Within a Recording
Using the Recording Index
The Recording Index window displays a complete list of all index entries in your recording. You
can navigate to any index entry in the list.
Opening the Recording Index
To open the Recording Index window, do one of the following:
 Click on the Show Playback Menu button in the Playback Controller panel and select
Show Recording Index… from the Playback menu.
 From the Session menu, select Show Recording Index…
You can resize the Recording Index window by grabbing a side or corner
and dragging it. The columns will automatically adjust themselves.
The Recording Index has five columns:

Play icon column: is the left-most column (it has no text in the column header). It is used
to hold the Play icon, which indicates the current playback position in the recording.

Time column: lists the times in the recording that index entries were created, either
automatically by Elluminate Live! or manually by you.

Source column: shows the icon of the Elluminate Live! module being used when the
index entry was created. For manually created index entries, the column will show the
Recording icon.
Page 338
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0

Kind column: gives a description of the event that triggered the index entry.

Details column: describes the specific screen, file, application or web address associated
with the event that triggered the index entry.
The Source, Kind and Details columns can be resized. Move your cursor over a column divider
between two column headers. The cursor will change to a double arrow. Drag the column divider
to the desired position.
Moving to an Index Entry
From the Recording Index, you can move to any place in the recording that is marked by an index
entry. You can do so in one of two ways:
 Double-click on the desired index entry.
 Select the desired index entry (by clicking on it or using the Up and Down Arrow keys)
and click on the Seek button.
The recording will begin playing at the point you specified. (If the recording was in a paused state
when you selected an index entry, you will have to click on Play to resume playback.)
It may take a few seconds for the recording to reach the specified location.
The Whiteboard, Video and Multimedia may not be displayed when you are
navigating to an index entry. The Whiteboard will go black, the Video window
will be blank and the Multimedia file window will not open – unless you are
specifically moving to the index for the Multimedia file, in which case it will open
and start playing.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 339
Navigating Within a Recording
Sorting the Recording Index
The Recording Index can be sorted by the Time, Source, Kind and Details columns.

Time: sorts numerically by time mark

Source: sorts by grouping all entries related to the same modules (with the same Source
icon) together

Kind: sorts alphabetically

Details: sorts alphabetically
The sort direction is indicated in the column
header by the ascending and descending
Sort icons. To sort by a column, click on the
column header. Each successive click on the
same header advances the sorting status
through a sequence of ascending,
descending and unsorted.
The default sort order is by Time, in
ascending order – chronologically from the
beginning of the recording to the end.
Click on the Kind column header to sort by
Kind in ascending alphabetical order.
Click on the Kind column header again to
sort by Kind in descending alphabetical
order.
Click on the Kind column header again to stop sorting by Kind and return to the default sorting
order (Time in ascending order).
You can sort by one column only – there is no secondary sorting on a
second column.
Page 340
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Filtering the Recording Index
Sometimes in a session you might
rapidly repeat events, such as quickly
skipping through presentation screens in
the Whiteboard. You have the option of
filtering from view any consecutive
duplicate index entries (entries of the
same Kind and from the same Source)
that occur within a couple of seconds of
each other. Filtering can help you
eliminate “noise” from your Recording
Index.
In the example to the right, a number of
index entries were triggered by slide
changes in the Whiteboard. The
duplicates are highlighted in yellow.
To filter out the duplicate index entries
in the Recording Index, select the
option Suppress duplicate entries.
In the example to the right, the index
entries that were highlighted in yellow
above are no longer shown.
Suppressing duplicate
entries does not remove
them, but just hides them.
To see them again, simply
de-select Suppress duplicate
entries.
Searching for an Index Entry
If you have a large recording, it may not be easy to find a particular index entry by scrolling
through the list in the Recording Index. You can quickly find index entries by searching for
specified text in the Kind and Details fields of the index entry.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 341
Navigating Within a Recording
To search for an index entry, type your
search term in the Search box. For
example, if you want to search for
index entries containing the term
“reaction”, start typing the word in the
Search box.
Note that the search begins almost
immediately as you type, so you will
start getting matching index entries
before you have finished typing the word. (Note the highlight areas in the example to the right.)
Keep typing until you get the results you desire.
To search immediately, without the one or two second delay, enter your text
and immediately press either Return or Enter.
Mac users will see a standard Mac search field rather than the Elluminate
search field.
To clear the Search box and end your search, do one of the following:
 Click on the
 Press Escape
Page 342
Cancel icon
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 19: The Notes Window
The Notes window lets you easily take personal notes during a live Elluminate Live! session, edit
them and later share them with others. (During the session, only you will see your own notes.) As
you write notes about what is being presented in a session, Elluminate Live! synchronizes the notes
to the session timeline. This is very useful when reviewing recorded sessions later. When playing a
recording, the Notes window tracks the progress of the session and displays the notes that were
taken at every point during the session. (For information on recording sessions, see Chapter 18,
“Interactive Recordings”.)
A new Notes document is created each time you enter a new session and take notes. (If you reenter the same session multiple times, there will be only one Notes document created for that
session for that particular day. If you attend a session that spans multiple days, you will get a new
Notes document for each day.) These documents are saved locally on your computer.
The Notes facility can be used by Moderators and Participants. Both can
use the full set of Notes features.
Beyond simple note-taking, the Elluminate Live! Notes facility has a number of useful features:

You can edit, format or reorganize notes at any time, either during a live session or when
playing a recorded session.

You can share your notes with others.

You can manage your notes library by importing, exporting and deleting Notes
documents.

You can search within your list of Notes documents to easily locate notes taken for a
specific session.

You can view presentation notes imported with a loaded presentation.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 343
Opening and Closing the Notes Window
The Notes window has the following components:
Opening and Closing the Notes Window
Opening and closing the Notes window is quick and simple so, at any time, you can enter a note
without your attention being diverted away from the session in progress.
You can move, resize or close the Notes window so it is not obtrusive. If you close it, you can
reopen it later and continue where you left off. The window remembers where you were when you
closed the window so you can continue entering notes without worrying if your cursor is in the
right position. It also remembers its size and position, so it will appear exactly the same as the last
time you opened it.
Page 344
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
On Windows, Linux and Mac OS X platforms, the Notes window always
remains in front of the Elluminate Live! main window. On Solaris, if you click on
the main Elluminate Live! window, the Notes window will move behind the main
window.
The following table describes how to open and close the Notes window:
You want to
Precondition
Use accelerator keys
Use menus or other
Open the Notes
window
Notes window is
closed
Ctrl+E (Windows,
Linux & Solaris)
Select Windows > Notes
ໜ E (Mac)
Click on
toolbar.
in the
Ctrl+E (Windows,
Activate the Notes Notes window is
window (bring it to open but inactive (or Linux & Solaris)
hidden in the back)
the front)
ໜ E (Mac)
Select Windows > Notes
Close the Notes
window
Click Close button in
Notes window
Notes window is
open and active
Ctrl+W or ALT+F4
(Windows, Linux &
Solaris)
ໜ W (Mac)
Click on
toolbar.
in the
Taking Notes
Getting Started
1. Open the Notes window (as described in the above
section).
2. Start typing. The cursor is positioned at the top of the
Notes editor – presumably that is where you want to
enter your first note. As you enter a note, the text will
wrap to fit the Notes window.
3. Press Enter to end the note and start a new one. A note is
similar to a paragraph (in a word processor) in that
pressing Enter ends a note and creates a new one
immediately below it. (To enter a new note somewhere
other than directly below the existing note, see Inserting
Notes on page 350.)
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 345
Taking Notes
If you want to enter a line break without creating a new note, press AltEnter ( ໩ Enter on Mac).
Creating Lists
The Notes window provides basic support for creating lists. You simply enter designated list
characters at the beginning of a line. When you press Enter, those characters are examined to
determine if this line is part of a list. All list items will remain grouped together in the same note.
1. Type the desired special list character (refer to
the table below) followed by the text for the
first list item.
2. Press Enter to create the next line in the list.
3. Manually preface each list item with the special
list character – it is not done automatically like
in a word processor.
4. Press Enter twice to end the list. A new note
will be created below.
Use the following special list characters to create your
list:
Character(s)
Description
-
Create a hyphenated list
•
Create a bulleted list
Alt-0149 using numeric keypad on Windows
໩ 8 on Mac OS X
1.
Create a numbered list where numbers are followed by periods
2-
Create a numbered list where numbers are followed by hyphens
3)
Create a numbered list where numbers are followed by parentheses
a. or A.
Create a lettered list where letters are followed by periods
a- or A-
Create a lettered list where letters are followed by hyphens
Page 346
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Character(s)
Description
a) or A)
Create a lettered list where letters are followed by parentheses
Formatting Notes Text
To enhance the readability of your notes, Notes lets
you change font size and apply basic text styles to your
notes.
1. Select the text you want to format.
2. Enter the desired keyboard shortcut to format
the text (see table below).
You can use most standard text editing
mouse actions within the text of notes, such
as double-clicking to select a word and
dragging to select text.
The following standard text editing keyboard shortcuts
can be used to perform functions within the text of individual notes.
Function
Windows, Linux &
Solaris Shortcuts
Mac OS X
Shortcuts
Make selected text Bold
Ctrl+B
ໜB
Make selected text Italics
Ctrl+I
ໜI
Underline selected text
Ctrl+U
ໜU
Decrease font
Ctrl+[
ໜ[
Ctrl+-
ໜ-
Ctrl+]
ໜ]
Ctrl+=
ໜ=
Ctrl+A
ໜA
size of selected text
Increase font size of selected text
Select all text in current note
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 347
Taking Notes
Function
Windows, Linux &
Solaris Shortcuts
Mac OS X
Shortcuts
Copy selected text
Ctrl+C
ໜC
Cut selected text
Ctrl+X
ໜX
Paste copied text
Ctrl+V
ໜV
Delete selected text
Delete
Delete
Backspace
Insert a line break within a note
Alt+Enter
໩ Enter
Text formatting will not be retained if you copy and paste formatted text
from one note to another, or to an external text editing application.
Changing the Text Size in the Notes Editor
You can change the size of the text displayed in the Notes editor to make it more readable for you.
The font size of the entire document will change and any changes that were made using the
Decrease and Increase keyboard shortcuts will be overridden.
The available text sizes are 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 28, 32 and 36 points. To
change the font size of the text, do one of the following:
Page 348
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
 Select the font size from the Text Size menu in the tool
bar of the Notes window.
 Right click (^Click on Mac) anywhere in the Notes editor
and select one of the options from the context menu.
-
Make Text Bigger – increase the text size to the next
larger size. For example, if the text was set to 12,
selecting Make Text Bigger will increase the size
to 13.
-
Make Text Smaller –decrease the text size to the next
smaller size. For example, if the text was set to 36,
selecting Make Text Smaller will decrease the size
to 32.
-
Default Size –set the text size back to the default
setting of 12.1
-
Text Size – change the text size to that selected from
the submenu.
Working with Notes
Selecting Notes
You need to select notes to perform operations on
them, such as moving and deleting them.
To select a note, you need to select the thumb
associated with the note. When a note is selected, its
thumb is highlighted. You can do so in one of two
ways:
 Click directly on the thumb. Note that the
mouse pointer changes from an arrow to a
hand. This means you can drag the note to
another location.
 Press Escape. The thumb of the note that was currently being edited will be highlighted,
indicating the note is selected.
1. This value may be different for non-English implementations of Elluminate Live!
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 349
Working with Notes
There are also keyboard shortcuts you can use to select notes:
Function
Precondition
Windows & Linux/
Solaris Shortcuts
Mac OS X
Shortcuts
Select the previous note
Initial note is selected
press Up Arrow
twice
press ↑ twice
Select the next note
Cursor is within text of
note
press Enter twice
press Enter or
Return twice
Initial note is selected
press Down
Arrow twice
press ↓ twice
Cursor is within text of
note
press Escape
press Escape
Select the note you are
currently entering or
editing
Inserting Notes
Typically, when you are first entering your notes, you will simply press Enter to create a new note
beneath the existing note. However, you can insert new notes anywhere in the Notes editor – when
initially entering them or editing them later. The existing notes will reflow automatically to make
room for the new note.
Other than inserting a note below the existing note, you can insert new notes

before the existing note,

between existing notes, or

anywhere in the Notes editor.
Use keyboard shortcuts to insert notes:
Function
Precondition
Windows & Linux/
Solaris Shortcuts
Mac OS X Shortcuts
Insert a new note
immediately below the
existing note
Cursor is within
text of note
Enter
Enter or Return
Initial note is
selected
Enter or
Enter or Return or ↓
Page 350
Down Arrow
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Function
Precondition
Windows & Linux/
Solaris Shortcuts
Mac OS X Shortcuts
Insert a new note
immediately above the
existing note
Initial note is
selected
Up Arrow
↑
Use a click of the mouse to insert new notes:
To insert a new note between two existing
notes, click between the two notes (either
between text or thumbs).
To insert a new note anywhere in the Notes
editor, click any blank area in the Notes editor.
(For example, you may want to leave blank
areas to remind you to go back and fill in further
details later on.)
Each note has an internal timestamp (not visible to you) that keeps it
synchronized with its associated activity within the session. When you enter a
new note between two existing notes, the timestamp of the new note will be a
relative time between the timestamps of the two existing notes.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 351
Working with Notes
Moving Notes
Notes can be moved up and down and reorganized
freely using the mouse. Other notes will automatically
reflow if needed to make room for moved notes.
1. Click on the thumb of the note you want to
move. When the mouse is hovering over the
thumb, the cursor changes to a hand to indicate
it can be grabbed.
2. Hold down the mouse and drag the note
vertically to the desired location.
3. Release the mouse to drop the note.
You can also use keyboard shortcuts to move notes:
Function
Precondition
Windows & Linux/
Solaris Shortcuts
Mac OS X
Shortcuts
Move the selected note
above the previous note
Note is selected
Alt + Up Arrow
໩↑
Move the selected note
below the next note
Note is selected
Alt + Down Arrow
໩↓
Each note has an internal timestamp (not visible to you) that keeps it
synchronized with its associated activity within the session. When you move a
note between two other notes, the timestamp of the moved note will be a relative
time between the timestamps of the two other notes.
Deleting Notes
To delete a note, select it (click on its thumb) and press Delete or Backspace.
Printing Notes
To print notes, you must export the Notes document as a .txt file (see Exporting and Importing
Notes Documents on page 355), open it in a text editor and use the text editor’s print facility.
Exported .txt files do not retain time stamp and formatting information.
Page 352
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Viewing Presenter Notes Imported with a Presentation
When you load a PowerPoint or OpenOffice.org
presentation into the Whiteboard, you are given the option
of importing the presentation’s presenter notes as well. (For
details, see Loading a Presentation or Whiteboard File on
page 177.)
If you choose to import the presenter notes, they will appear
in the Notes editor of all session attendees. Each presenter
note becomes a separate entry in the Notes editor and is
prefaced with the name of the associated slide (as shown in
the screen capture to the right).
If any session attendee already has notes within their Notes
editor when you import a new presentation, the presenter
notes will be appended to the end.
Users must explicitly open the
Notes window to see the imported notes
– the window does not open
automatically. And if users don’t open
the Notes window, the presenter notes
will not be saved to a Notes document.
Saving Notes
You never have to save notes because Notes documents are saved automatically to your local hard
drive.
Managing Notes Documents
Opening the Notes Documents List
The Notes Documents list displays a list of the sessions for which you took notes. It is always
closed when the Notes window is first opened in an Elluminate Live! session, as the primary
purpose of the Notes window is to take notes for the present session.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 353
Managing Notes Documents
There are two ways to open the Notes Documents list:
 Click on the
Manage Notes button.
 Drag the divider down using the mouse.
The Notes Documents list displays the date and name of
each session that has notes associated with it. Sessions
are always listed in reverse chronological order; this
order cannot be changed.
Selecting any Notes document in the list displays its
notes in the Notes editor below.
The Notes document for the current session is
highlighted in bold.
You can select multiple Notes documents.1 When they
are for different sessions then nothing is displayed in
the Notes editor. When they are for the same session,
the multiple Notes documents will be compounded
(merged) and displayed as one. See Using Compound
Notes on page 359 for details.
When no Notes documents are selected, the Notes
editor is blank.
Searching Notes Documents
Over time, your list of Notes documents will grow and locating a specific session document by
scrolling the list may become increasingly challenging. The Search Notes Documents feature can
be used to filter the Notes Documents list by allowing you to display only those Notes Documents
whose session name contains your specified search string.
To display the Search field, you must first open the Notes Documents list
by clicking on the
Manage Notes button.
1. Select the first Notes document and hold down Control ( ໜ on the Mac) as you select the remaining notes.
Page 354
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Session dates are not searchable. Sessions are
listed in reverse chronological order and it is
easy for you to scroll to the desired date.
To perform a search, type your search string in
the Search field. Searches are case insensitive
(no distinction is made between upper case
and lower case letters).
The list of Notes documents is updated
dynamically as you type.
The Search field cannot be used to search the text within notes in the Notes
editor. Therefore, it is hidden when the Notes Documents list is closed.
Exporting and Importing Notes Documents
You can share your notes with someone else by exporting and importing Notes documents.
Perhaps someone could not attend a session and would like to review your notes while playing a
recording of the session. Or maybe two of you (who both attended a session) would like to
compare notes.
You may also want to export notes to open them in another application to edit or print them.
Exporting Notes Documents
Notes can be exported in one of two formats.

For sharing notes with others to use within an Elluminate Live! session, export them as
Notes documents (.eln files).

For importing notes into other applications, export them as text files (.txt files).
Notes Document (.eln file): An .eln document is the format used within Elluminate Live! It is not
suitable for importing into other applications as other applications cannot interpret them (making
them unreadable). However, as .eln files retain all timestamp and formatting information, they are
the format required to share notes with others. When imported back into Elluminate Live!, they are
perfectly readable.
Text File (.txt file): A .txt file can be opened by any
application that reads text files. Because .txt files do not
retain time stamp and formatting information, they
cannot be used to share notes with others in Elluminate
Live! However, if you want to edit or print a Notes
document in another application, export them as .txt
files as the notes will be in a readable format (as in the
sample to the right).
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 355
Managing Notes Documents
Another way to export notes is simply to copy and paste them into another
application. As with exporting via a .txt file, the text formatting (bold, italics, etc.)
will not be retained.
It is possible to export either one or multiple Notes documents at once.
If the multiple documents pertain to the same session (same name and
date), they are automatically compounded into a single file during export. See
Using Compound Notes on page 359 for more information.
To export Notes documents, follow the steps below:
1. From the Notes Documents list, select the
Notes document(s) you want to export.1
2. Click on the
Export Notes button at the
top of the Notes window. The Save file dialog
will open.
3. Browse to the directory in which you want to
save your Notes documents. (Elluminate
Live! will remember this location the next
time you export Notes documents.)
4. Select the file format in which you want to save your Notes documents.
5. Enter a name for your Notes document. (See Notes Document Filenames on page 357 for
further information.)
1. To select more than one Notes document, select the first document and hold down Control ( ໜ on
the Mac) as you select the remaining documents.
Page 356
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
6. If you are exporting multiple documents, and you want them all to be saved in the same
format and in the same location, check the Apply to All checkbox.
7. Click on Save. If you are saving multiple notes files at once, you will be required to click
on Save for each one.
Notes Document Filenames
By default, the file name of an exported Notes document is named as follows:
<Date>-<Session Name>.eln
where <Date> is the date the notes were taken and <Session Name> is the name of the session
for which the notes were taken. The format of the date is determined by your system preferences.
However, you can name an exported document whatever you like.
If you change the name of a Notes document during export, and import the
renamed document back into Elluminate Live!, the name within the Notes
Documents list will be the same as it was before export – it will be listed using
the name and date of the session for which the notes were taken.
Importing Notes Documents
Imported notes behave the same way as notes that
were created locally. They can be viewed, edited,
deleted and reorganized just like local Notes
documents.
To import Notes documents, follow the steps below:
1. Click on the
Import Notes button at the
top of the Notes window. The Open file
dialog will open.
Only .eln files can be imported as
only they contain the information
required by Elluminate Live! – such as
timestamps and formatting information.
2. Select the document(s) you wish to import.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 357
Managing Notes Documents
3. Click on Open. The imported Notes
document(s) will appear in the Notes
Documents list. (If the Notes
Documents list was previously closed,
it will be opened to display your
imported Notes document.)
If you import notes from someone
else for a session for which you
already have your own notes, or if you
import more than one set of notes for
the same session, Elluminate Live!
will distinguish the Notes documents
by appending the authors’ names to
the session name (as in the example to
the right).
Imported Notes documents are copied to the Notes storage directory.
Therefore, the original notes files you imported are no longer required and, if you
like, you can delete them.
Page 358
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Deleting Notes Documents
When you delete a Notes document, it is
removed from the Notes Documents list and
deleted from the Notes storage directory.
Be careful when deleting
Notes documents – deletion is
permanent.
To delete Notes documents, follow the steps
below:
1. From the Notes Documents list, select
the Notes document(s) you want to delete.1
2. Click on the
Delete Notes button. A
message dialog will appear, asking you to
confirm the delete operation.
3. Click on Yes to complete the deletion.
Deleting the Notes Document for the Current Session
If you try to delete the Notes document for the current session, it will remain listed in the Notes
Documents list since the current session must always have a Notes document open into which you
can enter notes. However, the contents of the Notes document (the actual notes) will be deleted. If
you do not enter new notes before the session ends, no notes will be saved for the current session.
Using Compound Notes
Elluminate Live! lets you view multiple Notes documents simultaneously by compounding
(merging) the documents together as one in the Notes editor. This is a great way to compare your
notes with those written by someone else for the same session.
1. To select more than one Notes document, select the first document and hold down Control ( ໜ on
the Mac) as you select the remaining documents.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 359
Using Compound Notes
When you have multiple Notes documents for a
particular session, they appear as separate items in
the Notes Documents list. The name of each author
is appended to the session name.
In the Notes editor, each note is prefaced by the
name of its author. The notes are sorted by
timestamps (not visible to you), just as they are in a
single Notes document.
A compound Notes document behaves like a
“normal” document. You can add, move, edit or
delete notes. The changes you make are saved to
their respective underlying Notes documents. In the
example to the right, if you edited the first note, it
would be saved to Ricky’s Notes document.
When you add new notes, if you are the author of
one of the underlying Notes documents, the new
notes will be added to your Notes document.
However, if you didn’t author any of the underlying
documents, the new notes will be added to the first
underlying document (the first one listed in the
Notes Documents list). In the example to the right,
Vivian’s note will be added to Ricky’s Notes
document.
If you want to save the compound notes, you can
merge them into a single document by exporting them. (See Exporting Notes Documents on
page 355.) Once exported, it can be managed like any other Notes document (e.g., searched,
deleted, compounded with yet another Notes document, etc.).
Page 360
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Notes in Recordings
Viewing Notes in a Recording
Notes are tied to events in a session via an internal
clock. When viewing a recorded session, the Notes
window automatically moves a marker (arrow)
through the notes to point to the notes that were
entered at specific times during the session.
The Notes window does not automatically open
when you begin playing a recording. You must open
it manually (see Opening and Closing the Notes
Window on page 344).
If you pause, rewind or forward the recording, the
marker will move in the Notes document in
accordance with the current time of the recorded
session.
If the current note is out of view, the editor will scroll
to it automatically. The arrow marker is always
aligned with the top of the note. However if the note
is significantly taller than the arrow, a vertical tail
will cover the entire height of the note to make sure
the indicator is always visible.
If no notes were taken for the recorded session, a new blank Notes
document will be created, allowing you to enter notes about the recording.
Editing Notes in a Recording
Other than the arrow marker, there is basically no
difference between notes in a recording and notes in
a live session. Notes can be edited, inserted and
deleted while you play a recording in the same way
as can be done during a live session. (Refer to
Taking Notes on page 345 and Working with Notes
on page 349.) Just like notes in a live session, they
are automatically saved and any changes will overwrite the original notes file.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 361
Notes in Recordings
When you select a note, and it is the current note at
this point of the recording, the arrow marker changes
from gray to the highlight color for your operating
system.
While you edit the text of a note, the recorded
session continues and the arrow marker moves to the
next notes in the order they were taken.
Subsequently, as the Notes editor scrolls down, you
may lose sight of the note you are editing.
Pause the recording to keep the
note you are editing in focus – displayed
within the visible portion of the Notes
editor.
Page 362
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 20: The Quiz Manager
The Quiz Manager allows you to create multiple choice and short answer quiz questions. A quiz
can consist of any number of questions and can be presented to Participants during the session.
The results are tabulated for your review and can be published for the session attendees to review.
Creating a Quiz
To create a quiz, do the following:
1. Open the Quiz Manager window, by doing one of the following:
 Select Window > Quiz Manager.
 Click on the
button in the toolbar.
The Quiz Manager consists of a toolbar and the Quiz Library panel.
2. Click on
to create a new quiz. The New Quiz panel appears.
3. Enter the name of the quiz, replacing the default text ‘New Quiz’.
4. Click on
Doc Revision 1.0
to create a new question. The New question… text box appears.
Page 363
Creating a Quiz
5. Enter your question by replacing the default text ‘New question…’.
There are two types of questions you may ask — multiple choice or short answer.

If you are asking a multiple-choice question continue with the next step.

If you are asking a short answer question, go to step 7.
6. To enter multiple-choice responses, click on the
button. One ‘New choice…’ text box
will be created every time you click on the button. The following example has 4 multiplechoice responses.
a. Enter your responses by overwriting the ‘New choice’ text in each of the text boxes.
b. Click on the
button to mark which of the multiple-choice responses is the correct
answer. The icon will change to a .
7. To enter a short answer response for your question, click on the
answer in the yellow text field.
button and enter your
Use the short answer type of question if you want to give people freedom
when answering a question.
Although you must enter something into the yellow text field, the Quiz
Manager will not be able to grade the short answer responses unless the answer
given matches the correct answer exactly. Marking of inexact answers must be
done manually by the Moderator.
Page 364
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
8. Click on
to create another new question and repeat the earlier steps until you have
entered all your questions and responses.
9. Click the
button to save the quiz and return to the Quiz Library. Your quiz will appear
in the Quiz Library list. The quiz is saved for this session only. You can now administer
the quiz to the Participants or you can save it to disk. (See Saving Quizzes to Disk on
page 368 for instructions.)
Administering Quizzes to Participants
Once you have created a quiz, you can administer the quiz to the Participants. The quiz can be
defined to be completed in a specific time or have no time limit defined (that is, open ended). If the
quiz is timed, a clock will be displayed in the Quiz Manager window indicating to session
attendees and yourself how much time is remaining to complete the quiz. Once all the Participants
have submitted their answers or the time limit has elapsed, the quiz will stop.
To administer the quiz do the following:
1. Open the Quiz Manager window, by doing one of the following:
 Select Window > Quiz Manager.
 Click on the
button in the toolbar.
Any quizzes you just created and any quizzes you loaded will be listed. (For details on
loading existing quizzes, see Loading Previously Saved Files into the Quiz Library on
page 369.)
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 365
Administering Quizzes to Participants
2. Select the quiz from the list of available quizzes and then click the
is an example of a quiz.
button. Following
3. If desired, to set a time limit for the quiz, click
and enter the time limit for the quiz in
the Set Time Limit dialog box. The value is in minutes and must be a whole number.
4. To administer the quiz to the Participants, click the
button.
As each person hands in their quiz, you will be able to navigate through the questions
(using the arrow buttons) and review their responses. The indicator at the bottom of the
page (in the example below, 3/4) informs you of the number of persons who have handed
in their quiz.
To view answers given by an individual, use the drop-down menu to select the
individual’s name.
Page 366
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Viewing and Saving Quiz Results
1. Once all Participants have handed in their quiz or the time limit has elapsed, the quiz will
stop. Alternatively, you can stop and score the quiz by clicking on the
button. You can
view a summary or individual people’s results by selecting their name from the pull-down
Summary menu.
2. You may publish the results by clicking on the
button. The Participants can view the
questions, and the correct answers along with their own responses. They also can view a
graphical display of the summary of all the responses. They will not see the individual
person’s responses. They can use the
arrow buttons or drop-down menu
(shown below) to navigate between questions.
3. Click the
Doc Revision 1.0
button to return to the Quiz Library.
Page 367
Saving Quizzes to Disk
4. The quiz results file will appear in the Quiz Library list. The file will display the date and
time the quiz was written.
5. To save the quiz results as a .vcq file (so you can view the results later), click on
and
select the quiz results file from the Save Quizzes dialog. (For details, see Saving Quizzes
to Disk on page 368.) The quiz results file will have the date and time appended to the file
name.
To view a .vcq file, open it in Microsoft Excel.
Saving Quizzes to Disk
You may save a single or multiple quizzes to a disk so that they can be used in other sessions. You
may also save the quiz results, which can be viewed at a later date.
1. Open the Save Quizzes dialog in one of the following ways:
 If you are in the Quiz Manager window, click on the
 Click on the
Save icon.
Save button in the Toolbar and select Quiz…
 From the File Menu, select Save > Quiz…
All the quizzes and quiz results currently loaded in the Quiz Library will be displayed in
the Save Quizzes dialog.
Quizzes file names are appended with the text [Master] and quiz results file names are
appended with the text [Written], along with the date and time the results file was
generated.
Page 368
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
2. Select one of the following options:

Save all quizzes - all the quizzes in the list will be saved.

Save selected quizzes – just the highlighted quizzes in the list will be saved.
All the quizzes will be saved to one *.vcq file. When you go to load this file back into the
Quiz Manager Library, the individual quizzes will be extracted from the file and be
displayed as separate quizzes.
3. Click OK to save the quizzes. The Save dialog box opens.
4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save your file.
5. Type a file name for the quiz in the File Name box.
6. Click Save. The Save dialog box closes, and Elluminate Live! saves the quiz as a “.vcq”
file and you are returned to the Quiz Manager window.
If you forget to save any quizzes or quiz results, you will be reminded to do
so when you exit the session.
Loading Previously Saved Files into the Quiz Library
In the Quiz Manager window,
1. Click the
button. The Open dialog box appears.
2. Navigate to and select the file you want to open. The saved quizzes are in .vcq format.
3. Click Open. The Open dialog box will close and you will be returned to the Quiz Manager
window.
The quiz will appear in the Quiz Library list.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 369
Editing a Quiz
Editing a Quiz
To edit an existing quiz, do the following:
1. Highlight the quiz from the list and then click on the
button.
The quiz is displayed in the Quiz Manager.
For questions, use the
arrow buttons to navigate between questions, the
and
buttons to reorder the questions, the button to delete a question and the button to
create a new question.
For responses to the current question, use the
and
responses and the
button to delete a response.
2. After editing the quiz, click
Library.
buttons to reorder the list of
to save the quiz, close the Design panel and return to the
This will save the quiz to the Quiz Library for this session only. To
permanently save the quiz to its original file, use the
Save button in the Quiz
Library toolbar. (For details, see Saving Quizzes to Disk on page 368.)
Page 370
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Removing a Quiz from the Quiz Library
In the Quiz Manager window,
1. Select one or more quizzes from the library.
Use Shift-Click to select more than one quiz.
2. Click on
to remove the quizzes from the Quiz Library. (If you have saved the quizzes
to disk, this does not delete the files; the quizzes are just removed from the Quiz Library.)
3. In response to the confirmation dialog, click Yes.
Closing and Reopening the Quiz Manager Window
Closing the Quiz Manager window will not affect the quizzes already loaded into the library – it
just closes the window. To close the window, do one of the following:
 Enter Ctrl+W ( ໜ W on Mac).
 Enter ALT+F4 (no Mac equivalent).
 Click on the Close Window button in the title bar of the window.
To reopen the window, select Window > Quiz Manager.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 371
Closing and Reopening the Quiz Manager Window
Page 372
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Chapter 21: The Graphing Calculator
To display the calculator, select Graphing Calculator from the Window menu. The calculator is
displayed in front of the other windows. Resize or re-position the Graphing Calculator window as
desired.
Opening and Closing Graphing Calculator Window
To open the window, select Window > Graphing Calculator.
Closing the Graphing Calculator window will not affect any of the work you have already done –
it just closes the window. To close the window, do one of the following:
 Enter Ctrl+W ( ໜ W on Mac).
 Enter ALT+F4 (Windows, Linux and Solaris only).
 Click on the Close Window button in the title bar of the window.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 373
Private and Shared Calculators
Private and Shared Calculators
The Graphing Calculator feature supplies everyone with two calculators: a private and a shared
calculator.
Anyone can open and use their private calculator, which is visible only to them. Participants do not
need any permissions to use the private calculator, however, they can access it only if the Follow
Moderator option is turned off (which it is by default).
The shared calculator resides on the Moderator’s application. The Moderator must give each
Participant the Calculator permission in order to use the shared calculator. No permission is
required to view the shared calculator.
Both Graphing Calculators function identically.
Switching between the Private and Shared Graphing Calculator
To switch between the two calculators, select Shared or Private from the
drop down menu in the Graphing Calculator window.
The information on your private calculator does not change or get deleted
when you switch between private and shared calculators.
Using the Shared Graphing Calculator
The shared calculator can be used in one of two ways: with or without the Follow Moderator
option selected.
The shared calculator without the Follow Moderator option selected (default)

You and your Participants can work on the shared calculator as needed.

Participants can switch to their private calculator or close their Graphing Calculator
window at any time.

You can change the display region at any time.

Participants can make changes on the Graphing Calculator only when they have the
calculator permission. If Participants do not have the calculator permission, the buttons
and menus in the shared calculator are grayed out.
The shared calculator with the Follow Moderator option selected
Turn on the Follow Moderator option in one of the following ways:
 From the Tools menu, select Graphing Calculator > Follow Moderator.
 Select (check) the Follow Moderator option in the Graphing Calculator window.
Page 374
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
When the Graphing Calculator window is open, the shared Graphing Calculator is displayed to
everyone:

The Participants are forced to view the shared Graphing Calculator window and see all the
changes that are made on your calculator.

Participants cannot dismiss the Graphing Calculator or use their private calculator. You,
however, can always use your private calculator.

Participants can make changes on the calculator only when they have the calculator
permission. If Participants do not have the calculator permission, their calculator buttons
and menus are grayed out.

If you dismiss the Graphing Calculator window, then the Participants’ (private and shared)
calculators are dismissed as well.
Setting the Calculator Permission for Participants
Moderators automatically have the permission to use the shared calculator. A Participant must be
given the permission by a Moderator. To grant the Calculator permission to Participants, do the
following:
1. Select Window > Graphing Calculator to open the calculator window. The calculator
permission column will appear in the Participants List.
2. Click in the calculator permission column next to the Participants’ names.
The Graphing Calculator icon will be displayed next to the Participants’ names, indicating they
have the permission.
To remove the permission from Participants, click on the
names.
Graphing Calculator icon next to their
For further details on setting permissions, please refer to Setting
Permissions on page 51.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 375
Graphing Functions Using the Calculator
Graphing Functions Using the Calculator
You can enter only explicit functions in the Graphing Calculator. The calculator allows you to plot
two functions on the same grid. If your function contains a variable, it must be represented by an x.
1. Type your function in the Function box and press Enter to graph it.
2. Optionally, you can enter a second function in the second function box. Your first function
is graphed in blue, the second in red.
Entering Mathematical Operators and Functions
The following table lists the allowable mathematical operators.
Type
To perform this operation…
+
Add
-
Subtract
*
Multiply
Page 376
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Type
To perform this operation…
/
Divide
^
Exponent
()
Parenthesis (to indicate order of operation)
Use the following abbreviations for these functions and numbers.
Type
To represent this function or number…
sqrt
Square Root
abs
Absolute Value
log
Logarithm (base 10)
ln
Natural Logarithm
sin
Sine
cos
Cosine
tan
Tangent
csc
Cosecant
sec
Secant
cot
Cotangent
asin
Arcsine
acos
Arccosine
atan
Arctangent
pi

e
e
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 377
Displaying the Function History
Trigonometric functions are graphed in radians.
Displaying the Function History
Both function entry fields maintain a history of the ten most recent functions that you graphed.
When you exit the session, all the functions are erased.
Click the drop down arrow button next to the function field to display the history of graphed
functions for that field.
Evaluating Functions
1. Enter a value or expression for X in the Y= text box.
2. Click the
box appears.
Page 378
button to evaluate Y for the given value of X. The Solve Function dialog
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
3. Select the option Mark the resulting point on the graph if you want the coordinates of the
result plotted on your graph.
4. Click OK to accept your changes and dismiss the dialog box. Your result is displayed in
the Solve Function information box.
5. Click OK to dismiss the information box and view the coordinates on your graph. The
coordinates are displayed and plotted on the graph. You can zoom out or move the display
region to view the plotted coordinates on your graph.
Selecting and Displaying Points on the Graph
Select the
button on the calculator and then click a point on the grid. The point is identified
with a green X and the x- and y-coordinates for the point are displayed to four decimal places.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 379
Changing the Calculator Display Region
To display an x- or y-intercept or a point of intersection
1. Select the
button on the calculator.
2. Drag a selection box over a region that contains an x- or y-intercept or a point of
intersection of two functions to display the coordinates for a point.
If you select a region that has more than one point of interest, the point will be identified in the
following order of preference:
1. Point of intersection
2. x-intercept
3. y-intercept
If you select a region that has more than one point of equal priority, only the point with the lowest
x-value will be plotted. Alternatively, you can re-select a region with only one point of interest.
The calculator displays the coordinates of only one point at a time.
Changing the Calculator Display Region
Setting the Display Region and Grid Spacing
The display region of the graph is defined by the X range and Y range values. The Grid Spacing
draws visible lines that correspond to tick points on the x- and y-axis. By default, the display
region is set at –5 to 5 for the X range, –5 to 5 for the Y range and the Grid Spacing is set to 1.
To display a different region of the graph, enter values for the X range and Y range and set the
Grid Spacing.
Page 380
Elluminate Live!
version 10.0
Zooming In and Out
To zoom in, click the
button and then click the region of the graph you want to zoom in on.
You can zoom in as many times as you need until you see the level of detail that you require.
To zoom out, click the
button and then click the display region. Click the display region again
to zoom out to see more of the display.
Moving the Graph in the Display Region
Click the
mouse.
button and then click and drag the display region to move the graph with your
You can also re-position the display region by selecting the options on the Restore Defaults menu:

Center Graph: This option is dependent on your current X and Y range and centers the
graph in the display region based on those values. If you had changed the grid size, this
option will not restore the grid defaults.

Default Graph Area: Centers the graph and resets the maximum and minimum Display
Region values back to the defaults (-5, 5 for both X and Y axes). If you had changed the
grid size, this option will not restore the grid defaults.
Doc Revision 1.0
Page 381
Changing the Calculator Display Region
Page 382
Copyright
This document contains confidential proprietary information and is protected by law. This document and the information contained in it are intended for authorized users only and may be used
only for the express purpose of legally accessing and using Elluminate products; any other use,
without Elluminate’s prior written permission, is strictly prohibited.
© 2001 - 2010 Elluminate, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Trademarks
Elluminate®, Elluminate Live!® and the Elluminate light bulb image and fonts are registered
trademarks of Elluminate, Inc., all rights reserved.
Elluminate Plan!TM is a trademark of Elluminate, Inc. All rights reserved.
Java, Java Runtime Environment, Java Web Start, Solaris and the Solaris logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. or other countries.
SPARC and UltraSPARC are registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc.
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 and PowerPoint are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Mac, Macintosh, the Mac logo and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
openSUSE and SUSE Linux Enterprise Server and are trademarks of Novell, Inc.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux is a trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
Ubuntu is a registered trademark of Canonical Ltd.
Tux, the Linux logo, was created by Larry Ewing using the GNU Image Manipulation Program
(GIMP) and generously provided freely to the Linux community.
OpenOffice.org is a trademark held by Team OpenOffice.org e.V. on behalf of OpenOffice.org.
All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies or organizations.